Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions

Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter

12th Physics Guide Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – 1:

Text Book Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
The Wavelength λe of an electron and λp of a photon of same energy E are related
by
a) λp α λe
b) λp α \(\sqrt{\lambda_{e}}\)
c) λp α \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\lambda_{e}}}\)
d) λp α λe2
Answer:
d) λp α λe2
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 1

Question 2.
In an electron microscope, the electrons are accelerated by a voltage of 14 kV. If the voltage is changed to 224 kV, then the de Brogue wavelength associated with the electrons would
a) increase by 2 times
b) decrease by 2 times
c) decrease by 4 times
d) increase by 4 times
Answer:
c) decrease by 4 times
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 2

Question 3.
A particle of mass 3 × 10-6 g has the same wavelength as an electron moving with a velocity 6 × 106 m s-1. The velocity of the particle is
a) 1.82 × 10-18 ms-1
b) 9 × 10-2 ms-1
c) 3 × 10-31 ms-1
d) 1.82 × 10-15 ms-1
Answer:
d) 1.82 × 10-15 ms-1
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 3

Question 4.
When a metallic surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength λ, the stopping potential is V. If the same surface is illuminated with radiation of wavelength 2λ, the stopping potential is V/4. The threshold wavelength for the metallic surface is
a) 4λ
b) 5λ
c) \(\frac{5}{2}\)λ
d) 3λ
Answer:
d) 3λ
Solution:
hν – hν0 = eV
\(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}-\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{o}}}\) = eV ………(1)
\(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{2 \lambda}-\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{a}}}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{eV}}{4}\) …………(2)
From (1) and (2)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 4

Question 5.
If light of wavelength 330 nm is incident on metal with work function 3.55 eV, the electrons are emitted. Then the wavelength of the emitted electron is (Take h = 6.6 × 10-34 Js)
a) < 2.75 × 10-9 m
b) ≥ 2.75 × 10-9 m
c) ≤ 2.75 × 10-12 m
d) < 2.5 × 10-10 m
Answer:
b) ≥ 2.75 × 10-9 m
Solution:
hv – Φ0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = K.E
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 5

Question 6.
A photoelectric surface is illuminated successively by monochromatic light of wavelength λ and λ/2. If the maximum kinetic energy of the emitted photoelectrons in the second case is 3 times that in the first case, the work function at the surface of material is
a) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
b) \(\frac{2 h c}{\lambda}\)
c) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{3 \lambda}\)
d) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{2 \lambda}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{2 \lambda}\)
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6

Question 7.
In photoelectric emission, radiation whose frequency is 4 times the threshold frequency of a certain metal is incident on the metal. Then the maximum possible velocity of the emitted electron will be
a) \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hv}_{0}}{\mathrm{~m}}}\)
b) \(\sqrt{\frac{6 h v_{0}}{m}}\)
c) \(2 \sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hv}_{0}}{\mathrm{~m}}}\)
d) \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{hv}_{0}}{2 \mathrm{~m}}}\)
Answer:
b) \(\sqrt{\frac{6 h v_{0}}{m}}\)
Solution:
ν = 4ν0
ν = ?
hν – hν0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2

4hν0 – hν0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2

3hν0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2

ν2 = \(\frac{6 \mathrm{~h} v_{\mathrm{o}}}{\mathrm{m}}\)

⇒ ν = \(\sqrt{\frac{6 h v_{0}}{m}}\)

Question 8.
Two radiations with photon energies 0.9 eV and 3.3 eV respectively are falling on a metallic surface successively. If the work function of the metal is 0.6 eV, then the ratio of maximum speeds of emitted electrons will be
a) 1 : 4
b) 1 : 3
c) 1 : 1
d) 1 : 9
Answer:
b) 1 : 3
Solution:
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv12 = 0.9 – 0.6 = 0.3 ……………….(1)
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv22 = 3.3 – 0.6 = 2.7 ……………….(2)
eqn (1) / (2)
\(\frac{v_{1}^{2}}{v_{2}^{2}}\) = \(\frac{0.3}{2.7}=\frac{1}{9}\)

\(\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}=\sqrt{\frac{1}{9}}=\frac{1}{3}\)
ν1 : ν2 = 1 : 3

Question 9.
A light source of wavelength 520 nm emits 1.04 × 1015 photons per second while the second source of 460 nm produces 1.38 × 1015 photons per second. Then the ratio of power of second source to that of first source is
a) 1.00
b) 1.02
c) 1.5
d) 0.98
Answer:
c) 1.5
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 7

Question 10.
The mean wavelength of light from the sun is taken to be 550 nm and its mean power is 3.8 × 1026 W. The number of photons received by the human eye per second on average from sunlight is of the order of
a) 1045
b) 1042
c) 1054
d) 1051
Answer:
a) 1045
Solution:
Power P = En = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\).n
n = \(\frac{P \lambda}{h c}\)
= \(\frac{3.8 \times 10^{26} \times 550 \times 10^{-9}}{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}\)
= 105.5 × 1043
n = 1.055 × 1045

Question 11.
The threshold wavelength for a metal surface whose photoelectric work function is 3.313 eV is
a) 4125 Å
b) 3750 Å
c) 6000 Å
d) 2062.5 Å
Answer:
b) 3750 Å
Solution:
Φ = hν0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{o}}}\)

λ0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\phi}\)
= \(\frac{6.64 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{500 \times 10^{-9}}\)
λ0 = 3.757 × 10-7
λ0 = 3750 Å

Question 12.
Light of wavelength 500 nm is incident on a sensitive plate of photoelectric work function 1.235 eV. The kinetic energy of the photoelectrons emitted is (Take h = 6.6 × 10-34 Js)
a) 0.58 eV
b) 2.48 eV
c) 1.24 eV
d) 1.16 eV
Answer:
c)1.24 eV
Solution:
λ = 500 nm;
φ = 1.235 eV
hν = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\)

hν = \(\frac{6.64 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{500 \times 10^{-9}}\)
= 0.0396 × 10-17
hν = 3.96 × 10-19 J
hν = \(\frac{3.96 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 2.475 evacuated
K.E = hν – φ
= 2.475 – 1.235
= 1.24 eV

Question 13.
Photons of wavelength λ are incident on a metal. The most energetic electrons ejected from the metal are bent into a circular arc of radius R by a perpendicular magnetic field having magnitude B. The work function of the metal is
a) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}-\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}}+\frac{\mathrm{e}^{2} \mathrm{~B}^{2} \mathrm{R}^{2}}{2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)

b) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}+2 \mathrm{me}\left[\frac{\mathrm{eBR}}{2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right]^{2}\)

c) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}-\mathrm{m}_{\mathrm{e}} \mathrm{C}^{2} \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2} \mathrm{~B}^{2} \mathrm{R}^{2}}{2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)

d) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}-2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{eBR}}{2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right]^{2}\)
Answer:
d) \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}-2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}\left[\frac{\mathrm{eBR}}{2 \mathrm{~m}_{\mathrm{e}}}\right]^{2}\)
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 8

Question 14.
The work functions for metals A, B and C are 1.92 eV, 2.0 eV and 5.0 eV respectively. The metals which will emit photoelectrons for radiation of wavelength 4100 Å is/are
a) A Only
b) both A and B
c) all these metals
d) none
Answer:
b) both A and B
Solution:
Energy in eV = \(\frac{12375}{\lambda}\)
\(\frac{12375}{4100}\) =3.01 eV
Work functions at A and B are less than 3.01 eV so both A and B emit.

Question 15.
Emission of electrons by the absorption of heat energy is called ________ emission
a) photoelectric
b) field
c) thermionic
d) secondary
Answer:
c) thermionic

II. Short Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Why do metals have a large number of free electrons?
Answer:
In metals, the electrons in the outermost shells are loosely bound to the nucleus. Even at room temperature, there are a large number of free electrons which are moving inside the metal in a random manner.

Question 2.
Define the work function of a metal. Give its unit.
Answer:

  • The minimum energy needed for an electron to escape from the metal surface is called the work function of a metal.
  • It is denoted by Φ0 and its unit is eV

Question 3.
What is the photoelectric effect?
Answer:
The ejection of electrons from a metal plate when illuminated by light or any other electromagnetic radiation of suitable wavelength (or) frequency.

Question 4.
How does photocurrent vary with the intensity of the incident light?
Answer:
Photocurrent – the number of electrons emitted per second is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident light.

Question 5.
Give the definition of intensity of light and its unit.
Answer:

  • The intensity is the power of light commonly referred to brightness.
  • Its unit is candela (cd).

Question 6.
How will you define threshold frequency?
Answer:
For a given metallic surface, the emission of photoelectrons takes place only if the frequency of the incident light is greater than a certain minimum frequency called the threshold frequency.

Question 7.
What is a photocell? Mention the different types of photocells.
Answer:
photocells: Photoelectric cell or photocell is a device which converts light energy into electrical energy. It works on the principle of the photoelectric effect.
Types:

  • Photo emissive cell
  • Photovoltaic cell
  • Photoconductive cell

Question 8.
Write the expression for the de Broglie wavelength associated with a charged particle of charge q and mass m, when it is accelerated through a potential V
Answer:

  • De Broglie wavelength λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{qmv}}}\)
  • Where q = ne, h= Planck’s constant

Question 9.
State de Broglie hypothesis.
Answer:
De Broglie’s hypothesis, all matter particles like electrons, protons, neutrons in motion are associated with waves.

Question 10.
Why we do not see the wave properties of a baseball?
Answer:
Since the momentum of a baseball is very low and the wavelength is of the order of 10-34 m the wave properties cannot be seen in a baseball.

Question 11.
A proton and an electron have the same kinetic energy. Which one has a greater de Brogue wavelength? Justify.
Answer:
de-Broglie wavelength of the particle is λ = \(\frac { h }{ p }\) = \(\frac { h }{ \sqrt { 2mK } } \)
i.e. λ ∝ \(\frac { h }{ \sqrt { m } } \)
As me << mp, so λe >> λp
Hence protons have greater de-Broglie wavelength.

Question 12.
Write the relationship of de Broglie wavelength \ associated with a particle of mass m in terms of its kinetic energy K.
1. De Broglie wavelength h h
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{m} \cdot \mathrm{v}}\)
= \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{emV}}}\)

2. Since kinetic energy of the electron K = eV then the de Broglie wavelength is given by
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}}\)

Question 13.
Name an experiment which shows wave nature of the electron. Which phenomenon was observed in this experiment using an electron beam?
Answer:

  • Davisson – Germer experiment confirmed the wave nature of electrons.
  • They demonstrated that electron beams are diffracted when they fall on crystalline solids.

Question 14.
An electron and an alpha particle have same kinetic energy. How are the de Broglie wavelengths associated with them related?
Answer:
1. De Broglie wavelength is given by
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}}\)
2. Since mα > me
λ α \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{\mathrm{m}}}\) then
λα < λe
3. An α particle having a greater mass than electron so it is having lesser de Broglie wavelength.

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
What do you mean by electron emission? Explain briefly various methods of electron emission.
Answer:
The liberation of electrons from any surface of a metallic substance is called electron emission.
There are mainly four types of electron emission.
i) Thermionic emission:
1. When a metal is heated to a high temperature, the free electrons on the surface of the metal get sufficient thermal energy so that they are emitted from the metallic surface.
2. The intensity of the thermionic emission depends on the metal used and its temperature.
(Examples: Cathode ray tubes, electrons microscopes, X-ray tubes, etc.)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 9
Electrons in the (a) metal (b) heated metal

ii) Field emission:
1. Electron field emission occurs when a very strong electric field is applied across the metal.
2. This strong field pulls the free electrons and helps them to overcome the surface barrier of the metal.
Examples:
Field emission scanning electron microscopes, Field emission display, etc….

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 10
Field emission

iii) Photoelectric emission :
1. When electromagnetic radiation of suitable frequency is incident on the surface of the metal, the energy is transferred from the radiation to the free electrons.
2. Hence the free electrons get sufficient energy to cross the surface barrier and the photoelectric emission takes place.
3. The number of electrons emitted depends on the intensity of the incident radiation.
Examples: Photodiodes, Photoelectric cells, etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 11
Photoelectric emission

iv) Secondary emission:
1. When a beam of fast-moving electrons strikes the metal surface, the kinetic energy of the striking electrons is transferred to the free electrons on the metal surface.
2. Thus the free electrons get sufficient kinetic energy so that the secondary emission occurs.
Example: Image intensifiers, Photomultiplier tubes, etc..

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 12
Secondary emission of electrons

Question 2.
Briefly discuss the observations of Hertz, Hallwachs, and Lenard.
Answer:
Hertz Observation:
1. In 1887, Hertz generated and detected electromagnetic waves with his high voltage induction coil to cause a spark discharge between two metallic spheres.
2. When a spark is formed, the charges will oscillate back and forth rapidly and the electromagnetic waves are
produced.
3. The electromagnetic waves thus produced were detected by a detector that has a copper wire bent in the shape of a circle
4. But the tiny spark produced in the detecter cannot be explained by hertz.

Hallwach Observation:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 13
Irradiation of ultraviolet light on

  • uncharged zinc plate
  • negatively charged plate
  • positively charged plate
  1. In 1888, Hallwach confirmed that the strange behaviour of the spark is due to the action of ultraviolet light.
  2. A clean circular plate of zinc is mounted on an insulating stand and is attached to a gold leaf electroscope by a wire.
  3. When the uncharged zinc plate is irradiated by ultraviolet light from an arc lamp, it becomes positively charged and the leaves will open.
  4. If the negatively charged zinc plate is exposed to ultraviolet light, the leaves will close as the charges leaked away quickly.

Lenard’s observation:

  1. In 1902, Lenard constructed an apparatus consists of two metallic plates A and C placed in an evacuated quartz bulb.
  2. The Galvanometer G and battery B are connected in the circuit.
  3. When ultraviolet light is incident there is a deflection in the galvanometer.
  4. If anode A is exposed to ultraviolet light, no current is observed.
  5. The electron emission observed when ultraviolet light falling on the negative plate called photoelectric emission.

 

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 14
Experimental setup for the study of the photoelectric effect

Question 3.
Explain the effect of potential difference on photoelectric current.
Answer:
1. The effect of potential difference on photoelectric current can be studied by keeping the frequency and the intensity of the incident light constant.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 15
Variation of photocurrent with a potential difference

2. If the cathode is irradiated the potential of A is increased thereby increase in the photocurrent.
3. When all the photoelectrons from C are collected by A the photocurrent reaches a maximum called saturation current.
4. When a negative (retarding) potential is applied to A with respect to C the photoelectrons start to decrease because more and more photoelectrons are being repelled away.
5. The photocurrent becomes zero at a particular negative potential V0 called stopping or cut off potential.
6. The negative potential applied to anode A which is just sufficient to stop the most energetic photoelectrons to make photocurrent zero is called stopping potential.
7. The kinetic energy of the fastest electron (Kmax) is equal to the work done by the stopping potential to stop it (eV0)
Kmax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mvmax2 = eV0 …………..(1)
where νmax is the maximum speed of the photo electrons
νmax = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{eV}_{\mathrm{o}}}{\mathrm{m}}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 1.602 \times 10^{-19}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}} \times V_{\mathrm{O}}}\)
νmax = 5.93 × 105 \(\sqrt{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{O}}}\) …………….(2)
Kmax = eV0 (in Joule) or Kmax = V0 (in eV)
8. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is independent of the intensity of the incident light.

Question 4.
Explain how the frequency of incident light varies with stopping potential.
Answer:
1. The effect of frequency of incident light on stopping potential can be studied by keeping the intensity of the incident light constant
2. The electrode potential varies for different frequencies of the incident light.
3. As the frequency is increased the photoelectrons are emitted with greater kinetic energies so that the retarding potential needed to stop the photoelectrons is also greater.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 16
variation or photocurrent with corrector electrode potential for different frequencies of the incident radiation

4. From the graph between frequency and stopping potential, the stopping potential varies linearly with the frequency of the incident light.
5. The stopping potential is zero when no electrons are emitted below a certain frequency called threshold frequency.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 17
Variation of stopping potential with frequency of the incident radiation for two metals

Question 5.
List out the laws of the photoelectric effect.
Answer:

  1. For a given frequency of incident light, the number of photoelectrons emitted is directly proportional to the intensity of the incident light.
  2. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons is independent of the intensity of the incident light.
  3. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons from a given metal is directly proportional to the frequency of incident light.
  4. For a given surface, the emission of photoelectrons takes place only if the frequency of incident light is greater than a certain minimum frequency called the threshold frequency.
  5. There is no time lag between the incidence of light and emission of photoelectrons.

Question 6.
Explain Why the photoelectric effect cannot be explained on the basis of the wave nature of light.
Answer:
Failures of classical wave theory:
From Maxwell’s theory, light is an electromagnetic wave consisting of coupled electric and magnetic oscillations that move with the speed of light and exhibit typical wave behaviour. Let us try to explain the experimental observations of the photoelectric effect using wave picture of light.

1. When light is incident on the target, there is a continuous supply of energy to the electrons. According to wave theory, light of greater intensity should impart greater kinetic energy to the liberated electrons (Here, the Intensity of light is the energy delivered per unit area per unit time). But this does not happen. The experiments show that the maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons does not depend on the intensity of the incident light.

2. According to wave theory, if a sufficiently intense beam of light is incident on the surface, electrons will be liberated from the surface of the target, however low the frequency of the radiation is. From the experiments, we know that photoelectric emission is not possible below a certain minimum frequency. Therefore, the wave theory fails to explain the existence of threshold frequency.

3. Since the energy of light is spread across the wavefront, the electrons which receive energy from it are large in number. Each electron needs considerable amount of time (a few hours) to get energy sufficient to overcome the work function and to get liberated from the surface. But experiments show that photoelectric emission is almost instantaneous process (the time lag is less than 10“9 s after the surface is illuminated) which could not be explained by wave theory.

Question 7.
Explain the quantum concept of light.
Answer:
Planck’s concepts of quantum :

  1. Max Planck proposed the quantum concept in 1900 in order to explain the thermal radiations emitted by a black body and the shape of the radiation curves.
  2. If an oscillator vibrates with frequency ν, its energy can have only certain discrete values.
    E = nhν n = 1,2,3…………
  3. Where h is Planck’s constant.
  4. The oscillators emit or absorb energy in small packets or quanta and the energy of each quantum is E = hν
  5. Energy is quantized and it is not continuous as believed in the wave nature. This is called the quantization of energy.

Einstein’s concept of quantum:

  1. Einstein extended Planck’s quantum concept to explain the photoelectric effect in 1905.
  2. According to Einstein, the energy in light is not spread out over wavefronts but is concentrated in small packets called energy quanta.
  3. The light of frequency ν from any source having energy E = hν
  4. The light quanta having the magnitude of linear momentum
    p = \(\frac{\mathrm{hv}}{\mathrm{c}}\)

Question 8.
Obtain Einstein’s photoelectric equation with the necessary explanation.
Answer:
When a photon of energy hν is incident on a metal surface, it is completely absorbed by a single electron and the electron is ejected. In this process, a part of the photon energy is used for the ejection of the electrons from the metal surface (photo electric work function Φ0) and the remaining energy is imparted as kinetic energy of the ejected electron.
hν = Φ0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 ………………….(1)
Where m is the mass and v is the velocity.
At threshold frequency, ν0
There is no ejection of electrons hence zero kinetic energy then,
0 = Φ0 …………………(2)
eqn (1) => hν = hν0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 ……………(3)
This is Einsteins photo electric equation.
If the electron does not lose energy by internal collisions, then it is emitted with maximum
kinetic energy Kmax. Then
Kmax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mvmax2
Where νmax maximum velocity of the electron ejected
Kmax = hν – Φ0 ……………..(4)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 18
Emission of photoelectrons

A graph between Kmax maximum kinetic energy of a photoelectron and frequency ν of the incident light is a straight line.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 19
Kmax vs ν graph

Question 9.
Explain experimentally observed facts of the photoelectric effect with the help of Einstein’s explanation.
Answer:

  1. The experimentally observed facts of the photoelectric effect can be explained with the help of Einstein’s photoelectric equation.
  2. As each incident photon liberates one electron, then the increase of intensity of the light (the number of per unit area per unit time) increases the number of electrons emitted thereby increasing the photocurrent.
  3. From Kmax = hν – Φ0 it is evident that Kmax is proportional to the frequency and independent of the intensity of the light.
  4. From hν = hν0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2, there must be minimum energy equal to the work function of the metal to liberate electrons from the metal surface. Below which the emission of electrons is not possible.
  5. There exists a minimum frequency called threshold frequency below which there is no photoelectric emission.
  6. The transfer of photon energy to the electrons is instantaneous so that no time lag between the incidence of photons and ejection of electrons.
  7. Thus the photoelectric effect is explained on the basis of the quantum concept of light.

Question 10.
Give the construction and working of a photoemissive cell.
Answer:
Photo emissive cell:
Construction:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 20
Construction of photo cell

1. It consists of an evacuated glass or quartz bulb in which two metallic electrodes, cathode and anode are fixed.
2. The cathode C is Semi cylindrical in shape and is coated with a photo-sensitive material.
3. anode A is a thin rod or wire kept along the axis of the semi-cylindrical cathode.
4. A potential difference is applied between the anode and the cathode through a galvanometer G.

Working:
When cathode is illuminated, electrons are emitted from it. These electrons are attracted by anode and hence a current is produced which is measured by the galvanometer. For a given cathode, the magnitude of the current depends on (i) the intensity of incident radiation and (ii) the potential difference between anode and cathode.

Question 11.
Derive an expression for de Broglie wavelength of electrons.
Answer:
An electron of mass m is accelerated through a potential difference of V volt. The kinetic energy aquired by the electron is given by
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = eV
Therefore, the speed ν of the electron is
ν = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \mathrm{eV}}{\mathrm{m}}}\) …………..(1)
From de Broglie equation
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\) = \(\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{h}}{2 \mathrm{emV}}}\) ……………(2)
Substituting the known values
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 21
When electron is accelerated with 100 V, then
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{100}}\) = 1.227 Å
Since the kinetic energy of the electron, K = eV, then the de Broglie wavelength associated with electron is given by
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mK}}}\) …………..(4)

Question 12.
Briefly explain the principle and working of an electron microscope.
Answer:
Principle:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 22
(a) Optical Microscope
(b) Electron Microscope

  1. The wave nature of the electron is used in the construction of an electron microscope.
  2. The resolving power of a microscope is inversely proportional to the wavelength of the radiation used.
  3. Since the de Broglie wavelength of the electron is much smaller than the visible light, the resolving power and the magnification are high.
  4. Electron microscopes giving magnification more than 2,00,000 times than the optical microscope.

Working:

  1. The construction and working of an electron microscope are similar to the optical microscope.
  2. Focussing of electron beam is done by the electrostatic or magnetic lenses.
  3. The divergence and convergence can be done by adjusting electric and magnetic fields.
  4. The accelerated electrons from the source with high potential are made parallel by a magnetic condenser lens.
  5. With the help of a magnetic objective lens and magnetic projector lens system, the magnified image is obtained.
  6. These electron microscopes are being used in almost all branches of science.

Question 13.
Describe briefly Davisson – Germer experiment which demonstrated the wave nature of electrons.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 23
Experimental set up of Davisson – Germer experiment

  1. De Broglie hypothesis of matter waves was experimentally confirmed by Clinton Davisson and Lester Germer in 1927.
  2. They demonstrated that electron beams are diffracted when they fall on crystalline solids.
  3. Since crystals can act as a three-dimensional diffraction grating for matter waves, the electron waves incident on crystals are diffracted off in certain specific directions.
  4. The filament F is heated by a low tension battery, electrons are emitted from the hot filament by thermionic emission.
  5. Electrons are accelerated due to-the potential between the filament and the anode aluminium cylinder by a high tension battery.
  6. The electron beam is collimated and it is allowed to strike a single crystal of nickel by two thin aluminum diaphragms.
  7. The electron detector measures the intensity of the scattered electron beam.
  8. The intensity of the scattered beam is measured for various incident angles θ.
  9. For accelerating voltage of 54 V, the scattered wave shows a peak at an angle of 50° to the incident beam.
  10. The constructive interference of diffracted electrons for various atomic layers obtained known as interplanar spacing of Nickel.
  11. The de-Broglie wavelength for V = 54 V is given by,

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 24
Variation of intensity of diffracted electron beam with the angle
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\) Å
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{54}}\)
= 1.67 Å

IV. Numerical Problems:

Question 1.
How many photons per second emanate from a 50 mW laser of 640 nm?
Answer:
Given:
P = 50 × 10-3 W
λ = 640 × 10-9 m
N = ?
N => Number of photons emitted per second.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 25

Question 2.
Calculate the maximum kinetic energy and maximum velocity of the photoelectrons emitted when the stopping potential is 81 V for the photoelectric emission experiment.
Answer:
Given:
V = 81 V
EK = ?
EK maximum kinetic energy
vK maximum velocity
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = eV
EK = 1.6 × 10-19 × 81
= 129.6 × 10-19
EK = 1.3 × 10-17 J
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 26

Question 3.
Calculate the energies of the photons associated with the following radiation
(i) violet light of 413 nm,
(ii) X-rays of 0.1 nm,
(iii) radio waves of 10 m
Answer:
E = hν
E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) in Joule

E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda \mathrm{e}}\) in eV
(i) Violet light of 413 nm
E = \(\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{413 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac{19.875}{660.8}\) × 10-26 × 1028
= 0.032 × 102
E = 3 eV

(ii) X-rays of 0.1 nm
= \(\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{0.1 \times 10^{-9} \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)

= \(\frac{19.875 \times 10^{-26}}{0.16 \times 10^{-28}}\)
= 124.24 × 102
E = 12424 eV

(iii) radio waves of 10 m
E = \(\frac{6.625 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{10 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac{19.875}{1.6}\) × 10-26 × 10-1 × 1019
E = 1.24 × 10-7 eV

Question 4.
A 150 W lamp emits light of mean wavelength of 5500 A. If the efficiency is 12%, find out the number of photons emitted by the lamp in one second.
Answer:
P = 150 W
λ = 5500 × 10-10 m
Eff = 12%
N = \(\frac{\mathrm{P} \lambda}{\mathrm{hc}}\)

= \(\frac{150 \times 5500 \times 10^{-10}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}\)

= \(\frac{825 \times 10^{-7}}{19.878 \times 10^{-26}}\)
= 41.5 × 1019
Number of photons emitted is with 12% efficiency = 41.5 × 1019 × \(\frac{12}{100}\)
N = 4.98 × 1019

Question 5.
How many photons of frequency 1014 Hz will make up 19.86 J of energy?
Answer:
E = 19.86 J
ν = 1014 Hz
E = nhν
n = \(\frac{E}{h v}\)
= \(\frac{19.86}{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 10^{14}}\)
= 2.997 × 1020
Number of Photons N = 3 × 1020

Question 6.
What should be the velocity of the electron so that its momentum equals that of 4000 Å wavelength photon.
Answer:
Given:
λ = 4000 × 10-10 m
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 27

Question 7.
When a light of frequency 9 × 1014 Hz is incident on a metal surface, photoelectrons are emitted with a maximum speed of 8 × 105 ms-1. Determine the threshold frequency of the surface.
Answer:
Given:
ν = 9 × 1014 Hz
ν = 8 × 105ms-1
From Einstein’s photo electric equation
hν = hν0 – \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2
0 = hν – \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2
ν0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hv}-1 / 2 \mathrm{mv}^{2}}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
ν0 = ν – \(\frac{\mathrm{mv}^{2}}{2 \mathrm{~h}}\)
= 9 × 1014 – \(\frac{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 64 \times 10^{10}}{2 \times 6.626 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 9 × 1014 – \(\frac{582.4 \times 10^{-21}}{13.252 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= 9 × 1014 – 4.39 × 1014
= (9 – 4.39) × 1014
ν0 = 4.61 × 1014 Hz

Question 8.
When a 6000 A light falls on the cathode of a photocell and produced photoemission. if a stopping potential of 0.8 V is required to stop the emission of an electron, then determine the
(i) frequency of the light
(ii) the energy of the incident photon
(iii) the work function of the cathode material
(iv) threshold frequency and
(v) the net energy of the electron after it leaves the surface.
Answer:
Given:
λ = 6000 × 10-10 m;
eV0 = 0.8 eV
i) ν = \(\frac{C}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{6 \times 10^{-7}}\)
= 0.5 × 1015
ν = 5 × 1014 Hz

(ii) E = hν
= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34} \times 5 \times 10^{14}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\frac{53.13}{1.6}\) × 10-20 × 1019
E = 2.07 eV

(iii) eν0 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = 0.8 eV
W = hν – \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2
= (2.07 – 0.8) eV
W = 1.27 eV

(iv) W = hν0
ν0 = \(\frac{1.27 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}\)
= \(\frac{2.032}{6.626}\) × 1015
ν0 = 3.06 × 1014 Hz

(v) Net Energy = E = hν – hν0
E = (2.07 – 1.27) ev = 0.8 eV
E = 0.8 eV

Question 9.
A 3310 Å photon liberates an electron from a material with energy 3 × 10-19 J while another 5000 Å photon ejects an electron with energy 0.972 × 10-19 J from the same material. Determine the value of Planck’s constant and the threshold wavelength of the material.
Answer:
Given:
λ1 = 3310 × 10-10 m
λ2 = 5000 × 1010 m
K.E1 = 3 × 10-19 J
K.E2 = 0.972 × 10-19 J
i) ν1 = \(\frac{C}{\lambda_{1}}\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{3310 \times 10^{-10}}\)
= 9.06 × 1014 Hz
ν2 = \(\frac{C}{\lambda_{2}}\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{5000 \times 10^{-10}}\)
= 6 × 1014 Hz
1 = W + K.E1 …………….(1)
1 = W + K.E2 …………….(2)
eqn (1) – (2)
h(ν1 – ν2) = K.E1 – K.E2
h(9.06 – 6) × 1014 = 3 × 10-19 – 0.972 × 10-19
h(3.06 × 1014) = 2.028 × 10-19
h = \(\frac{2.028 \times 10^{-19}}{3.06 \times 10^{14}}\)
= 0.662 × 10-33
h = 6.62 × 10-34 Js

ii) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 28

Question 10.
At the given point of time, the earth receives energy from the sun at 4 cal cm min-1. Determine the number of photons received on the surface of the Earth per cm-2 per minute. (Given: Mean wavelength of sunlight = 5500 Å)
Answer:
Given:
E = 4 cal cm-2 min-1
λ = 5500 × 10-10m
We know that 1 cal = 4.2 J
E = hnν
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 29
Number of photons n = 4.652 × 1019 per cm2 per minute

Question 11.
UV light of wavelength 1800 Å is incident on a lithium surface whose threshold wavelength 4965 Å. Determine the maximum energy of the electron emitted.
Answer:
Given:
λ = 1800 × 10-10 m
λ0 = 4965 × 10-10 m
hν = hν0 +K.E
h\(\frac{c}{\lambda}\) =h\(\frac{c}{\lambda_{o}}\) + K. E
K.E = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda}\) – \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{o}}}\)
hc = 6.625 × 10-34 × 3 × 108
hc = 19.86 × 10-24
K.E = \(\frac{19.86 \times 10^{-26}}{1800 \times 10^{-10}}\) – \(\frac{19.86 \times 10^{-24}}{4965 \times 10^{-10}}\)
= 0.0110 × 10-16 – 0.004 × 10-16
K.E in eV = \(\frac{7 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = 4.375 eV
K.E = 4.4 eV

Question 12.
Calculate the de Brogue wavelength of a proton whose kinetic energy is equal to 81.9 x 1O’ J. (Given: mass of proton is 1836 times that of electron).
Answer:
Given:
K.E = 81.9 × 10-15 J
mp = 836 me
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 30

Question 13.
A deuteron and an alpha particle are accelerated with the same potential. Which one of the two has
i) greater value of de Broglie wavelength associated with it and
ii) less kinetic energy? Explain.
Answer:
Given:
deutron => e → 1e \(\left({ }_{1} \mathrm{H}^{2}\right)\)
m → 2m
alpha => e → 2e (2He4)
m → 4m
i) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 31

ii) \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = eV
Kd = eV
Kα = 2 eV
Kα = 2 Kd
Kd = \(\frac{\mathrm{K}_{\alpha}}{2}\)

Question 14.
An electron is accelerated thorugh a potential difference of 81 V. What is the de Brogue wavelength associated with it? To which part of electromagnetic spectrum does this wavelength correspond?
Answer:
Given:
V = 81 V
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\) Å
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{81}}\) ⇒ λ = \(\frac{12.27}{9}\)
λ = 1.36 Å

Question 15.
The ratio between the de Brogue wavelengths associated with protons. accelerated through a potential of 512 V and that of alpha particles accelerated through a potential of X volts is found to be one. Find the value of X.
Answer:
Given:
For proton charge = e
mass = m
For charge = 2e
mass = 4m
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 32

Part II:

12th Physics Guide Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter Additional Questions and Answers

I. Match the following:

Question 1.

III
A. Thermionic emissiona. photodiodes
B.  Field emissionb. cathode-ray tube
C. Photoelectric emissionc. Image Identifiers
D. Secondary emissiond. Field emission display

Answer:
A. b
B. d
C. a
D. c

Question 2.

III
A. Einstein theorya. 1902
B. Hertz observationb. 1905
C. Hallwacks observationc. 1887
D. Lenard’s observationd. 1888

Answer:
A. b
B. c
C. d
D. a

Question 3.

III
A. Photocella. metallic cathode
B. Photo emissive cellb. resistance of semi conductors
C. Photovoltaic coilc. light energy into electrical energy
D. Photoconductive celld. semiconductor voltage

Answer:
A. c
B. a
C. d
D. b

Question 4.

III
A. Hertza. production of matter waves
B. Einsteinb. wavelength of electrons
C. de-Brogliec. photoelectric equation
D. Davisson Germerd. generated electromagnetic waves

Answer:
A. d
B. c
C. b
D. a

II. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
The liberation of electrons from any surface of a substance is called _______.
Answer:
electron emission

Question 2.
1 eV is equal to ___________ Joule.
Answer:
1.602 × 10-19

Question 3.
The stopping potential is independent of ________ of the incident light.
Answer:
intensity

Question 4.
The quality of X-rays is measured in terms of their _______.
Answer:
penetrating power

Question 5.
The graph between maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectron and frequency of the incident light is ________.
Answer:
straight line

Question 6.
Einstein’s photoelectric equation was experimentally confirmed by ________.
Answer:
Millikan

III. Choose the odd man out:

Question 1.
a) Field emission display
b) Photodiodes
c) Photomultiplier tubes
d) Electron microscope
Answer:
d) Electron MicroScope

Question 2.
a) Work function
b) Discharge tube
c) Threshold frequency
d) Stopping potential
Answer:
b) Discharge tube

Question 3.
a) mass
b) frequency
c) Intensity
d) wavelength
Answer:
a) mass

Question 4.
a) neutrons
b) tungsten
c) particles
d) x-rays
Answer:
a) tungsten

Question 5.
a) Photon
b) electron
c) proton
d) neutron
Answer:
a) photon

IV. Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.

A. Continuous X-raysAll possible wavelength
B. Characteristics X-raysDefinite wavelength
C. X-rayShort focal length
D. Intensity of X-raysConstant for all Substances

Answer:
D) Intensity of X-rays – Constant for all substances

Question 2.

A. Photo electronsdirectly proportional to the intensity of incident radiation
B. Kinetic energy of photoelectronsindependent of the intensity of incident light
C. Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectronsdirectly proportional to the frequency of incident light
D. Emission of photoelectronsdoes not depend upon the potential of the electrodes

Answer:
D) Emission of photoelectrons – does not depend upon the potential of the electrodes

Question 3.

A. Potential barrierwork function
B. Stopping potentialMaximum potential between the electrodes
C. Threshold frequencyminimum frequency of incident radiation for emission
D. Saturation currentMaximum photoelectrons

Answer:
B) Stopping potential – maximum potential between the electrodes

V. Choose the correct pair:

Question 1.

A. Continuous X-rayΛ0 = \(\frac{14200}{\mathrm{~V}}\) Å
B. de – Broglie wavelength1.67 Å
C. Mass of an electron9.11 x 10-31 kg
D. Charge of an electron1.6 x 1019 C

Answer:
B) de – Broglie wavelength – 1.67 Å

Question 2.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 33
Answer:
D) V = \(\frac{\sqrt{2 \mathrm{em}}}{\mathrm{V}}\)

VI. Assertion and Reason:

Question 1.
Assertion:
The resolving power of the electron microscope is high.
Reason:
The wavelength of electrons is very much lesser than the visible light.
i) Assertion is true but reason is false
ii) The assertion and reason both are false
iii) Both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.
iv) Both assertion and reason are true and the reason is not the correct explanation of the assertion.
Answer:
(iii) Both assertion and reason are true and the reason is the correct explanation of the assertion.

Question 2.
Assertion:
The oscillators emit or absorb energy in small packets or quanta.
Reason:
Energy is not discrete, the energy posses wave nature.
i) The assertion and reason both are false
i) The assertion is true but reason is false
iii) The assertion is false but reason is true
iv) Both the assertion and reason are true
Answer:
(ii) The assertion is true but the reason is false

VII. Choose the correct statement:
Question 1.
a) Particle cannot be localised in space and time
b) Wave can be localised in space and time
c) Black body radiation can be explained by wave nature.
d) The minimum energy needed for an electron to escape from the metal surface is called the work function.
Answer:
d) The minimum energy needed for an electron to escape from the metal surface is called the work function.

Question 2.
a) When the momentum of the particle increases de-Broglie wavelength also increases.
b) A photon of energy 2E is an incident on a photosensitive surface of photoelectric work function E. The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectron emitted is 2E.
c) The number of de-Broglie waves of an electron in the nth orbit of an atom is n.
d) The resolving power of the electron microscope is 100 times greater than an optical microscope.
Answer:
b) A photon of energy 2E is an incident on a photosensitive surface of photoelectric work function E. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectron emitted is 2E.

VIII. Choose the incorrect statement:

Question 1.
a) Wave mechanical concept of the atom was based on the de-Broglie hypothesis
b) Maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons varies linearly with the frequency of incident radiation.
c) The stopping potential of a metal surface is independent of the intensity of the incident radiation.
d) The graph drawn by taking the frequency of the radiation along the x-axis and stopping potential along the y-axis for a photo-sensitive metal is a parabola.
Answer:
d) The graph drawn by taking the frequency of the radiation along the x-axis and stopping potential along the y-axis for a photo-sensitive metal is a parabola.

Question 2.
a) Photoelectric emission is an instantaneous process.
b) Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is directly proportional to the frequency of the incident radiation.
c) Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is indirectly proportional to the intensity of the incident radiation.
d) Photoelectron emission is not possible below a minimum frequency of the incident radiation.
Answer:
c) Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is indirectly proportional to the intensity of incident radiation.

IX. Choose the best answer:

Question 1.
The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted from a surface when photons of
energy 3 eV fall on it is 4 eV. The stopping potential, in volt, is
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 6
(d) 10
Answer:
(b) 4
Hint:
Stopping potential, V0 = \(\frac { { K }_{ max } }{ e } \) = \(\frac { 4eV }{ e }\) = 4v

Question 2.
The threshold frequency is constant with respect to _______.
a) type of the metal
b) Velocity of electrons
c) Voltage applied
d) intensity of the incident light.
Answer:
a) type of the metal

Question 3.
In a photoemissive cell, the anode is made up of _______.
a) copper
b) gold
c) platinum
d) zinc
Answer:
c) platinum

Question 4.
The work function of a substance is 4.0 eV. The longest wavelength of light that can cause photoelectron emission from this substance is approximately
(a) 540 nm
(b) 400 nm
(c) 310 nm
(d) 220 nm
Answer:
(c) 310 nm
Hint:
λ0 = \(\frac { hc }{ W }\) = \(\frac{6.63 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{4.0 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\) = m = 310 x 10-9 m = 310 nm

Question 5.
Duane-Hunt law is ________.
a) λ = \(\frac{12400}{\mathrm{v}}\) m
b) λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\mathrm{V}}\) m
c) λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\sqrt{\mathrm{E}_{\mathrm{k}}}}\) m
d) none of the above
Answer:
a) λ = \(\frac{12400}{\mathrm{v}}\) m

Question 6.
The resolving power of the electron microscope is _____ times greater than the resolving power of the optical
microscope
a) 102
b) 104
c) 105
d) 103
Answer:
c) c) 105

Question 7.
4 eV is the energy of the incident photon and the work function is 2 eV. The stopping potential will be
(a) 2V
(b) 4V
(c) 6V
(d) 2√2V
Answer:
(d) 2√2V
Hint:
eV0= hv- W0 = 4eV – 2eV = 2eV
∴ V0= \(\frac { 2ev }{ e }\) = 2v

Question 8.
Which of the following graph represents the variation of the particle momentum and associated de Broglie wavelength.
a) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 34

b) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 35

c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 36

d) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 37
Answer:
c) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 38

Question 9.
The radiation produced from decelerating electron is called ________.
a) reverse radiation
b) Photon emission
c) black body radiation
d) breaking radiation
Answer:
d) breaking radiation

Question 10.
If the striking electrons knocks of an electron in n = 2 state, the resulting transition give ________.
a) K-lines
b) L-lines
c) M-lines
d) N-lines
Answer:
b) L-lines

Question 11.
When a proton is accelerated through IV, then its kinetic energy will be
(a) 1 eV
(b) 13.6 eV
(c) 1840 eV
(d) 0.54 eV
Answer:
(a) 1 eV
Hint:
K = qV = e x 1V= 1 eV

Question 12.
The work function of a photoelectric material is 3.3 eV. The threshold frequency will be equal to
a) 8 × 1014 Hz
b) 8 × 1010 Hz
c) 5 × 1020 Hz
d) 4 × 1014 Hz
Answer:
a) 8 × 1014 Hz
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 39

Question 13.
The momentum of the electron having wavelength of 4 Å is
a) 1.6 × 1024 kg ms-1
b) 1.65 × 10-24 kg ms-1
c) 3.3 × 1024 kg ms-1
d) 3.3 × 10-24 kg ms-1
Answer:
b) 1.65 × 10-24 kg ms-1
Solution:
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\)
p = \(\frac{h}{\lambda}\)
= \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{4 \times 10^{-10}}\)
p = 1.65 × 10-24 kgms-1

Question 15.
The number of photo-electrons emitted for the light of a frequency υ (higher than the threshold frequency υ0) is proportional to
(a) Threshold frequency (υ0)
(b) Intensity of light
(c) Frequency of light (υ)
(d) υ – υ0
Answer:
(b) Intensity of light
Hint:
The photoelectric current of Intensity of incident light

Question 15.
The maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons emitted in a photoelectric effect phenomenon is 3.2eV What is the value of stopping potential to stop the electrons not to reach the anode?
a) 1.6 eV
b) -3.2 eV
c) -1.6 eV
d) -6.4 eV
Answer:
b) -3.2 eV
Solution:
K.Emax = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2
V0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{K} . \mathrm{E}}{e}\)
= \(\frac{3.2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
V0 = -3.2 eV

Question 16.
Radiation of energy 6.2 eV is incident on the metal surface of work function 4.7eV. Find the kinetic energy of the
electrons emitted.
a) 3 × 10-19 J
b) 1.6 × 10-19 J
c) 2.4 × 10-19 J
d) 3.2 × 10-19 J
Answer:
c) 2.4 × 10-19 J
Solution:
hν = 6.2 eV
W = 4.7 eV
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = hν – W
= (6.2 – 4.7) eV
= 1.5 ev
= 1.5 × 1.6 × 10-19
\(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2 = 2.4 × 10-19 J
K.E = 2.4 × 10-19 J

Question 17.
The de-Broglie wavelength of electrons moving with a speed of 500 km/s
a) 1.45 nm
b) 1.45 Å
c) 1.45 m
d) 4.6 × 1024 HZ
Answer:
a) 1.45 nm
Solution:
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{mv}}\)
= \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 500 \times 10^{3}}\)
λ = 1.45 × 10-19 ;
λ = 1.45 nm

Question 18.
Electron volt is a unit of
(a) Energy
(b) potential
(c) current
(d) charge
Answer:
(a) Energy
Hint:
An electron volt is a unit of energy

Question 19.
The work function of iron is 4.7 V. calculate the cut-off wavelength for this metal.
a) 2633 Å
b) 26.4 × 10-7 m
c) 13.2 × 10-10 m
d) 1320 Å
Answer:
a) 2633 Å
Solution:
0 = W;
h\(\frac{\mathrm{C}}{\lambda_{0}}\) = W;
λ0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{hc}}{\mathrm{W}}\)
= \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34} \times 3 \times 10^{8}}{4.7 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 2633 × 10-10
λ0 = 2633 Å

Question 20.
The time taken by a photoelectron to come out after photon strikes is approximately
(a) 10-14 s
(b) 10-10 s
(c) 10-16 s
(d) 10-1 s
Answer:
(b) 10-10 s
Hint:
The time lag between the incident of photon and the emission of photoelectrons is 10-10 s approximately.

Question 21.
A Coolidge tube operates at 37200 V maximum frequency of x rays emitted is _______.
a) 9 × 1028 Hz
b) 100 Hz
c) 9 × 1018 Hz
d) 3 × 1018 Hz
Answer:
c) 9 × 1018 Hz
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 40

Question 22.
De – Broglie wavelength of an electron accelerating by 100 V
a) 1.227 Å
b) 122.7 μm
c) 0.2227 m
d) 12.27 Å
Answer:
a) 1.227 Å
Solution:
λ = \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{\mathrm{V}}}\)
= \(\frac{12.27}{\sqrt{100}}\)
= \(\frac{12.27}{10}\)
λ = 1.227 Å

Question 23.
The energy of photon of wavelength λ is
(a) \(\frac { hc }{ λ }\)
(b) hλc
(c) \(\frac { λ }{ hc }\)
(d) \(\frac { hλ }{ c }\)
Answer:
(a) \(\frac { hc }{ λ }\)
Hint:
E = hυ = \(\frac { hc }{ λ }\)

X. Two Mark Questions:

Question 1.
Why electron is preferred over X-ray in the microscope?
Answer:

  1. The de-Broglie wavelength of an electron is very less compared to X-rays.
  2. We can build a high resolving power microscope using electrons.
  3. Resolving power of a microscope inversely proportional to the wavelength
    r0 α \(\frac{1}{\lambda}\)

Question 2.
What are photoelectrons?
Answer:
These are the electrons emitted from a metal surface when it is exposed to electromagnetic radiations of a suitable frequency.

Question 3.
What are matter waves?
Answer:
The moving elementary particles behave as waves under suitable conditions. These waves associated with particles are called matter waves or de-Broglie waves.

Question 4.
What are continuous x rays?
Answer:
Continuous x-ray spectrum consists of radiations of all possible wavelengths from a certain lower limit to higher values continuously as in the case of visible light.

Question 5.
Why is a photo-cell also called an electric eye?
Answer:
Like an eye, a photo-cell can distinguish between weak and intense light. But a photocell gives a measure of light intensity in terms of photoelectric current. So it is also called an electric eye.

Question 6.
What is a photoemissive cell?
Answer:
Its working depends on the electron emission from a metal cathode due to irradiation of light and other radiation.

Question 7.
What are X-ray spectra?
Answer:
X-rays are produced when fast-moving electrons strike the metal target. The intensity of the X-rays when plotted against its wavelength gives a curve called X-ray spectrum.

Question 8.
What are photoconductive cells?
Answer:
The resistance of the semiconductor changes in accordance with the radiation energy incident on it.

Question 9.
Define resolving power of the microscope.
Answer:
The resolving power of a microscope is inversely proportional to the wavelength of the radiation used.

Question 10.
Who invented the particle nature of light?
Answer:
Hertz confirmed that the light is an electromagnetic wave. But the same experiment also produced the first evidence for particle nature of light.

Question 11.
Define intensity of light.
Answer:
Intensity denotes power of light means brightness.

Question 12.
What is diffraction?
Answer:
The bending of light waves round the edges of obstacles is called diffraction.

Question 13.
When light behaves like waves and matter?
Answer:
Light behaves as a wave during its propagation and behaves as a particle during its interaction with matter.

XI. Three Marks Questions:

Question 1.
What is nature of light?
Answer:
The wave nature of light explains phenomena such as interference, diffraction, and polarisation. Certain phenomenon like black body radiation and photoelectric effect light behaves as particles. Thus light posses dual nature, that is particle and wave.

Question 2.
Define one electron volt.
Answer:
One electron volt is defined as the kinetic energy gained by an electron when accelerated by a potential difference of 1 V.
1 eV = K.E gained by the electron or workdone by the electric field
1 eV = qv = 1.602 × 10-19 C × 1 V
1 eV = 1.602 × 10-19 J

Question 3.
Differentiate particle and wave.
Answer:
Particle is a material object which is considered as a tiny concentration of matter localized in space and time whereas wave is a broad distribution of energy not localized in space and time.

XII. Five Mark Questions:

Question 1.
What are the applications of the photocells?
Answer:

  1. Photocells have many applications especially switches and sensors.
  2. Automatic switching ON and OFF ordinary lights as well as street lights
  3. They are used for the reproduction of sound in motion pictures.
  4. Photocells are used as timers to measure the speeds of athletes during a race.
  5. Photocells are used to measure the intensity of the given light and to calculate the exact time of exposure.

Question 2.
Write down the characteristics of photons.
Answer:
Characteristics of photons:
According to the particle nature of light, photons are the basic constituents of any radiation and possess the following characteristic properties:

  • The photons of light of frequency v and wavelength λ will have energy, given by E = hυ = \(\frac { hc }{ λ }\).
  • The energy of a photon is determined by the frequency of the radiation and not by its intensity and the intensity has no relation with the energy of the individual photons in the beam.
  • The photons travel with the velocity of light and its momentum is given by p
  • Since photons are electrically neutral, they are unaffected by electric and magnetic fields.
  • When a photon interacts with matter (photon-electron collision), the total energy, total linear momentum, and angular momentum are conserved. Since photon may be absorbed or a new photon may be produced in such interactions, the number of photons may not be conserved

Question 3.
Write a note on characteristic X-rays. Give the applications of X-rays in medical therapy and industry.
Answer:
Characteristic X-ray Spectra:
1. X-ray spectra snow some narrow peaks at some, well-defined wavelengths when the target is hit by fast electrons. The line spectrum showing these peaks is called the characteristic X-ray spectrum.
2. When an energetic electron removes electrons from K-shell electrons then the electrons from the outer orbit jump to fill the vacancy.
3. Energy difference between the levels is given out as X-ray photon of definite wavelength.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 7 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 41
Origin of characteristics X-ray Spectra

K-Series (Kα and Kβ): This line is due to electronic transitions from L, M, and N shells to K-level.
L-Series (Lα and Lβ): It arises due to electronic transitions from M, N, and O shells.

Uses of X-rays:

  1. Medical diagnosis: used to detect fractures, foreign bodies, diseased organs, etc.
  2. Medical therapy: To kill diseased tissues, they are employed to cure skin diseases, malignant tumors.
  3. Industry: To check for flaws in welded joints, motor tires, tennis balls, and wood. At the customs post, they are used for the detection of contraband goods.
  4. Scientific research: To study crystalline structure i.e. arrangement of atoms and molecules in crystals.

XIII. Conceptual Questions:

Question 1.
Are other particles, other than electrons having a wave nature?
Answer:
The particles like neutrons and alpha particles are also associated with waves. They undergo diffraction when they scattered by suitable crystals.

Question 2.
Why diffraction effects of ordinary light is very small?
Answer:
The wavelength of light is high compared to the spacing between the lattice planes so that the diffraction pattern of ordinary light is less pronounced.

Question 3.
Why crystals are used for three-dimensional grating?
Answer:
The wavelength of X-rays are in the order of 10-10 m which is comparable to the spacing between the crystal lattice planes. Since the crystals can serve as three-dimensional grating.

XIV. Additional Problems:

Question 1.
Calculate the momentum and the de- Broglie wavelength of an electron with kinetic energy 25 eV.
Solution
i) Momentum of the electron:
p = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mk}}\)
= \(\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 25 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= \(\sqrt{728 \times 10^{-50}}\)
= 26.98 × 10-25 kgms-1

ii) de Broglie wavelength:
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{p}}\)
= \(\frac{6.626 \times 10^{-34}}{26.98 \times 10^{-25}}\)
= 0.2455 × 10-34 × 1025
= 0.2455 ×109
λ = 2.455 Å

Question 2.
Monochromatic light of frequency 6 x 1014 Hz is produced by a laser. The power emitted is 2 x 10-3w.
(i) What is the energy of each photon in the light?
(ii) How many photons per second, on average, are emitted by the source?
Solution:
(i) Energy of each photon,
E = hυ = 6.6 x 10-34 x 6 x 1014
E = 3.98 x 10-19J
(ii) If N is the number of photons emitted per second by the source, then
Power transmitted in the beam = N x energy of each photon
P = N
N = \(\frac { P }{ E }\) = \(\frac{2 \times 10^{-3}}{3.98 \times 10^{-19}}\)
N = 5 x 1015 Photons per second.

Question 3.
A proton is moving at a speed of 0.900 times the velocity of light. Find the kinetic energy in Joules and Mev.
Answer:
Given:
ν = 0.9 × 3 × 108 ms-1
Mass of proton m = 1.6 × 10-27 kg
K.E = \(\frac{1}{2}\) mv2
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1.673 × 10-27 × 2.7 × 2.7 × 1016
= \(\frac{6.098 \times 10^{-11}}{1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
= 3.811 × 108 eV
K.E = 3.81 MeV

Question 4.
Calculate the momentum of an electron with kinetic energy 2 eV.
Answer:
Given:
K.E = 2 eV
p = \(\sqrt{2 \mathrm{mk}}\)
p = \(\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 2 \times 1.6 \times 10^{-19}}\)
p = 7.63 × 10-25 kgms-1

Question 5.
Calculate the cut-off wavelength and cut off frequency of X-rays from an X-ray tube of accelerating potential 20,000 V.
Answer:
The cut-off wavelength of the characteristic X-rays is
λ0 = \(\frac{12400}{\mathrm{v}}\) Å = \(\frac{12400}{20000}\) Å
= 0.62 Å
The corresponding frequency is
ν0 = \(\frac{c}{\lambda_{0}}\)
= \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{0.62 \times 10^{-10}}\)
= 4.84 × 1018 Hz

Question 6.
What is the (a) momentum, (b) speed, and (c) de-Broglie wavelength of an electron with the kinetic energy of 120 eV.
Solution:
Kinetic energy, K.E = 120 eV = 120 x 1.6 x 10-19
K = K.E = 1.92 x 10-17 J
(a) Momentum of an electron, P = \(\sqrt { 2mK } \)
P = \(\sqrt{2 \times 9.1 \times 10^{-31} \times 1.92 \times 10^{-17}}\)
P = 5.91 x 10-24 kg ms-1
(b) Speed of an electron,
v = \(\frac { p }{ m }\) = \(\frac{5.91 \times 10^{-24}}{9.1 \times 10^{-31}}\) = 6.5 x 106 kg ms-1
(c) de-Broglie wavelength,
λ = \(\frac { h }{ p }\) = \(\frac{6.6 \times 10^{-34}}{5.91 \times 10^{-24}}\) = 1.117 x 10-10 = 0.112 x 10-9 m
λ = 0.112 nm

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

12th Computer Applications Guide An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
DTP stands for ……………….
(a) Desktop Publishing
(b) Desktop Publication
(c) Doctor To Patient
(d) Desktop Printer
Answer:
(a) Desktop Publishing

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
________ is a DTP software,
(a) Lotus 1-2-3
(b) PageMaker
(c) Maya
(d) Flash
Answer:
(b) PageMaker

Question 3.
Which menu contains the Newoption?
(a) File menu
(b) Edit menu
(c) Layout menu
(d) Type menu
Answer:
(a) File menu

Question 4.
In PageMaker Window, the areaoutside of the dark border is referredto as …………….
(a) page
(b) pasteboard
(c) blackboard
(d) dashboard
Answer:
(b) pasteboard

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
Shortcut to close a document in PageMaker is …………..
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + B
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + W
Answer:
(d) Ctrl + W

Question 6.
A …………………… tool is used for magnifying the particular portion of the area.
(a) Text tool
(b) Line tool
(c) Zoom tool
(d) Hand tool
Answer:
(c) Zoom tool

Question 7.
…………………. tool is used for drawing boxes.
(a) Line
(b) Ellipse
(c) Rectangle
(d) Text
Answer:
(c) Rectangle

Question 8.
Place option is present in ………………….menu.
(a) File
(b) Edit
(c) Layout
(d) Window
Answer:
(a) File

Question 9.
To select an entire document using the keyboard, press …………….
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + B
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + D
Answer:
(a) Ctrl + A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 10.
Character formatting consfstsof which of the following textproperties?
(a) Bold
(b) Italic
(c) Underline
(d) All of these
Answer:
(d) All of these

Question 11.
Which tool lets you edit text?
(a) Text tool
(b) Type tool
(c) Crop tool
(d) Hand tool
Answer:
(a) Text tool

Question 12.
Shortcut to print a document in Pagemaker is ……………….
(a) Ctrl + A
(b) Ctrl + P
(c) Ctrl + C
(d) Ctrl + V
Answer:
(b) Ctrl + P

Question 13.
Adobe PageMaker is a ware………………… software.
Answer:
Page Layout

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 14.
…………….. Bar is the topmost part of the PageMaker window.
Answer:
Title

Question 15.
…………… is the process of movingup and down or left and right through the document window.
Answer:
Scrolling

Question 16.
___________ tool is used to draw acircle.
Answer:
Ellipse

Question 17.
The Insert pages option is available on clicking the………………menu.
Answer:
Layout

Question 18.
Match the following.
Cut – (i) Ctrl + Z
Copy – (ii) Ctrl + V
Paste – (iii) Ctrl + X
Undo – (iv) Ctrl + C
Answer:
Match: iii, iv, ii, i

Question 19.
Choose the odd man out.
i) Adobe PageMaker, QuarkXPress, Adobe InDesign, Audacity
ii) File, Edit, Layout, Type, Zip
iii) Pointer Tool, Line Tool, Hide Tool, Hand Tool
iv) Bold, Italic, Portrait, Underline
Answer:
(i) Audacity, (ii) Zip, (iii) Hide Tool, (iv) Portrait

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 20.
Choose the correct statement.
i. (a) Text can be selected using mouse only.
(b) Text can be selected using mouseor the keyboard.
ii. (a) DTP is an abbreviation for Desktop publishing, (b) DTP is an abbreviation for Desktop publication.
Answer:
(i)-b, (ii)-a

Question 21.
Choose the correct pair
(a) Edit and Cut
(b) Edit and New
(c) Undo and Copy
(d) Undo and Redo
Answer:
(a) Edit and Cut

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is desktop publishing?
Answer:
Desktop publishing (abbreviated DTP) is the creation of page layouts for documents using DTP software.

Question 2.
Give some examples of DTP software.
Answer:
Some of the popular DTP software are Adobe PageMaker, Adobe InDesign, QuarkXPress, etc.

Question 3.
Write the steps to open PageMaker.
Answer:
In the Windows 7 operating system, we can open Adobe PageMaker using the command sequence
Start →All Programs → Adobe → Pagemaker 7.0 → Adobe PageMaker 7.0.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 4.
How do you create a New document in PageMaker?
Answer:
To create a new document in. PageMaker:

  • Choose File > New in the menu bar. (or) Press Ctrl + N in the keyboard. Document Setup dialog box appears.
  • Enter the appropriate settings for your new doc¬ument in the Document Setup dialog box.
  • Click on OK.

Question 5.
What is a Pasteboard in PageMaker?
Answer:
A document page is displayed within a dark border. The area outside of the dark border is referred to as the pasteboard. Anything that is placed completely in the pasteboard is not visible when you print the document.

Question 6.
Write about the Menu bar of PageMaker.
Answer:
It contains the following menus File, Edit, Layout, Type, Element, Utilities, View, Window, Help. When you click on a menu item, a pull down menu appears. There may be sub-menus under certain options in the pull-down menus.

Question 7.
Differentiate Ellipse tool from Ellipse frame tool.
Answer:

Ellipse toolEllipse frame tool
It is used to draw circles and ellipses.It is used to create elliptical place holders for text and graphics.

Question 8.
What is text editing?
Answer:
Editing encompasses many tasks, such as inserting and deleting words and phrases, correcting errors, and moving and copying text to different places in the document.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
What is text block?
Answer:
A text block contains text you type, paste, or import. You cannot see the borders of a text block until you select it with the pointer tool.

Question 10.
What is threading text blocks?
Answer:
A Text block can be connected to other text blocks so that the text in one text block can flow into another text block. Text blocks that are connected in this way are threaded. The process of connecting text among Text blocks is called threading text.

Question 11.
What is threading text?
Answer:
The process of connecting text among Text blocks is called threading text.

Question 12.
How do you insert a page in PageMaker?
Answer:
To insert pages

  1. Go to the page immediately before the page you want to insert.
  2. Choose Layout > Insert Pages in themenu bar. The Insert Pages dialog box appears.
  3. Type the number of pages you want to insert.
  4. To insert pages after the current page, choose ‘after’ from the pop-up menu.
  5. Click on Insert.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
What is PageMaker? Explain its uses,
Answer:
Adobe PageMaker is a page layout software. It is used to design and produce documents that can be printed. You can create anything from a simple business card to a large book.

Page layout software includes tools that allow you to easily position text and graphics on document pages. For example, using PageMaker, you could create a newsletter that includes articles and pictures on each page. You can place pictures and text next to each other, on top of each other, or beside each other wherever you want them to go.

Question 2.
Mention three tools in PageMaker and write their keyboard shortcuts.
Answer:

  1. Pointer Tool F9
  2. Rotating Tool Shift + F2
  3. Line Tool Shift + F3

Question 3.
Write the use of arty three tools in PageMaker along with symbols.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker 1

Question 4.
How do you rejoin split blocks?
Answer:
Rejoining split blocks
To rejoin the two text blocks

  1. Place the cursor on the bottom handle of the second text.block, click and drag the bottom handle up to the top.
  2. Then place the cursor on the bottom handle of the first text block, and click and drag the bottom handle down if necessary.

Question 5.
How do you Sink frames containing text?
Answer:

  • Draw a second frame with the Frame tool of your choice.
  • Click the first frame to select it.
  • Click on the red triangle to load the text icon.
  • Click the second frame. PageMaker flows the text into the second frame.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 6.
What is the use of Master Page?
Answer:
Any text or object that you place on the master page will appear on the entire document pages to which the master is applied. It shortens the amount of time because you don’t have to create the same objects repeatedly on subsequent pages. Master Pages commonly contain repeating logos, page numbers, headers, and footers. They also contain non-printing layout guides, such as column guides, ruler guides, and margin guides.

Question 7.
How to you insert page numbers in Master pages?
Answer:

  • Click on Master Pages icon.
  • Then click on Text Tool. Now the cursor changes to I – beam.
  • Then Click on the left Master page where you want to put the page number.

Part IV

Explain In Details

Question 1.
Explain the tools in PageMaker toolbox,
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker 2 Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker 3

Question 2.
Write the steps to place the text in a frame.
Answer:
Placing Text in a Frame
You can also use frames to hold the text in place of using text blocks.
To place text in a Frame

  1. Click on one of a Frame tool from the Toolbox.
  2. Draw a frame with one of PageMaker’s Frame tools (Rectangle frame tool or Ellipse Frame Tool or Polygon frame Tool). Make sure the object remains selected.
  3. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
  4. Click on Place. The Place dialog box will appear.
  5. Locate the document that contains the text you want to place, select it.
  6. Click on Open.
  7. Click in a frame to place the text in it. The text will be placed in the frame.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
How can you convert text in a text block to a frame?
Answer:
After created text in a text block, if you want to convert it to a frame. You can do this by using these steps.

  • Draw the frame of your choice using one of the PageMaker’s Frame tool.
  • Select the text block you want to insert in the frame.
  • Click the frame while pressing the Shift key. Now both elements will be selected.
  • Choose Element > Frame > Attach Content on the Menu bar.
  • Now the text appears in the frame.

Question 4.
Write the steps to draw a star using polygon tool?
Answer:
Drawing a Star using Polygon tool
To draw a Star

  1. Click on the Polygon tool from the toolbox. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
  2. Click and drag anywhere on the screen. As you drag, a Polygon appears.
  3. Release the mouse button when the Polygon is of the desired size.
  4. Choose Element > Polygon Settings in the menu bar. Now Polygon Settings dialogue box appears.
  5. Type 5 in the Number of the sides text box.
  6. Type 50% in Star inset textbox.
  7. Click OK. Now the required star appears on the screen.

12th Computer Applications Guide An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1.
Which of the following is DTP software?
a) page maker
b) in design
c) quark x press
d) all of the above.
Answer:
d) all of the above.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
The main components of the page maker windows are
a) title bar, the menu bar
b) toolbar, ruler
c) scroll bars and text area
d) all of the above.
Answer:
d) all of the above.

Question 3.
…………………. is the topmost part of the windows.
a) title bar
b) menu bar
c) toolbar
d) toolbox.
Answer:
a) title bar

Question 4.
How many control buttons are present in the title bar?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
(d) 5
Answer:
(b) 3

Question 5.
There are ………………… ruler bar.
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 4
Answer:
b) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 6.
When you move the mouse pointer on a button in the toolbar, a short text that appears is called ……………………………..
(a) Tooltip
(b) Text
(c) Show text
(d) Short text
Answer:
(a) Tooltip

Question 7.
To select a paragraph, press ………….. with I – Beam.
a) select click
b) right-click
c) double click
d) triple-click.
Answer:
d) triple-click.

Question 8.
………………… tool is used to select .move and resize text objects and graphics.
a) pointer tool
b) text tool
c) rotating tool
d) cropping tool.
Answer:
a) pointer tool

Question 9.
The ………………… key is used to press down and
the movements keys.
a) Ctrl
b) shift
c) alt
d) tab
Answer:
b) shift

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 10.
In page maker, the text of the document can type inside a …………………
a) text tool
b) text area
c) text block
d) text box
Answer:
c) text block

Question 11.
How many scroll bars are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Question 12.
Text can be contained …………………
a) text blocks
b) text frame
c) either a (or) b
d) both a and b
Answer:
c) either a (or) b

Question 13.
Master pages commonly contain …………………
a) repeating logos, page numbers
b) headers and footers
c) both a and b
d) none of these.
Answer:
c) both a and b

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 14.
A new document in page maker is called…………………
a) Untitled-1
b) Document-1
c) New Document
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Untitled-1

Question 15.
The flashing verticle bar is called ……………………………
(a) scroll bar
(b) ruler
(c) Footer
(d) Insertion point
Answer:
(d) Insertion point

Fill in The Blanks:

1. DTP expands
Answer:
Desktop publishing,

2. Adobe page Is a layout software,
Answer:
page

3. To make an adobe page make in windows is
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker 4

4. The area outside of the border is referred to as the
Answer:
pasteboard

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

5. In the toolbar a short text will appear as its description called
Answer:
Tooltip

6. The command is used to reverse the action of the last command.
Answer:
undo

7. The short cut key for undo is
Answer:
ctrl + z

8. A contains the text you type, paste, or import in Pagemaker.
Answer:
text block

9. The two handles are seen above and below of the text, the block is called _________
Answer:
window shades

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

10. Generate a new page by selecting in the menu bar.
Answer:
layout → insert pages.

11. All text in page maker resides inside containers called
Answer:
text blocks.

12. In page maker, text and graphics that you draw or import is called
Answer:
objects.

13. The process of connecting text among text blocks is called text
Answer:
threading.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

14. Text the flows through one or more .threaded blocks is called a
Answer:
story,

15. The palette is especially useful when you are doing lot of formatting
Answer:
control palette.

16. Page maker has a line tool
Answer:
2

17. As the characters are typed, the flashing vertical bar called the
Answer:
insertion point

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

18. is the process of changing the general arrangement of text.
Answer:
Formatting

19. means making changes to the text.
Answer:
Editing

20. Reversing the Undo command is known as.
Answer:
Redo

Short Cut Keys

1. Ctrl+N – Create New Document
2. F9 – Pointer Tool
3. Shift+F2 – Rotating Tool
4. Shift+F3 – Line Tool
5. Shift*F4 – Rectangle Too!
6, Shift+F5 – Ellipse Too!
7. Shift+F6 – Polygon Too!
8. Shift+Alt +Drag Left Mouse Button- Hand Tool
9. Shift +Ait+ FI – Text Tool
10. Shift +Ait +F2 – Cropping Too!
11. Shift+Alt +F3 – Constrained Line Tool
12, Shift+Alt +F4 – Rectangle Frame Too!
13. Shift + <– – One Character To Left
14. Shift +→ – One Character To The Light
15. Shift +^ – One Line Up
16. Shift* – One Line Down
17. Shift +End “ To End Of The Current Line
18. Shift+Home – To The Beginning Of The Current Line
19. Ctrl* A – Select Entire Document
20. Ctrl+Z – Undo
21. Ctrl+X – Cut
22. Ctri+V – Paste
23. Ctri+C – Copy
24. Ctri+S – Saving A Document
25. Ctri+W – Closing A Document
26. Left Arrow (←) – One Character To The Left
27. Right Arrow (→) – One Character To The Right
28. One Word To The Left – Ctrl +Left Arrow
29. One Word To The Right – Ctrl + Right Arrow
30. Up Arrow – Up One Une
31. Down Arrow- Down One Line
32. End – ToThe End Of A Line
33. Home – To The Beginning Of A Line
34. Ctrl + Up Arrow – Up One Paragraph
35. Ctrl + Down – Down One Paragraph
36. Ctrl + Q – Opening An Existing Document
37. Ctrl + Space Bar – to zoom in
38. Ctrl + Alt + Space Bar-ar- To Zoom Out
39. Ctrl+ T – Character Formatting
40. Ctrl+ – Control Palette
41. Alt+ Ctrl+ G – Going To Specific
42. Ctrl4- Alt+ P – Page Number Displays
43. Ctri+ P – Print

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Assertion And Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Adobe PageMaker is a page layout software.
Reason (R): It is used to design and produce documents that can be printed,
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion (A): A document pageis displayed within a dark border.
Reason (R): The area outside of the dark border is referred to as the Margin.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Menu bar ¡s the topmost part of the window.
Reason (R): Title bar shows the name of the software and the name ofthe document at the left, and the control buttons (Minimize, Maximize and Close) at theright.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) Is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) Is true

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 4.
Assertion (A): Editing means creating the text. Reason (R); Editing encompasses many tasks, such as inserting and deleting words and phrases, correcting errors, and moving and copying text to different places in the document. a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false d) (A) is false and (R) is true Answer: d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Question 5.
Assertion (A): Text blocks that are connected the way are threaded.
Reason (R): A Text block can be connected to another text block so that the text in one text block can flow into another text block.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Match The Following

1. One character to the left a) Ctrl + Left Arrow
2. One character to the right b) Ctrl + Right Arrow
3. One word to the left c) Left Arrow
4. One word to the right d) Right Arrow
5. Up one line e) Ctrl +Up Arrow
6. Down one line f) Ctrl +Down Arrow
7. To the end of a line g) End
8. To the beginning of a line h) Home
9. Up one paragraph i) Up Arrow
10. Down one paragraph j) Down Arrow
Answer:
1. c 2. d 3. a 4. b 5. I 6. j 7. g 8. h 9. e 10. f

Find The Odd One On The Following

1. (a) Page Maker
(b) Indesign
(c) QuarkXpress
(d) Ubuntu
Answer:
(d) Ubuntu

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

2. (a) File
(b) Tool Tip
(c) Elements
(d) Utilities
Answer:
(b) Tool Tip

3. (a) Type
(b) Paste
(c) Import
(d) Print
Answer:
(d) Print

4. (a) Text Block
(b) Ruler
(c) Text Tool
(d) InsertionPoint
Answer:
(b) Ruler

5. (a) Ctrl+Z
(b) Ctrl+Y
(c) Ctrl+T
(d) Ctrl+C
Answer:
(c) Ctrl+T

6. (a) Text Tool
(b) Line Tool
(c) HandTool
(d) Window
Answer:
(d) Window

7. (a) Type
(b) Select
(c) zoom
(d) edit Answer:
(c) zoom

8. (a) Shift+end
(b) Shift+home
(c) Shift +→
(d) shift+F1
Answer:
(d) shift+F1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

9. (a) Threaded
(b) Text
(c) Threading Text
(d) story
Answer:
(b) Text

10. (a) Save
(b) Element
(c) Frame
(d) Delete
Answer:
(a) Save

Choose The In Correct Pair

1. (a) Edit and Paste
(b) Layout and Go to Page
(c) Window and Hide tools
(d) Element and Cascade
Answer:
(d) Element and Cascade

2. a) File → Print and Ctrl + P
b) Centre Alignment and Ctrl+C
c) Window→ Show colors and Press Ctrl + J
d) Type → Character and Press Ctrl + T
Answer:
b) Centre Alignment and Ctrl+C

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

3. a) File →New and Edit → Paste
b) Ctrl + X → to Cut and Ctrl + V → to Paste
c) Ctrl + C → to Copy and Ctrl + V → to Paste
d) Up one line, Press Up Arrow and Down one line, press Down Arrow
Answer:
a) File →New and Edit → Paste

4. a) Draw Star; Polygon tool
b) Draw Rounded corner, Rectangle tool
c) Draw Dotted line, the Pointer tool
d) Draw Rectangle, Ellipse tool
Answer:
c) Draw Dotted line, the Pointer tool

5. a) Zoom tool, Magnify
b) Hand tool, Scroll
c) Rotating tool. Trim
d) Ellipse tool, Circles
Answer:
c) Rotating tool. Trim

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is the purpose of the page layout tool?
Answer:
Page layout software includes tools that allow you to easily position text and graphics on document pages.

Question 2.
Write a note on scroll bars?
Answer:
Scrolling is the process of moving up and down or left and right through the document window. There are two scroll bars namely Vertical and Horizontal scroll bars for scrolling the document vertically or horizontally.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
What is the title bar?
Answer:

  • It is the topmost part of the window.
  • It shows the name of the software and the name of the document at the left, and the control buttons (Minimize, Maximize and Close) at the right.

Question 4.
What is the use of entering key?
Answer:
The Enter key should be pressed only at the end of a paragraph or when a blank line is to be inserted.

Question 5.
What is a tooltip?
Answer:
If you place the mouse pointer on a button in the Toolbar, a short text will appear as its description called ‘Tool Tip’

Question 6.
Write the steps to show toolbox in page maker,
Answer:

  1. Click on Window. The Window menu will appear.
  2. Click on Show tools.

Question 7.
What are the two ways of creating text blocks?
Answer:

  1. Click or drag the text tool on the page or pasteboard, and then type
  2. Click a loaded text icon in an empty column or page.

Question 8.
Write the steps to show ruler in page maker.
Answer:

  1. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
  2. Click on Show Rulers. Rulers appear along the top and left sides of the document window.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
Write the steps to hide ruler in page maker.
Answer:

  1. Click on View, The View menu will appear.
  2. Click on Hide Rulers to hide the rulers.

Question 10.
What is the purpose of Undo command?
Answer:

  • The Undo command is used to reverse the action of the last command.
  • To reverse the last command, click on Edit Undo in the menu bar
    (or)
  • Press Ctrl + Z on the keyboard.

Question 11.
What are the two-line tools in page maker?
Answer:
PageMaker has two Line tools. The first one creates a straight line at any orientation. The second is a constrained Line tool that draws only at increments of 45 degrees.

Question 12.
Write a short note on the Text block in the page maker.
Answer:
A text block contains the text you type, paste, or im¬port. You can’t see the borders of a text block until you select it with the pointer tool.
You create text blocks in two ways:

  1. Click or drag the text tool on the page or pasteboard, and then type.
  2. Click a loaded text icon in an empty column or page.

Question 13.
How will you rejoin the split blocks?
To rejoin the two blocks

  • Place the cursor on the bottom handle of the sec¬ond text block, click and drag the bottom handle up to the top.
  • Then place the cursor on the bottom handle of the first text block, and ciick and drag the bottom handle down if necessary.

Question 14.
What do you mean by threading text?
Answer:

  • Text blocks that are connected in this way are threaded.
  • The process of connecting text among Text blocks is called threading text.

Question 15.
How will you close a document?
Answer:
The document can be closed using the File > Close command in the menu bar (or) Ctrl +W in the keyboard.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 16.
How will you create a text block with a text tool?
Answer:
To create a text block with the text tool:
(i) Select the text tool (T) from the toolbox. The pointer turns into an I-beam.

(ii) On an empty area of the page or pasteboard, do one of the following:
Click the I-beam where you want to insert text. This creates a text block the width of the column or page. By default, the insertion point jumps to the left side of the text block.

(iii) Type the text you want.
Unlike with a text frame, you do not see the borders of a text block until you click the text with the pointer tool.

Question 17.
How to Hide the Master Items?
Answer:
To make the master items invisible on a particular page, switch to the appropriate page, then choose View> Display Masteritems (which is usually ticked).

Part C

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write the steps to resize a text block.
Answer:

  • Click on the Pointer tool.
  • Click either the left or right corner handle on the bottom of the text block and drag. When you release the mouse button, the text in the text: block will reflow to fit the new size of the text block.
  • A red triangle in the bottom windowshade means there is more text In the text block than is visi¬ble on the page. Drag the window shade handle down to show more text.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 2.
Write the steps to Seles® Text using the mouse
Answer:
To select text using a mouse, follow these steps :

  • Place the insertion point to the left of the first character to be selected.
  • Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to a position where you want to stop selecting.
  • Release the mouse button.
  • The selected text gets highlighted.
To Select

Press

A WordDouble-click with I-beam
A ParagraphTriple-click with I-beam

Question 3.
Differentiate copying and moving the text
Answer:

CopyingMoving
Creating similar text in new locationRelocating the original text in a new location
Makes a duplicate text in another locationTransfers the Original text to another location
Will not affect the original contentWill delete the Original content
Keyboard shortcuts for cut and paste:

Ctrl + X → to Cut
Ctrl + V → to Paste

Keyboard shortcuts for copy and paste:

Ctrl + C → to Copy
Ctrl + V → to Paste

Question 4.
Write the steps to delete a character or word or block of text
Answer:
Deleting Text
You can easily delete a character, or word, or block of text.
To delete a character, do the following :

  1. Position the insertion point to the left of the character to be deleted.
  2. Press the Delete key on the keyboard.
    (or)
  3. Position the insertion point to the right of the character to be deleted.
  4. Press the Backspace key on the keyboard.

To delete a block of text, do the following :

  1. Select the text to be deleted.
  2. Press Delete or Backspace in the keyboard (or) Edit → Clear command.

Question 5.
How will you create a text box with the text tool?
Answer:
To create a text block with the text tool:
1. Select the text tool (T) from the toolbox. The pointer turns into an I-beam.

2. On an empty area of the page or pasteboard, do one of the following:

  • Click the I-beam where you want to insert text.
  • This creates a text block the width of the column or page. By default, the insertion point jumps to the left side of the text block.

3. Type the text you want.
Unlike with a text frame, you do not see the borders of a text block until you click the text with the pointer tool.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 6.
Write the steps to resize a text block.
Answer:

  1. Click on the Pointer tool.
  2. Click either the left or right corner handle on the bottom of the text block and drag.
  3. When you release the mouse button, the text in the text block will reflow to fit the new size of the text block.
  4. A red triangle in the bottom window shade means there is more text in the text block than is visible on the page.
  5. Drag the window shade handle down to show more text.

Question 7.
Write the steps to split a textbox into two.
Answer:
To split a text block into two

  1. Place the cursor on the bottom handle, click and drag upwards. When you release the bottom handle will contain a red triangle.
  2. Click once on this, and the cursor changes to a loaded text icon.
  3. Position this where the second part of the text is to be, and click.

Question 8.
Write the steps to Select Text Using the Keyboard
Answer:
To select text using a keyboard, follow these steps:

  1. Place the insertion point to the left of the first character you wish to select.
  2. The Shift key is pressed down and the movement keys are used to highlight the required text.
  3. When the Shift key is released, the text is selected
To Select

Press

One character to the leftShift + ←
One character to the rightShift + →
One line upShift + ↑
One line downShift + ↓
To the end of the current lineShift + End
To the beginning of the current lineShift + Home
Entire DocumentCtrl + A

Question 9.
Write the steps to split a textbox into two.
Answer:
To split a text block into two

  1. Place the cursor on the bottom handle, click and drag upwards. When you release the bottom handle will contain a red triangle.
  2. Click once on this, and the cursor changes to a loaded text icon.
  3. Position this where the second part of the text is to be, and click.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 10.
Write the steps to import the text.
Answer:

  1. Choose File → Place. The Place dialog box will appear.
  2. Locate the document that contains the text you want to place and select it.
  3. Click on the Open in the Place dialog box. The pointer changes to the loaded text icon.
  4. Make a text block to place the text. (Or) Click on the page to place the text. The text will be placed on the page.
  5. If the text to be placed is too big to fit on one page, PageMaker allows you to place it on several pages. This can be done manually or automatically.

Question 11.
What are the various options to save a document?
Answer:

  1. Choose File > Save in the menu bar. (or)
  2. The file name is given in the File name list box.
  3. Then click on the Save button to save the document.
  4. The document is now saved and a file name appears in the title bar.

Once a file is saved under a name, to save it again the name need not be entered again. The file can be saved simply by selecting the File > Save command or by clicking the Save button (or) clicking Ctrl + S on the keyboard.

Question 12.
Write the steps to save a document with a new name or in a different location
Answer:
You can save a document with a new name or in a different location using Save AS command. Save AS command creates a new copy of the document. So, two versions of the document ex¬ist. The versions are completely separate, and the work you do on one document has no effect on the other.

To save a document with a new name or in a different location:

  1. Choose File > Save As in the menu bar. (or) Press Shift + Ctrl + S on the keyboard. Now Save Publication dialog box will appear.
  2. Type a new name or specify a new location.
  3. Click the Save button.

Question 13.
How will you open an existing document?
Answer:

  1. Choose File > Open in the menu bar (or)Click on the Open icon () in the Tool bar (or) Press Ctrl + 0 in the Keyboard. An open Publication dialog box as shown that appears on the screen.
  2. The file name is given in the File name list box. The name of the file to be opened can be chosen from the list, which is displayed.
  3. Then click on the Open button. Now the required file is opened.

Question 14.
Write the procedure to scroll the document.
Answer:
The scrolling procedure is as follows:

  1. To scroll left and right the left and right arrow respectively should be clicked.
  2. To scroll up and down the up and down arrow respectively should be clicked.
  3. To scroll a relative distance in the document the scroll box should be drawn up or down.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 15.
Write the steps to draw a line.
Answer:

  1. Select the Line tool from the toolbox. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
  2. Click and drag on the screen to draw your line. As you drag, a line appears. 44
  3. Release the mouse button and the line will be drawn and selected, with sizing handles on either end. Resize the line by clicking and dragging the handles, if necessary.

Question 16.
Write the steps to Draw Rectangles or Ellipses.
Answer:
You can also draw rectangles and ellipses shapes by using the same technique as used in line drawing.

To draw a rectangle or ellipse:

  1. Click on the Rectangle or Ellipse tool from the toolbox. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
  2. Click and drag anywhere on the screen. As you drag, a rectangle or ellipse appears.
  3. Release the mouse button when the rectangle or ellipse is of the desired size.
  4. Press the Shift key while you’re drawing to constrain the shape to a square or circle.

Question 17.
Write the steps to Draw Polygon
Answer:
To draw a Polygon

  1. Click on the Polygon tool from the toolbox. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
  2. Click and drag anywhere on the screen. As you drag, a Polygon appears.
  3. Release the mouse button when the Polygon is of the desired size.

Question 18.
Write the steps to Draw a star with given number of sides and required inset.
Answer:

  1. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 50% The number of sides is 15
  2. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 25% The number of sides is 25
  3. The value of ‘Star inset’ is 35% The number of sides is 70

Question 19.
Write a short note on Master Page.
Answer:

  • Master Pages commonly contain repeating logos, page numbers, headers, and footers. They also contain nonprinting layout guides, such as column guides, ruler guides, and margin guides.
  • A master item cannot be selected on a document page.
  • You can create, modify, and delete objects on master pages just like any other objects, but you must do so from the master pages themselves.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 20.
Write the steps to create a new Master Page
Answer:

  1. Click the New Master Page icon in the Master Pages palette. The New Master Page dialog box appears.
  2. Enter the name of the new master page in the Name field.
  3. Make the appropriate changes in the Margins and Column Guides fields.
  4. Click on OK. A new Master Page appears in the Master Pages palette.

Part D

Explain In Detail.

Question 1.
What are the different ways of selecting the text?
Answer:
Selecting Text:
Text can be selected using the mouse or the keyboard.
Selecting Text using the mouse:
To select text using a mouse, follow these steps :

  1. Place the insertion point to the left of the first character to be selected.
  2. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse to a position where you want to stop selecting.
  3. Release the mouse button.
  4. The selected text gets highlighted.

To Select Press:

  1. A Word Double-click with I-beam
  2. A Paragraph Triple-click with I-beam

Selecting Text using the Keyboard:
To select text using a keyboard, follow these steps :

  1. Place the Insertion point to the left of the first character you wish to select.
  2. The Shift key is pressed down and the movement keys are used to highlight the required text.
  3. When the Shift key is released, the text is selected.

To Select – Press
One character to the left – Shift + ←
One character to the right – Shift + →
One line up – Shift + ↑
One line down – Shift + ↓
To the end of the current line – Shift +End
To the beginning of the current line – Shift + Home,
Entire Document – Ctrl + A

Question 2.
Write the steps to place text in a frame
Answer:

  1. Click on one of a Frame tool from the Toolbox.
  2. Draw a frame with one of PageMaker’s Frame tools (Rectangle frame tool or Ellipse Frame Tool or Polygon frame Tool). Make sure the object remains selected.
  3. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
  4. Click on Place. The Place dialog box will appear.
  5. Locate the document that contains the text you want to place, select it.
  6. Click on Open.
  7. Click in a frame to place the text in it. The text will be placed in the frame.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 3.
Explain the magnifying and reducing with the zoom tool.
Answer:
Use the zoom tool to magnify or reduce the display of any area in your publication

To magnify or reduce with the zoom tool:
1. Select the zoom tool. The pointer becomes a magnifying glass with a plus sign in its center, in¬dicating that the zoom tool will magnify your view of the image. To toggle between magnification and reduction, press the Ctrl key.

2. Position the magnifying glass at the center of the area you want to magnify or reduce, and then click to zoom in or out. Continue clicking until the publication is at the magnification level you want. When the publication has reached its maximum magnification or reduction level, the center of the magnifying glass appears blank.

To magnify part of a page by dragging:

  1. Select the zoom tool.
  2. Drag to draw a marquee around the area you want to magnify.

To zoom in or out while using another tool:
Press Ctrl+Spacebar to zoom in. Press Ctrl+Alt+Spacebar to zoom out.

Question 4.
Explain how will you draw a dotted line?
Answer:
To draw a Dotted line:

  1. Double click the Line tool from the toolbox. A Custom Stroke dialogue box appears.
  2. Select the required Stroke style in the drop-down list box.
  3. Then click the OK button. Now the cursor changes to a crosshair.
  4. Click and drag on the screen to draw your dotted line. As you drag, the line appears.
  5. Release the mouse button and the line will be drawn and selected, with sizing handles on either end.
    Resize the line by clicking and dragging the handles, if necessary.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 5.
Write the steps To draw a Dotted line
Answer:

  1. Double click the Line tool from the toolbox. A Custom Stroke dialogue box appears.
  2. Select the required Stroke style in the drop-down list box.
  3. Then click the OK button. Now the cursor changes to a crosshair.
  4. Click and drag on the screen to draw your dotted line. As you drag, the line appears.
  5. Release the mouse button and the line will be drawn and selected, with sizing handles on either end.
  6. Resize the line by clicking and dragging the handles, if necessary.

Question 6.
Write the steps to Drawing a Rounded Corner Rectangle
Answer:
To draw a rounded-corner rectangle:

  1. Double-click the Rectangle tool in the toolbox. The Rounded Corners dialog box appears.
  2. Choose a corner setting from the preset shapes.
  3. Click on OK. The cursor changes to a crosshair.
  4. Click and drag anywhere on the screen.
  5. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the desired size.
  6. Press the Shift key as you draw to constrain the shape to a rounded corner square.

Question 7.
Write the steps to Fill Shapes with Colors and Patterns
Answer:
Filling Rectangle with colour:

  1. Draw a rectangle using the Rectangle tool.
  2. Select the rectangle.
  3. Choose Window → Show colors in the menu bar (or) Press Ctrl + J. Now Colors palette appears.
  4. Click on the required colour from the Colors Palette.
  5. The rectangle has been filled with colour.

Question 8.
Write all the methods to go to a specific page.
Answer:
Pagemaker provides several methods for navigating the pages in your publication.

Method 1:
You can move from one page to another by using the Page up and Page down keys on your key- i 10. board. These is probably the navigation methods you will use most often.
Method 2;
You can move from one page to another by using the page icons at the left bottom of the screen.
Click on the page icon that corresponds to the page that you want to view. The page is displayed,

Method 3:
Using the Go to Page dialog box.
To go to a specific page in a document

  1. Choose Layout → Go to Page in the menu bar (or) Press Alt + Ctrl + G in the keyboard. Now the Go to Page dialog box appears.
  2. In the dialog box, type the page number that you want to view
  3. Then click on OK, The required page is displayed on the screen.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 2 An Introduction to Adobe Pagemaker

Question 9.
What are the various methods to the inset page numbers in PageMaker Software?
Answer:
To make page numbers appear on every page

  1. Click on the Master Pages icon.
  2. Then dick on Text Tool. Now the cursor changes to I – beam.
  3. Then Click on the left Master page where you want to put the page number,
  4. Press Ctrl + Ait + P.
  5. The page number displays as ’LM’ on the left master page.
  6. Similarly, click on the right Master page where you want to put the page number.
  7. Press Ctrl + Alt + P.
  8. The page number displays as ‘RM’ on the right master page, but will appear correctly on the actual pages.

Question 10.
Write the steps to print a document.
Answer:
1. Choose File → Print in the menu bar (or) Press Ctrl + P on the keyboard.
The Print Document dialog box appears.
2. Choose the settings in the Print Document dialog box as

  • Select the printer from the Printer drop-down list box,
  • Choose the pages to be printed in the Pages group box by selecting one of the following available options

All This option prints the whole document.
Ranges: This option prints individual pages by the page number or a range of pages.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Pdf Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Solutions Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

12th Economics Guide Economics of Development and Planning Text Book Back Questions and Answers

PART – A

Multiple Choice questions

Question 1.
“Redistribution with Growth” became popular slogan under which approach?
a) Traditional approach
b) New welfare oriented approach
c) Industrial approach
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) New welfare oriented approach

Question 2.
Which is not the feature of economic growth?
a) Concerned with developed nations
b) Gradual change
c) Concerned with quantitative aspect
d) Wider concept
Answer:
d) Wider concept

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 3.
Which among the following is a characteristic of underdevelopment?
a) Vicious circle of poverty
b) Rising mass consumption
c) Growth of Industries
d) High rate of urbanization
Answer:
a) Vicious circle of poverty

Question 4.
The non-economic determinant of economic development
a) Natural resources
b) Human resource
c) Capital formation
d) Foreign trade
Answer:
b) Human resource

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 5.
Economic growth measures the ……………………
a) Growth of productivity
b) Increase in nominal income
c) Increase in output
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Increase in output

Question 6.
The supply side vicious circle of poverty suggests that poor nations remain poor because
a) Saving remains low
b) Investment remains low
c) There is a lack of effective government
d) a and b above
Answer:
d) a and b above

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 7.
Which of the following plan has focussed on the agriculture and rural economy?
a) People’s Plan
b) Bombay Plan
c) Gandhian Plan
d) Vishveshwarya Plan
Answer:
c) Gandhian Plan

Question 8.
Arrange following plans in correct chronological order
a) People’s Plan
b) Bombay Plan
c) Jawaharlal Nehru Plan
d) Vishveshwarya Plan
Answer choices
a) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv)
b) (iv) (hi) (ii) (i)
c) (i) (ii) (iv) (ii)
d) (ii) (i) (iv) (iii)
Answer:
b) Bombay Plan

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 9.
M. N. Roy was associated with …………..
a) Congress Plan
b) People’s Plan
c) Bombay Plan
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) People’s Plan

Question 10.
Which of the following country adopts indicative planning?
a) France
b) Germany
c) Italy
d) Russia
Answer:
b) Germany

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 11.
Short-term plan is also known as ……………………
a) Controlling Plans
b) De-controlling Plans
c) Rolling Plans
d) De-rolling Plans
Answer:
a) Controlling Plans

Question 12.
Long-term plan is also known as …………
a) Progressive Plans
b) Non-progressive Plan
c) Perspective Plans
d) Non-perspective Plans
Answer:
c) Perspective Plans

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 13.
The basic philosophy behind long – term planning is to bring ………………. changes in the economy?
a) Financial
b) Agricultural
c) Industrial
d) Structural
Answer:
c) Industrial

Question 14.
Sarvodaya Plan was advocated by ……………..
a) Mahatma Gandhi
b) J.P. Narayan
c) S. N Agarwal
d) M. N. Roy
Answer:
b) J.P. Narayan

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 15.
Planning Commission was set up in the year ………….
a) 1950
b) 1951
c) 1947
d) 1948
Answer:
a) 1950

Question 16.
Who wrote the book ‘The Road to Serfdom’?
a) Friedrich Hayek
b) H. R. Hicks
c) David Ricardo
d) Thomas Robert Malthus
Answer:
a) Friedrich Hayek

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 17.
Perspective plan is also known as ………….
a) Short-term plan
b) Medium-term plan
c) Long-term plan
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Long-term plan

Question 18.
NITI Aayog is formed through ……………
a) Presidential Ordinance ‘
b) Allocation of business rules by President of India
c) Cabinet resolution
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Cabinet resolution

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 19.
Expansion of NITI Aayog?
a) National Institute to Transform India
b) National Institute for Transforming India
c) National Institution to Transform India
d) National Institution for Transforming India
Answer:
d) National Institution for Transforming India

Question 20.
The Chair Person of NITI Aayog is
a) Prime Minister
b) President
c) Vice – President
d) Finance Minister
Answer:
a) Prime Minister

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

PART – B

Answer the following questions in one or two sentences.

Question 21.
Define economic development
Answer:

  1. Economic development is regarded as a process whereby there is an increase in the consumption of goods and services by individuals.
  2. From the welfare perspective, economic development is defined as a sustained improvement in health, literacy and standard of living.

Question 22.
Mention the indicators of development.
Answer:

  • Gross National product (GNP)
  • GNP Per capita
  • Welfare
  • Social Indicators

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 23.
Distinguish between economic growth and development
Answer:

Economic growth

Economic Development

1. Deals with the problems of Developed countries.Deals with the problem of UDCs.
2. Change is gradual and steadyChange is discontinuous and spontaneous.
3. Narrowwider concept.

Question 24.
What is GNP?
Answer:
Gross National Product (GNP):

  1. GNP is the total market value of all final goods and services produced within a nation in a particular year, plus income earned by its citizens (including income of those located abroad), minus income of non – residents located in that country.
  2. GNP is one measure of the economic condition of a country, under the assumption that a higher GNP leads to a higher quality of living, all other things being equal.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 25.
Define economic planning.
Answer:
Economic planning is “collective contral or suppression of private activities of production and exchange”. – Robbins.

Question 26.
What are the social indicators of economic development?
Answer:
Social Indicators:

  1. Social indicators are normally referred to as the basic and collective needs of the people.
  2. The direct provision of basic needs such as health, education, food, water, sanitation, and housing facilities check social backwardness.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 27.
Write a short note on NITI Aayog.
Answer:

  1. NITI Aayog (National Institution for Transforming India) was formed on January 1, 2015, through a Union Cabinet resolution.
  2. NITI Aayog is a policy think-tank of the Government of India. It replaced the Planning Commission from 13th August 2014.
  3. The Prime Minister is the Chairperson of NITI Aayog and Union Ministers will be Ex – officio members.
  4. The Vice-Chairman of the NITI Aayog is the functional head and the first Vice-Chairman was Arvind Panangariya.

PART-C

Answer the following questions in one paragraph.

Question 28.
Elucidate major causes of vicious circle of poverty with diagram
Answer:
The vicious circle of Poverty
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning 1
A country is poor because of low capital income. The vicious circle of poverty operates both on the demand side and the supply side.
It is associated with low rate of saving and investment on the supply side and low level of income leads to low level of demand on the demand side.

Question 29.
What are the non-economic factors determining development?
Answer:

  1. Human Resource
  2. Technical Know-how
  3. Political Freedom
  4. Social Organization
  5. Corruption free administration
  6. Desire for Development
  7. Moral, ethical and social values
  8. Casino Capitalism
  9. Patrimonial Capitalism

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 30.
How would you break the vicious circle of poverty?
Answer:

  • In the demand side Nurkse suggested the strategy of balanced growth to break vicious circle of poverty.
  • The balanced growth (i.e.,) simultaneous investment in large number of industries creates mutual demand.
  • Thus, through the strategy of balanced growth, vicious circle of poverty operating on the demand side of capital formation can be broken.
  • In the supply side to break the circle a country has to keep its marginal rate of savings higher than its average rate of savings.

Question 31.
Trace the evolution of economic planning in India.
Answer:
The evolution of planning in India is stated below:

(I) Sir M. Vishveshwarya (1934):
A prominent engineer and politician made his first attempt in laying the foundation for economic planning in India in 1934 through his book, “Planned Economy of India”. It was a 10-year plan.

(II) Jawaharlal Nehru (1938):
Set-up “National Planning Commission” by a committee but due to the changes in the political era and Second World War, it did not materialize.

(III) Bombay Plan (1940):
The 8 leading industrialists of Bombay presented the “Bombay Plan”. It was a 15 Year Investment Plan.

(IV) S.N Agarwal (1944):
Gave the “Gandhian Plan” focusing on the agricultural and rural economy.

(V) M.N. Roy (1945):
Drafted ‘People’s Plan”. It was aiming at the mechanization of agricultural production and distribution by the state only.

(VI) J.P. Narayan (1950):
Advocated, “Sarvodaya Plan” which was inspired by the Gandhian Plan and with the idea of Vinoba Bhave. It gave importance not only for agriculture but encouraged small and cottage industries in the plan.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 32.
Describe the case for planning.
Answer:

The economic planning is justified on the following grounds:-

  • To accelerate and strengthen market mechanism.
  • To remove unemployment ‘
  • To achieve balanced development
  • To remove poverty and inequalities.
    Arthur lewis says, ‘planning is more necessary in backward countries to devise ways and means and to make concentrated efforts to raise national income.

Question 33.
Distinguish between functional and structural planning.
Answer:
Functional planning refers to that planning which seeks to remove economic difficulties by directing all the planning activities within the existing economic and social structure.
The structural planning refers to a good deal of changes in the socioeconomic framework of the country.
This type of planning is adopted mostly in under developed countries.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 34.
What are the functions of NITI Aayog?
Answer:
Functions of NITI Aayog:
(I) Cooperative and Competitive Federalism:
To enable the States to have active participation in the formulation of national policy.

(II) Shared National Agenda:
To evolve a shared vision of national development priorities and strategies with the active involvement of States.

(III) Decentralized Planning:
To restructure the planning process into a bottom-up model.

(IV) Vision and Scenario Planning:
To design medium and long – term strategic frameworks towards India’s future.

(V) Network of Expertise:
To mainstream external ideas and expertise into government policies and programmes through collective participation.

(VI) Harmonization:
To facilitate harmonization of actions across different layers of government, especially when involving cross-cutting and overlapping issues across multiple sectors; through communication, coordination,
collaboration, and convergence amongst all the stakeholders.

(VII) Conflict Resolution:
To provide a platform for mutual consensus to inter-sectoral, interdepartmental, interstate as well as center-state issues for all speedy execution of the government programmes.

(VIII) Coordinating Interface with the World:
It will act nodal point to harness global expertise and resources coming from International organizations for India’s developmental process.

(IX) Internal Consultancy:
It provides internal consultancy to Central and State governments on policy and programmes.

(X) Capacity Building:
It enables to provide capacity building and technology up-gradation across government, benchmarking with latest global trends and providing managerial and technical know-how.

(XI) Monitoring and Evaluation:
It will monitor the implementation of policies and progammes and evaluate the impacts.

PART – D

Answer the following questions in about a page

Question 35.
Discuss the.economic determinants of economic development.
Answer:
Economic factors:

1. Natural Resource:-
The existence of natural resources in abundance is essential for development.
A country deficient in natural resources may not be in a position to develop rapidly.

2. Capital Formation:-
Capital formation refers to the net addition to the exist¬ing stock of capital goods which are either tangible like plants and machinery or intangible like health, education and research.

3 Size of the Market:-
Large size of the market would stimulate production,increase employment and raise the National per capita income.

4. Structural change:-
Structural change refers to change in the occupational structure of the economy.

5. Financial System:-
Financial system implies the existence of an efficient and organized banking system in the country.

6. Marketable Surplus :-
Marketable surplus refers to the total amount of farm output cultivated by farmers over and above their family consumption needs. This is a surplus that can be sold in the market for earning income.

7. Foreign Trade:-
The country which enjoys favourable balance of trade is always developed. It has huge forex reserves and stable exchange rate.

8. Economic system:-
The countries which adopt free market mechanism enjoy better growth rate compared to controlled economics.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 36.
Describe different types of Planning.
Answer:
(I) Democratic Vs Totalitarian:
A form of rule in which the government attempts to maintain ‘total’ control over society, including all aspects of the public and private lives of its citizens.

(II) Centralized Vs Decentralized:

  1. Under centralized planning, the entire planning process in a country is under a central planning authority.
  2. This authority formulates a central plan, fixes objectives, targets and priorities for every sector of the economy.
  3. In other words, it is called ‘planning from above’.

(III) Planning by Direction Vs Inducement:
Under planning by direction, there is a central authority which plans, directs and orders the execution of the plan in accordance with pre-determined targets and priorities.

(IV) Indicative Vs Imperative Planning:

  1. Indicative planning is peculiar to the mixed economies. It has been in practice in France since the Monnet Plan of 1947-50.
  2. In a mixed economy, the private sector and the public sector work together.
  3. Under this plan, the outline of plan is prepared by the Government.
  4. Then it is discussed with the representatives of private management, trade unions, consumer groups, finance institutions and other experts.

(V) Short, Medium and Long term Planning:

  1. Short-term plans are also known as ‘controlling plans’.
  2. They encompass the period of one year, therefore, they are also known as ‘annual plans’

(VI) Financial Vs Physical Planning:
Financial planning refers to the technique of planning in which resources are allocated in terms of money while physical planning pertains to the allocation of resources in terms of men, materials and machinery.

(VII) Functional Vs Structural Planning:
Functional planning refers to that planning seeks to remove economic difficulties by directing all the planning activities within the existing economic and social structure.

(VIII) Comprehensive Vs Partial Planning:
General planning which concerns itself with the major issues for the whole economy is known as comprehensive planning whereas partial planning is to consider only a few important sectors of the economy.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 37.
Bring out the arguments against planning.
Answer:
The prime goals of economic planning are stabilization in developed countries and growth in LDCS But the economic planning also is not free from limitations.
The arguments against planning are,

1. Loss of Freedom:
The absence of freedom in decision making may acts as an obstacle for economic growth. Under planning, the crucial decisions are made by the central planning Authority. The consumers, producers and the workers enjoy no freedom of choice. Therefore, Hayek explains, that centralized planning leads to loss of personal freedom and ends in economic stagnation. The decisions by the Government are not always rational Freedom to private producers will be misused, Profit will be given top priority, welfare will be relegated.

2. Elimination of Initiative:
Under centralized planning, there will be no incentive for initiatives and innovations. Planning follows routine procedure and may cause stagnation in growth.

  • The absence of private ownership and profit motive discourages entrepreneurs from taking bold decisions and risk taking.
  • Equal reward to all discourages interested in undertaking new and risky ventures.
  • The bureaucracy and red tapism which are the features of planned economy.

3. High cost of Management:
The cost of management of the economic affairs outweights the benefits of planning. Inadequate data, faulty estimations and improper implementation of plans result in wastage of resources and cause either surplus or shortages.

Difficulty in advance calculations :
Advance calculation in a precise manner are impossible to make decisions regarding the consumption and production. It is also very difficult to put the calculations into practice under planning.

12th Economics Guide Economics of Development and Planning Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Match the following:
Question 1.
A) Development- 1) Narrow concept
B) Todaro – 2) Wider concept
C) Economic Growth – 3) Structural change
D) Economic Development – 4) Development
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning 2
Answer:
b) 3 4 2 1

Question 2.
a) Innovation – 1) Dadabai Naoroji
b) Poverty and un British Rule- in India – 2) Douglas c. North
c) Moral and social values – 3) Thomas Piketty
d) Casino capitalism – 4) Schumpeter
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning 3
Answer:
d) 4 1 2 3

II. Choose the correct pair

Question 1.
a) Patrimonial capitalism – Douglas c. North
b) Vicious circle of poverty – Thomas Piketty
c) Great Depression – 1930
d) Planning commission – 1951
Answer:
c) Great Depression – 1930

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 2.
a) M.N. Roy – People’s plan
b) J.P. Narayan – Gandhian plan
c) S. N. Agarwal – Sarvodaya plan
d) Jawaharlal Nehru – Bombay plan
Answer:
a) M.N. Roy – People’s plan

III. Choose the incorrect pair

Question 1.
a) Planning commission – March 15,1950
b) Plan era – April 1,1951
c) First five-year plan – 1951-56
d) Planning – Gandhi
Answer:
d) Planning – Gandhi

Question 2.
a) Underdeveloped country – high percapita Income
b) Low-Income countries – $ 906 and below
c) Middle Income countries – Between $ 906 and $ 11,115
d) High Income countries – $ 11,116 or more
Answer:
a) Underdeveloped country – high percapita Income

Choose the correct statement

Question 1.
a) The UDCS are characterized by the predominance of the tertiary sector.
b) The Prime minister is the functional head of NITI Aayog.
c) The first vice-chairman of NITI Aayog was Arvind panangariya.
d) NITI Aayog assist planning commission
Answer:
c) The first vice-chairman of NITI Aayog was Arvind panangariya.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 2.
a) Centralised planning is called planning from below.
b) Decentralised planning is called planning from above.
c) Long-term plans are operational plans.
d) Medium-term planning is tactical planning.
Answer:
d) Medium-term planning is tactical planning.

V. Choose the incorrect statement

Question 1.
a) Short-term plans are for the period up to 1 year.
b) Medium-term plans last for 5-8 years
c) Long term plans last for the period of 10 – 30 years
d) Short term plans are also known as ‘controlling plans’
Answer:
b) Medium-term plans last for 5-8 years

Question 2.
a) NITI Aayog was formed on January 1, 2015
b) NITI Aayog replaced the planning commission on 13th August 2014
c) Ayushmaan Bharat’s approach was towards forest conservation.
d) National medical commission was replaced by the medical council of India.
Answer:
c) Ayushmaan Bharat’s approach was towards forest conservation.

VI. Pick the odd one out:

Question 1.
a) Economic planning
b) Financial Planning
c) Physical planning
d) Perspective Planning
Answer:
a) Economic planning

Question 2.
a) Low productivity
b) High Investment
c) Low percapita Income
d) Low saving
Answer:
b) High Investment

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Analyse the reason:

Question 1.
Assertion (A): Structural changes refers to change in the occupational structure of the Economy.
Reason (R): A country is generally divided into primary, secondary, and tertiary sectors.
a) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true; but (R) is false
d) Both (A) and (R) are false.
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion(A): Economic development depends on Economic, social, political, and religious factors.
Reasons (R): Being a wider concept economic development includes all the as¬pects of the country.
a) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) Both (A) and (R) is false, d) (A) is true (R) is false
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are true, (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

VIII. Fill in the blanks with the correct option.

Question 1.
Gross National Product is ……………………..
a) GDP
b) GNP
c) GNI
d) None
Answer:
b) GNP

Question 2.
The countries which adopt free-market mechanism are
a) Socialist
b) Mixed economy
c) Laissez-faire
d) Communist
Answer:
c) Laissez faire

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 3.
Capital is a necessary but not a sufficient condition of progress is a statement of …………………….
a) Thomas piketty
b) Douglas c. North
c) Schumpeter
d) Ragnar Nurkse
Answer:
d) Ragnar Nurkse

IX. Choose the best answer.

Question 1.
The first chairman of the planning commission was
a) J. P. Narayan
b) S. N. Agarwal
c) Jawaharlal Nehru
d) Sri. M. Vishveshwarya
Answer:
c) Jawaharlal Nehru

Question 2.
A declaration of industrial policy was announced in
a) 1950
b) 1948
c) 1947
d)1951
Answer:
b) 1948

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 3.
The better we try to plan, the more planners we need’ is the statement of ………………………..
a) Thomas piketty
b) Douglas c. North
c) Ragnar Nurkse
d) Arthur Lewis
Answer:
d) Arthur Lewis

X. Answer the following in one or two sentences.

Question 1.
Define “Traditional Approach”?
Answer:
Traditional Approach:

  1. The traditional approach defines development strictly in economic terms.
  2. The increase in GNP is accompanied by a decline in the share of agriculture in output and employment while those of manufacturing and service sectors increase.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 2.
State the meaning of Under development.
Answer:
The term underdevelopment refers to that state of an economy where levels of living of masses are extremely low due to very low levels of per capita income, resulting from low levels of productivity and high growth rate of population.

Question 3.
Write “UDC” characteristics?
Answer:
The UDCs are characterized by the predominance of primary sector i.e. agriculture, low per capita income, widespread poverty, wide inequality in the distribution of income and wealth, overpopulation, low rate of capital formation, high rate of unemployment, technological backwardness, dualism, etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 4.
What are the pillars of NITI Aayog?
Answer:

  • pro-people
  • pro – Activity.
  • Participation
  • Empowering
  • Inclusion of all
  • Equality
  • Transparency

Question 5.
Define “Financial system.”?
Answer:
Financial System:

  1. A financial system implies the existence of an efficient and organized banking system in the country.
  2. There should be an organized money market to facilitate the easy availability of capital.

Question 6.
What is GNP Per Capita?
Answer:
It relates to an increase in per capita real income of the economy over a long period.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 7.
Define “Sarvodaya plan”?
Answer:
“Sarvodaya Plan” was inspired by the Gandhian Plan and with the idea of Vinoba Bhave.
It gave importance not only to agriculture but encouraged small and cottage industries in the plan.

XI. Answer the following questions in paragraph

Question 1.
Briefly explain the Measurement of Economic Development?
Answer:
Measurement of Economic Development:
Economic development is measured on the basis of four criteria

(I) Gross National Product (GNP):
1. GNP is the total market value of all final goods and services produced within a nation in a particular year, plus income earned by its citizens (including income of those located abroad), minus income of non-residents located in that country.

2. GNP is one measure of the economic condition of a country, under the assumption that a higher GNP leads to a higher quality of living, all other things being equal.

(II) GNP per capita:

  1. This relates to increasing in the per capita real income of the economy over the long period.
  2. This indicator of economic growth emphasizes that for economic development the rate of increase in real per capita income should be higher than the growth rate of the population.

(III) Welfare:

  1. Economic development is regarded as a process whereby there is an increase in the consumption of goods and services by individuals.
  2. From the welfare perspective, economic development is defined as a sustained improvement in health, literacy and standard of living.

(IV) Social Indicators:

  1. Social indicators are normally referred to as the basic and collective needs of the people.
  2. The direct provision of basic needs such as health, education, food, water, sanitation, and housing facilities check social backwardness.

Question 2.
Distinguish Between Economic Growth and Economic Development.
Answer:

Economic Growth

Economic Development

1. Deals with the problems of developed countriesDeals with the problems of UDCS
2. Change is gradual and steadyChange is discontinuous and spontaneous
3. Means more outputMeans not only more output but also its composition
4. Concerns quantitative aspects ie increase in per capita incomequantitative as well as qualitative
5. Narrowwider concept, Development = Growth + Change

Question 3.
Explain Thomas Piketty’s non – Economic factors contributing to Economic development
(or)
Explain
1) casino capitalism
2) Patrimonial capitalism
Answer:

  1. Casino capitalism: If people spend a larger proportion of their income and time on the proportion of their income and time on entertainment liquor and other illegal activities, productive activities may Suffer.
  2. Patrimonial capitalism: If the assets are simply passed on to children from their parents, the children would not work hard, because the children do not know the value of the assets Hence productivity will below.
    These two ideas were contributed by Thomas Piketty.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 4.
What is Crony capitalism?
Answer:
Social Organization:

  1. People show interest in the development activity only when they feel that the fruits of development will be fairly distributed.
  2. Mass participation in development programs is a pre-condition for accelerating the development process.
  3. Whenever the defective social organization allows some groups to appropriate the benefits of growth.
  4. The majority of the poor people do not participate in the process of development.
  5. This is called crony capitalism.

Question 5.
Explain the concepts of NITI Aayog.
Answer:
Initiatives like the Atal Innovation mission, the Ayushmaan Bharat approach towards water conservation measures, and the draft bill to establish the National Medical Commission to replace the medical council of India have all been conceptualized in NITI Aayog.

Question 6.
Explain the price mechanism?
Answer:

  1. Price mechanism provides for the automatic adjustment among price, demand, and supply in a Laissez-Faire economy.
  2. The producers and consumers adjust their supply and demand based on price changes.
  3. There is no such mechanism in a planned economy.
  4. Advance calculations in a precise manner are impossible to make decisions regarding consumption and production.
  5. It is also very difficult to put the calculations into practice under planning.
  6. Excess supply and excess demand can also happen in the market-oriented economy.
  7. In fact, it has happened in many capitalistic economies, including the US.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 7.
Explain the supply side of the vicious circle of poverty.
Answer:
On the supply side, the low level of real income means low savings. The low level of savings leads to low investment and to deficiency of capital. The deficiency of capital leads to a low level of productivity and back to low income. Thus the vicious circle is complete from the supply side.

XII. Answer the following questions

Question 1.
Explain the Economic planning in India?
Answer:
Economic Planning in India:

  • Consists of economic decisions, schemes formed to meet certain pre-determined economic objectives, and a road map of directions to achieve specific goals within a specific period of time.
  • The idea of economic planning was strengthened during the Great Depression in the 1930s.
  • The outbreak of World War II also required adequate and suitable planning of economic resources for effective management after the effects of the post-war economy.
  • After Independence, in 1948, a declaration of industrial policy was announced.
  • The policy suggested the creation of a National Planning Commission and the elaboration of the policy of a mixed economic system.
  • On January 26, 1950, the Constitution came into force.
  • In logical order, the Planning Commission was created on March 15, 1950, and the plan era began on April 1, 1951, with the launch of the first five-year plan (1951-56). The evolution of planning in India.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 2.
Explain the arguments in favour of economic planning.
Answer:
The economic planning is justified on the following grounds.

1. To accelerate and strengthen market mechanism:
The market mechanism works imperfectly in underdeveloped countries because of ignorance and unfamiliarity with it. A large part of the economy comprises the non – monetized sector. The product, factor, money, and capital markets are not organized properly. Therefore the planned economy will be a better substitute for a free economy.

2. To remove unemployment
The need for planning in underdeveloped countries is further stressed by the necessity of removing widespread unemployment and disguised unemployment in such economies.

3. To achieve balanced development:
In the absence of sufficient enterprise and initiative, the planning authority is the only institution for planning the balanced development of the economy.

For rapid economic development:

  • The development of Agriculture and Industrial sectors.
  • The development of Infrastructure
  • The development of money and capital markets is necessary.

To remove poverty and inequalities:
Planning is the only path open to underdeveloped countries, for raising national and per capita income, reducing inequalities and poverty, and increasing employment opportunities.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Question 3.
Briefly explain Indicative and Imperative planning?
Answer:
Indicative Vs Imperative Planning:

  1. Indicative planning is peculiar to the mixed economies.
  2. It has been in practice in France since the Monnet Plan of 1947-50.
  3. In a mixed economy, the private sector and the public sector work together.
  4. Under this plan, the outline of the plan is prepared by the Government.
  5. Then it is discussed with the representatives of private management, trade unions, consumer groups, financial institutions, and other experts.
  6. The essential function of planning is the coordination of different economic units.
  7. The state provides all types of facilities to the private sector.
  8. The private sector is expected to fulfill the targets and priorities.
  9. The state does not force the private sector but just indicates the areas of operation and targets to be fulfilled.
  10. In short, the planning procedure is soft and flexible.
  11. Under imperative planning, the state is all-powerful in the preparation and implementation of the plan.
  12. Once a plan is drawn up, its implementation is a matter of enforcement.
  13. The USSR President Stalin used to say, ‘Our plans are our instructions’.
  14. There is complete control over the entire resources by the state.
  15. There is no consumer sovereignty.
  16. The Government policies and procedures are rigid.
  17. China and Russia follow imperative planning.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 11 Economics of Development and Planning

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Pdf Chapter 10 Environmental Economics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Solutions Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

12th Economics Guide Environmental Economics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

PART- A

Multiple Choice questions

Question 1.
The term environment has been derived from a French word ………………..
a) Environ
b) Environs
c) Environia
d) Envir
Answer:
c) Environia

Question 2.
The word biotic means environment
a) living
b) non – living
c) physical
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) living

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
Ecosystem is smallest unit of
a) Ionosphere
b) Lithosphere
c) Biosphere
d) Mesosphere
Answer:
c) Biosphere

Question 4.
Who developed Material Balance Models?
a) Thomas and Picardy
b) Alenkneese and R.V.Ayres
c) Joan Robinson and J.M.Keynes
d) Joseph Stiglitz and Edward Chamberlin
Answer:
d) Joseph Stiglitz and Edward Chamberlin

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 5.
Environmental goods are ……………
a) Market goods
b) Non – market goods
c) Both
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) Non – market goods

Question 6.
In a pure public good, consumption is ……………..
a) Rival
b) Non – rival
c) Both
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Rival

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 7.
One of the most important market failures is caused by …………………………..
a) Positive externalities
b) Negative externalities
c) Both
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) Negative externalities

Question 8.
The common source of outdoor air pollution is caused by combustion processes from the following ……………..
a) Heating and cooking
b) Traditional stoves
c) Motor vehicles
d) All the above
Answer:
b) Traditional stoves

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 9.
The major contributor of Carbon monoxide is
a) Automobiles
b) Industrial process
c) Stationary fuel combustion
d) None of the above
Answer:
a) Automobiles

Question 10.
Which one of the following causes of global warming?
a) Earth gravitation force
b) Oxygen
c) Centripetal force
d) Increasing temperature
Answer:
d) Increasing temperature

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 11.
Which of. the following is responsible for protecting humans from harmful ultraviólet rays? .
a) UV-A
b) UV-C .
c) Ozone layer
d) None of the above
Answer:
c) Ozone layer

Question 12.
Global warming also refers to as
a) Ecological change
b) Climate Change
c) Atmosphere changé
d) None of the above
Answer:
d) None of the above

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 13.
Which of the following is the anticipated effect of Global Warming?
a) Rising sea levels
b) Changing precipitation
c) Expansion of deserts
d) All of the above
Answer:
b) Changing precipitation

Question 14.
The process of nutrient enrichment is termed as
a) Eutrophication
b) Limiting nutrients
c) Enrichment
d) Schistosomoasis
Answer:
b) Limiting nutrients

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 15.
Primary cause of Soil pollution is ……………..
a) Pest control measures
b) Land reclamation
c) Agricultural run off
d) Chemical fertilizer
Answer:
d) Chemical fertilizer

Question 16.
Which of the following is main cause for deforestation?
a) Timber harvesting industry
b) Natural afforestation
c) Soil stabilization
d) Climate stabilization
Answer:
a) Timber harvesting industry

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 17.
Electronic waste is commonly referred as ……………….
a) Solid waste
b) Composite waste
c) e- waste
d) Hospital waste
Answer:
c) e- waste

Question 18.
Acid rain is one of the consequences of ………………………………… Air pollution
a) Water Pollution
b) Land pollution
c) Noise pollution
Answer:
a) Water Pollution

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 19.
Sustainable Development Goals and targets are to be achieved by …………………….
a) 2020
b) 2025
c) 2030
d) 2050
Answer:
c) 2030

Question 20.
Alkali soils are predominantly located in the ……………………… plains?
a) Indus-Ganga
b) North-Indian
c) Gangetic plains
d) All the above
Answer:
d) All the above

PART -B

Answer the following questions in one or two sentences.

Question 21.
State the meaning of environment.
Answer:

  1. The meaning of Environmental Economics is a different branch of economics that recognizes the value of both the environment and economic activity and makes choices based on those values.
  2. The goal is to balance the economic activity and the environmental impacts by taking into account all the costs and benefits.
  3. In short, Environmental Economics is an area of economics that studies the financial impact of environmental issues and policies.
  4. Environmental Economics involves theoretical and empirical studies of the economic effects of national or local environmental policies around the world.

Question 22.
What do you mean by ecosystem?
Answer:
The ecosystem is the interacting system of a biological community and its non living environmental surroundings.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 23.
Mention the countries where per capita carbon dioxide emission is the highest in the world.
Answer:

  • United States of America – (USA)
  • Europian Union – (EU)
  • Japan
  • Russian Federation
  • United Arab Emirates (UAE)
  • Saudi Arabia
  • China

Question 24.
What are environmental goods? Give examples.
Answer:
Environmental goods are typically non – market goods.
Eg: Rivers, Forests, Mountains

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 25.
What are the remedial measures to control noise pollution?
Answer:
Remedial measures to control Noise Pollution

  1. Use of noise barriers
  2. Newer roadway for surface transport
  3. Traffic control
  4. Regulating times for heavy vehicles
  5. Installations of noise barriers in the workplace
  6. Regulation of Loudspeakers

Question 26.
Define Global warming.
Answer:
Global warming is the increase in temperature of the Earth’s surface , due to greenhouse gases.

Question 27.
Specify the meaning of seed ball.
Answer:

  1. A seed ball (or seed bomb) is a seed that has been wrapped in soil materials, usually a mixture of clay and compost, and then dried.
  2. Essentially, the seed is ‘pre-planted’ and can be sown by depositing the seed ball anywhere suitable for the species, keeping the seed safely until the proper germination window arises.
  3. Seed balls are an easy and sustainable way to cultivate plants that provide a larger window of time when the sowing can occur.

PART -C

Answer the following questions in one paragraph

Question 28.
Brief the linkage between economy and environment.
Answer:

  • Man’s life is interconnected with various other living and non-living things. The life also depends on social, political, ethical, philosophical and other aspects of the economic system.
  • In fact, the life of human beings is shaped by his living environment. The relationship between the economy and the environment is explained in the form of a ‘Material Balance Model’.

Question 29.
Specify the meaning of material balance principle.
Answer:

  • The Material Balance Model was developed by Alenkneese and R.V.Ayres. It explains the relationship between the economy and the environment. The model considers the total economic process as a physically balanced flow between inputs and outputs.
  • The first law of thermodynamics emphasizes that in any production system ” what goes in must come out” and this is known as the Material Balance Approach.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 30.
Explain different types of air pollution.
Answer:
Types of Air pollution:
1. Indoor Air Pollution:
It refers to toxic contaminants that we encounter in our daily lives in our homes, schools and workplaces. For example, cooking and heating with solid fuels on open fires or traditional stoves results in high levels of indoor air pollution.

2. Outdoor Air Pollution:
It refers to ambient air. The common sources of outdoor air pollution are caused by combustion processes from motor vehicles, solid fuel burning and industry.

Question 31.
What are the causes of water pollution?
Answer:
Water pollution is caused due to several reasons. Few are:

  1. Discharge of sewage and wastewater.
  2. Dumping of solid wastes.
  3. Discharge of industrial wastes.
  4. Oil spill
  5. Acid rain
  6. Global warming
  7. Eutrophication.

Question 32.
State the meaning of e-waste.
Answer:
1. Electronic waste which is commonly referred as “e-waste” is the new byproduct of the Info-Tech society.

2. It is a physical waste in the form of old discarded, end of life electronics.

3. It includes a broad and growing range of electronic devices from large household appliances such as refrigerators, air conditioners, cellular phones, computers and other electronic goods”.

4. Similarly, e-waste can be defined as the result when consumer, business and household devices are disposed or sent for re-cycling (example, television, computers, audio-equipments, VCR, DVD, telephone, Fax, Xerox machines, wireless devices, video games, other households electronic equipment).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 33.
What is land pollution? Mention the causes of land pollution.
Answer:
Land pollution is defined as,” the degradation of land because of the disposal of waste on the land” Any substance that is discharged, emitted or deposited in the environment in such a way that it alters the environment causes land pollution.

Causes:

  • Deforestation and Soil erosion
  • Agricultural Activities
  • Mining Activities
  • Land fills
  • Industrialization
  • Construction activities
  • Nuclear waste.

Question 34.
Write a note on a) Climate change and b) Acid rain Climate Change:
Answer:
(a) Climate Change:
1. climate change refers to seasonal changes over a long period with respect to the growing accumulation of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere.

2. Recent studies have shown that human activities since the beginning of the industrial revolution, have contributed to an increase in the concentration of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere by as much as 40%, from about 280 parts per million in the pre-industrial period, to 402 parts per million in 2016, which in turn has led to global warming.

3. Several parts of the world have already experienced the warming of coastal waters, high temperatures, a marked change in rainfall patterns, and increased intensity and frequency of storms. Sea levels and temperatures are expected to be rising.

(b) Acid Rain:

  1. Acid rain is one of the consequences of air pollution.
  2. It occurs when emissions from factories, cars or heating boilers contact with the water in the atmosphere.
  3. These emissions contain nitrogen oxides, sulphur dioxide and sulphur trioxide which when mixed with water become sulfurous acid, nitric acid and sulfuric acid.
  4. This process also occurs by nature through volcanic eruptions.
  5. It can have harmful effects on plants, aquatic animals and infrastructure.

PART -D

Answer the following questions in about a page.

Question 35.
Briefly explain the relationship between GDP growth and the quality of environment.
Answer:

  • Environmental quality is a set of properties and characteristics of the environment either generalized or local, as they impinge on human beings and other organism.
  • Environmental quality has been continuously declining due to capitalistic mode of functioning.
  • Environment is a pure public good that can be consumed simultaneously by everyone and from which no one can be excluded.
  • Pure public goods pose a free rider problem. As a result, resources are depleted.
  • The contribution of the nature to GDP as well as depletion of natural resources are not accounted in the present system of National Income Enumeration.
  • In Environmental Economics one of the most important market failures is caused by negative externalities arising from production and consumption of goods and services.
  • Externality may be defined as ” the cost or benefit imposed by the consumption and production activities of the individuals in these activity and towards which no payment is made.
  • Beneficial externalities are called “Positive externalities” and adverse ones are called ” negative externalities”.
  • As these externalities occur outside of the market ie) they affect people not directly involved in the production and consumption of a good or service.
  • These externalities both positive and negative are not included in GDP. If proper calculation is made including positive and negative externalities the correlation between GDP growth and environmental quality can be assessed.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 36.
Explain the concepts of externality and its classification Externality:
Answer:
Externalities refer to external effects or spillover effects resulting from the act of production or consumption on the third parties. Externalities arise due to interdependence between economic units.

Positive Consumption Externality:
When some residents of a locality hire a private security agency to patrol their area, the other residents of the area also benefit from better security without bearing cost.

Negative Consumption Externality:
A person smoking cigarette gets may gives satisfaction to that person, but this act causes hardship (dissatisfaction) to the non – smokers who are driven to passive smoking.

Positive Production Externality:

  1. The ideal location for beehives is orchards (first growing fields).
  2. While bees make honey, they also help in the pollination of apple blossoms.
  3. The benefits accrue to both producers (honey as well as apple). This is called reciprocal untraded interdependency.
  4. Suppose training is given for the workers in a company. If those trained workers leave the. company to join some other company, the later company gets the benefit of skilled workers without incurring the cost of training.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 37.
Explain the importance of sustainable development and its goals.
Answer:
Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs):
1. It is crucial to harmonize three core elements such as economic growth, social inclusion, and environmental protection.

2. A set of 17 goals for the World’s future can be achieved before 2030 with three unanimous principles fixed by United Nations such as Universality, Integration, and Transformation.

  1. End Poverty in all its forms everywhere
  2. End hunger, achieve food security and improved nutrition and promote sustainable agriculture
  3. Ensure healthy lives and promote well-being for all at all ages
  4. Ensure inclusive and quality education for all and promote lifelong learning
  5. Achieve gender equality and empower women and girls
  6. Ensure access to water and sanitation for all
  7. Ensure access to affordable, reliable, sustainable, and modem energy for all.
  8. Promote inclusive and sustainable economic growth, employment, and decent work for all.
  9. Build resilient infrastructure, promote sustainable industrialization, and foster innovation.
  10. Reduce inequality within and among countries
  11. Make cities inclusive, safe, resilient, and sustainable
  12. Ensure sustainable consumption and production pattern
  13. Take urgent action to combat climate change and its impacts
  14. Conserve and sustainably use the oceans, seas, and marine resources
  15. Sustainably manage forests, combat desertification, halt and reverse land degradation, halt biodiversity loss
  16. Promote just, peaceful and inclusive societies
  17. Revitalize the global partnership for sustainable development.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

12th Economics Guide Environmental Economics Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best Answer

Question 1.
“All the conditions, circumstances, and influences surrounding and affecting the development of an organism or group of organisms” is called ………………………..
(a) Environment
(b) Economics
(c) Eco system
(d) Biosphere
Answer:
(a) Environment

Question 2.
………………… refers to external effects resulting from the act of production or consumption on the third parties.
a) Externalities
b) Ecosystem
c) Pollution
d) Environmental quality
Answer:
a) Externalities

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
…………………….. Economics involves theoretical and empirical studies of the economic effects.
(a) Biosphere
(b) Political
(c) Environment
(d) Philosophical
Answer:
(c) Environment

Question 4.
……………………… is the introduction of contaminants into the natural environment.
a) Externalities
b) Pollution
c) Ecosystem
d) Spillover effects
Answer:
b) Pollution

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 5.
…………………………. is the current increase in temperature of the Earth’s surface as well as its atmosphere. .
a) Global warming
b) Climate change
c) Pollution
d) None of the above
Answer :
a) Global warming

Question 6.
Vehicles smoke happens to release high amounts of ……………………..
(a) Carbon – di – oxide
(b) Carbon – monoxide
(c) Carbon
(d) Oxygen
Answer:
(b) Carbon – monoxide

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 7.
Negative Production externalities are caused by ………………………….
a) Industries
b) Agriculture
c) Transport
d) Computer
Answer:
a) Industries

Question 8.
……………………. is unwanted or excessive sound that can have deleterious effects on human health and environmental quality.
a) Sound pollution
b) Water pollution
c) Noise pollution
d) Land pollution
Answer:
a) Sound pollution

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 9.
…………………….. is unwanted or excessive sound that can have deleterious effects on human health and environmental quality.
(a) Air pollution
(b) Water pollution
(c) Noise pollution
(d) Land pollution
Answer:
(c) Noise pollution

Question 10.
………………………… is a system of agricultural production which avoids the use of synthetic fertilizer, pesticides, and livestock additives.
a) Organic farming
b) Green Revolution
c) Sustainable Development
d) Green Initiatives
Answer:
a) Organic Farming

Question 11.
…………………….. is an increased level of nutrients in water bodies.
(a) Eutrophication
(b) Global warming
(c) Acid rain
(d) Oil spill
Answer:
(a) Eutrophication

Question 12.
…………………….. is the supplier of all forms of resources like renewable and non – renewable.
(a) Environment
(b) Environmental goods
(c) Environmental quality
(d) Environmental wastes
Answer:
(a) Environment

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

III Choose the correct pair:

Question 1.
a) Environmental Goods – Industries
b)Environmental Quality – Properties and characteristics of the Environment
c) The Air Prevention and Control of Pollution Act – 1985
d) Acid Rain – Sound pollution
Answer:
b) Environmental Quality – Properties and characteristics of the Environment

Question 2.
a) Concentration of carbon dioxide in the pre-industrial – 380 ppm
b) Concentration Co2 in 2016 – 400ppm
c) Externalities – spillover effects
d) Organic farming – Chemical Fertilizers
Answer:
c) Externalities – spillover effects

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains
b) E – wastes – Environmental wastes
c) Ozone Layer – Infrared rays
d) Non – conventional – Petrol
Answer:
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains

IV.Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) Environmental goods – Mountains, Rivers
b) Ecosystem – the foundation of the Biosphere
c) Spillover effects – Externalities
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives
Answer:
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives

Question 2.
a) Non – conventional fuels – Biogas, CNG, LPG
b) Eutrophication – the bloom of algae in the water
c) Indoor air pollution – cooking with solid fuels on open fires

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

II. Match the following:
Question 1.
A) Environia – 1) R. V Ayres
B) Material Balance Approach – 2) To surround
C) Non – conventional fuel – 3) Electronic wastes
D) E – waste – 4) Biogas
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics 1
Answer:
c) 2 1 4 3

Question 2.
a) Acid Rain – 1) Sound pollution
b) Eutrophication – 2) Water pollution
c) Oil spills – 3) Air pollution
d) Hearing loss – 4) Depletion of oxygen on water

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics 2
Answer:
c) 4 3 2 1

Question 3.
a) Production sector – 1) F = W2
b) House hold sector – 2) R = W1+ W2
c) Input = Output – 3) Final product
d) F – 4) R = F + W1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics 3
answer:
b) 4 1 2 3

III. Choose the correct pair:

Question 1.
a) Environmental Goods – Industries
b) Environmental Quality – Properties and characteristics of the Environment
c) The Air Prevention and Control of Pollution Act – 1985
d) Acid Rain – Sound pollution
Answer:
b) Environmental Quality – Properties and characteristics of the Environment.

Question 2.
a) Concentration of carbon dioxide in the pre-industrial – 380 ppm
b) Concentration CO2 in 2016 – 400ppm
c) Externalities – spillover effects
d) Organic farming – Chemical Fertilizers
Answer:
c) Externalities – spillover effects

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains
b) E – wastes – Environmental wastes
c) Ozone Layer – Infrared rays
d) Non – conventional – Petrol
Answer:
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains

IV.Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) Environmental goods – Mountains, Rivers
b) Ecosystem – the foundation of the Biosphere
c) Spillover effects – Externalities
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives
Answer:
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives

Question 2.
a) Concentration of carbon dioxide in the pre-industrial – 38Oppm
b) Concentration CO2 in 2016 – 400ppm
c) Externalities – spillover effects
d) Organic farming – Chemical Fertilizers
Answer:
c) Externalities – spillover effects

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains
b) E – wastes – Environmental wastes
c) Ozone Layer – Infrared rays
d) Non – conventional – Petrol
Answer:
Answer:
a) Alkali soils – Indo – Gangetic plains


IV.Choose the incorrect pair:

Question 1.
a) Environmental goods – Mountains, Rivers
b) Ecosystem – the foundation of the Biosphere
c) Spillover effects – Externalities
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives.
Answer:
d) Negative Production Externality – beehives.

Question 2.
a) Non – conventiõnal fuels – Biogas, CNG, LPG
b) Eutrophication – the bloom of algae in the water
c) Indoor air pollution – cooking with solid fuels on open fires
d) Industrial wastes – Noise pollution.
Answer:
d) Industrial wastes – Noise pollution

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Oil spills – Seawater gets polluted
b) Trees – CO2 emission
c) Sustainable Development – economic growth, social inclusion, and environmental protection.
d) Organic farming – crop rotation
Answer:
b) Trees – CO2 emission


V. Choose the correct Statement:

Question 1.
a) Average temperatures around the world have risen by 1°c over the last 100 years.
b) Global warming reduces the level of greenhouse gases.
c) Vehicles smoke happens to release high amounts of carbon monoxide.
d) Trees absorb oxygen from the air and release carbon dioxide.
Answer:
c) Vehicles smoke happens to release high amounts of carbon monoxide.

Question 2.
a) Water pollution increases the oxygen level in the water
b) Pollution is the introduction of contaminants into the natural environment.
c) Beneficial externalities are called “positive externalities”.
d) Environment is a private good.
Answer:
b) Pollution is the introduction of contaminants into the natural environment.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Environmental goods are typically non – market goods.
b) Positive production externalities include pollution generated by a factory that ’ imposes costs on others.
c) The term environment has been derived from the Greek word “Environia” which means to surround.
d) The relationship between the economy and pollution is explained in the form of a “Material Balance Models”.
Answer:
a) Environmental goods are typically non-market goods.

VI. Choose the incorrect statement

Question 1.
a) Acid rain is one of the consequences of Air pollution.
b) Sustainable Development includes economic growth, social inclusion, and environmental protection.
c) Trees release oxygen and pollutes the air.
d) Chronic exposure to noise may cause noise-induced hearing loss.
Answer:
c) Trees release oxygen and pollutes the air

Question 2.
a) Increasing temperature in the atmosphere leads to global warming.
b) Ozone layer is responsible for protecting humans from harmful ultraviolet rays.
c) Earth’s ozone layer is depleting due to the presence of chlorofluorocarbons and hydrochlorofluorocarbons in the atmosphere.
d) Atmospheric pollution increases the level of ozone.
Answer:
d) Atmospheric pollution increases the level of ozone.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
a) Surface water includes natural water found on the earth’s surface, like rivers, lakes, lagoons, and oceans.
b) Eutrophication is an increased level of oxygen in water bodies.
c) CO2 is the most important of the greenhouse gases contributing to 50% of global warming.
d) ‘Problem soils’ exist mainly in arid and semi-arid regions.
Answer:
b) Eutrophication is an increased level of oxygen in water bodies.

VII. Pick the odd one out:

Question 1.
a) Sea pollution
b) Air pollution
c) Land pollution
d) Water pollution
Answer:
a) Sea pollution

Question 2.
a) BlOGAS
b) Petrol
c) CNG
d) LPG
Answer:
b) Petrol

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

VIII. Analyze the Reason:

Question 1.
Assertion (A): “E-waste ” is the new by-product of the Info-Tech society.
Reason (R): E-waste can be generated as the result when consumer, business, and household devices are disposed or sent for recycling.
Answer:
a) Assertion (A) and (R) both are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Solid waste is basically the discharge of useless and unwarranted materials as a result of human activity.
Reason (R): Solid waste consists of the discards of households, hospital refuse, dead animals, debris from a construction site, etc.,
Answer:
b) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
Assertion (A): Global warming is the current increase in temperature of the Earth’s surface as well as its atmosphere.
Reason (R): The increase in the number of greenhouse gases warms the earth’s surface.
Options:
a) Assertion (A) and (R) both are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).
b) Assertion (A) and Reason (R) both are true, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A).
c) (A) is true but (R) is false.
d)Both (A) and (R) are false.
Answer:
a) Assertion (A) and (R) both are true, and (R) is the correct explanation of (A).

IX. 2 Marks Questions

Question 1.
Define “Solid wastes”?
Answer:
Solid Wastes:

  1. Non-liquid, non-soluble materials, ranging from municipal garbage to industrial wastes that contain complex, and hazardous, substances.
  2. Solid wastes include sewage sludge, agricultural refuse, demolition wastes, and mining residues.

Question 2.
Draw the flow diagram for Material Balance Approach.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics 4

Question 3.
Define “Sustainable Development”?
Answer:

  1. Sustainable Development is a development that meets the needs of the present generation without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs.
  2. “The alternative approach (to sustainable development) is to focus on natural capital assets and suggest that they should not decline through time.”

Question 4.
What is pollution?
Answer:
Pollution is the introduction of contaminants into the natural environment that causes an adverse change in the form of life, toxicity, of environmental damage to the ecosystem and aesthetics of our surroundings.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 5.
Define “Deforestation”?
Answer:

  1. Humans depend on trees for many things including life.
  2. Trees absorb carbon dioxide from the air and release Oxygen, which is needed for life.
  3. Forest helps replenish soils and helps retain nutrients being washed away.
  4. Deforestation is led to land pollution.

Question 6.
What are the causes of Air pollution?
Answer:

  • Vehicle exhaust smoke
  • Fossil fuel-based power plants
  • Exhaust from industrial plants and factories
  • Construction and Agricultural Activities
  • Natural causes
  • Household activities.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 7.
What are the effects of Air pollution?
Answer:

  • Respiratory and heart problems
  • Acid rain
  • Eutrophication
  • Effect on wildlife
  • Depletion of the ozone layer
  • Human Health
  •  Global warming

Question 8.
What are the remedial measures to control Air pollution?
Answer:

  • Establishment of industries away from the towns and cities.
  • Increasing the length of the chimneys in Industries.
  • Growing more plants and trees.
  • Use of non – conventional fuels like Biogas, CNG, and LPG.
  • Use of Mass Transit system.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 9.
What are the types of water pollution?
Answer:

  1. Surface water pollution
  2. Groundwater pollution
  3. Microbiological pollution.
  4. Oxygen depletion pollution

Question 10.
What are the remedial measures to control water pollution?
Answer:

  • Comprehensive water management plan.
  • Construction of proper storm drains and settling ponds.
  • Maintenance of drain life.
  • Effluent and sewage treatment plant.
  • Regular monitoring of water and wastewater.
  • Stringent actions towards illegal dumping of waste into the water bodies.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 11.
Define Noise Pollution.
Answer:
Noise pollution is unwanted or excessive sound that can have deleterious effects on human health and environmental quality. Noise pollution is commonly generated by many factories. It also comes from the highway, railway, and airplane traffic and from outdoor construction activity.

Question 12.
Name the types of Noise Pollution.
Answer:

  1. Atmospheric Noise
  2. Industrial Noise
  3. Man-made Noise

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 13.
What are the causes of Noise Pollution?
Answer:

  • Poor urban planning
  • Sounds from motor vehicles
  • Crackers
  • Factory machinery

Question 14.
What are the effects of Noise Pollution?
Answer:

  • Hearing Loss
  • Damage physiological and psychological health.
  • Cardiovascular effects.
  • Detrimental effect on animals and aquatic life.
  • Effects on wildlife and aquatic animals.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics
X. 3 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Explain the types of Noise pollution?
Answer:
Types of Noise Pollution:
(I) Atmospheric Noise:
Atmospheric noise or static is caused by lightning discharges in thunderstorms and other natural electrical disturbances occurring in the atmosphere.

(II) Industrial Noise:

  1. Industrial noise refers to noise that is created in factories.
  2. When sound becomes noise it becomes unwanted.
  3. Heavy industries like shipbuilding, iron, and steel have long been associated with Noise-Induced Hearing Loss (NIHL).

(III) Man-made Noise:
The main sources of man-made noise pollution are ships, aircraft, seismic exploration, marine construction, drilling, and motorboats.

Question 2.
State the Effect of Land Pollution.
Answer:

  • Soil pollution
  • Healthy Impact
  • Cause for Air pollution
  • Effect on wildlife.

Question 3.
State the remedial measures to control Land Pollution.
Answer:

  • Making people aware of the concept of a Reduce, Recycle, and Reuse.
  • Buying biodegradable products.
  • Minimizing the usage of pesticides
  • Shifting cultivation.
  • Disposing of unwanted garbage properly either by burning or by burying it under the soil.
  • Minimizing the usage of plastics.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 4.
Define sustainable development.
Answer:
“Sustainable development is a development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs” World commission of Environment and Development, 1987.

Question 5.
What is alkali soil?
The occurrence of accumulation of excess salt/ acid in the root zone results in a partial or complete loss of soil productivity and such soil is defined as ‘Problem (alkali, saline, acid) soils’.
This soil exists mainly in arid and semi-arid regions.

Question 6.
What is Acid – rain?
Answer:

  • Acid rain is one of the consequences of air pollution.
  • The emissions from factories, cars, or heating boilers contain nitrogen oxides, sulphur dioxide, and sulphur trioxide.
  • These oxides when mixed with rainwater become sulfurous acid, nitric acid, and sulfuric acid and come down to earth as acid rain.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 7.
What is organic farming?
Answer:

  • Organic farming is a system of agricultural production which relies on animal manure, organic waste, crop rotation, legumes, and biological pest control.
  • It avoids the use of synthetic fertilizer, pesticides, and livestock additives.
  • Organic inputs have certain benefits, such as enriching the soil for microbes.

XI. 5 Mark Questions

Question 1.
Name the sources of E-waste.
Answer:

Home

HospitalsGovernment

Private sectors (Restaurants
Industries)

1.PC1.PC1. PC1.PC
2. Television2. Monitors2. Fax machine2. Boilers
3. Radio3. ECG device3. Xerox machine3. Mixer
4. Cellphones4. Microscope4. Scanner4. Signal Generators.
5. Washing machine5. Incubator5. Fan5. Incubator
6. Microwave oven6. Tube lights
7. CD Player7. Air conditioners
8. Fan
9. Electronic Iron

Question 2.
Write a note on solid waste.
Answer:

  • Solid waste is basically the discharge of useless and unwarranted materials as a result of human activity.
  • Most commonly, they are composed of solids, semisolids, or liquids.
  • Solid wastes consist of the discards of households, hospital refuse, dead animals, debris from a construction site, ashes, agricultural wastes, and industrial wastes, etc.
  • When waste is not removed from the streets and public places in time it poses severe public – health and hygiene hazards.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Question 3.
Explain the causes of Air pollution?
Answer:
Causes of Air Pollution:
(I) Vehicle exhaust smoke:

  1. Vehicles smoke happens to release high amounts of Carbon monoxide.
  2. Millions of vehicles are operated every day in cities, each one leaving behind its own carbon footprint on the environment.

(II) Fossil fuel-based power plants:

  1. Fossil fuels also present a wider-scale problem when they are burned for energy in power plants.
  2. Chemicals like sulphur dioxide are released during the burning process, which travels straight into the atmosphere.
  3. These types of pollutants react with water molecules to yield something known as acid rain.

(III) Exhaust from Industrial Plants and Factories:
Heavy machinery located inside big factories and industrial plants also emits pollutants into the air.

(IV) Construction and Agricultural activities:

  1. Potential impacts arising from the construction debris would include dust particles and gaseous emissions from the construction sites.
  2. Likewise, using ammonia for agriculture is a frequent byproduct that happens to be one of the most dangerous gases affecting the air.

(V) Natural Causes:

  1. Earth is one of the biggest polluters itself, through volcanoes, forest fires, and dust storms.
  2. They are nature-borne events that dump massive amounts of air pollution into the atmosphere.

(VI) Household activities:
Household activities like cooking, heating, and lighting, use of various forms of mosquito repellents, pesticides and chemicals for cleaning at home, and use of artificial fragrances are some of the sources that contribute to air pollution.

Question 4.
What are the general principles of organic farming?
Answer:

  1. Protect the environment, minimize soil degradation and erosion, decrease pollution, optimize biological productivity and promote a sound state of health.
  2. Maintain long-term soil fertility by optimizing conditions for biological activity within the soil.
  3. Maintain biological diversity within the system.
  4. Recycle materials and resources to the greatest extent possible within the enterprise.
  5. Provide attentive care that promotes health and meets the behavioural needs of livestock.
  6. Prepare organic products, emphasizing careful processing and handling methods in order to maintain the organic integrity and vital qualities of the products at all stages of production.
  7. Rely on Renewable resources in the locally organized agricultural system.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Economics Guide Chapter 10 Environmental Economics

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

12th Computer Applications Guide Electronic Data Interchange – EDI Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
EDI stands for
a) Electronic Details Information
b) Electronic Data Information
c) Electronic Data Interchange
d) Electronic Details Interchange
Answer:
a) Electronic Details Information

Question 2.
Which of the following is an internationally recognized standard format for trade, transportation, insurance, banking and customs?
a) TSLFACT
b) SETFACT
c) FTPFACT
d) EDIFACT
Answer:
d) EDIFACT

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
Which is the first industry-specific EDI standard?
a) TDCC
b) VISA
c) Master
d) ANSI
Answer:
a) TDCC

Question 4.
UNSM stands for
a) Universal Natural Standard Message
b) Universal Notations for Simple Message
c) United Nations Standard Message
d) United Nations Service Message
Answer:
c) United Nations Standard Message

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 5.
Which of the following is a type of EDI?
a) Direct EDI
b) Indirect EDI
c) Collective EDI
d) Unique EDI
Answer:
a) Direct EDI

Question 6.
Who is called the father of EDI?
a) Charles Babbage
b) Ed Guilbert
c) Pascal
d) None of the above
Answer:
b) Ed Guilbert

Question 7.
EDI interchanges start with ……………. and end with ……………
a) UNA, UNZ
b) UNB, UNZ
c) UNA, UNT
d) UNB, UNT
Answer:
b) UNB, UNZ

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 8.
EDIFACT stands for
a) EDI for Admissible Commercial Transport
b) EDI for Advisory Committee and transport
c) EDI for Administration, Commerce, and Transport
d) EDI for Admissible Commerce and Trade
Answer:
c) EDI for Administration, Commerce, and Transport

Question 9.
The versions of EDIFACT are also called as
a) Message types
b) Subsets
c) Directories
d) Folders
Answer:
c) Directories

Question 10.
Number of characters in a single EDIFACT messages
a) 5
b) 6
c) 4
d) 3
Answer:
b) 6

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define EDI.
Answer:
The Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) is the exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically. It is transferred through a dedicated channel or – through the Internet in a predefined format without much human intervention.

Question 2.
List few types of business documents that are transmitted through EDI.
Answer:

  1. Delivery notes
  2. Invoices
  3. Purchase orders
  4. Advance ship notice
  5. Functional acknowledgments etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
What are the 4 major components of EDI?
Answer:
There are four major components of EDI. They are:

  1. Standard document format
  2. Translator and Mapper
  3. Communication software
  4. Communication network

Question 4.
What is meant by directories inEDIFACT?
Answer:

  • The versions of EDIFACT are also called as directories.
  • These EDIFACT directories will he revised twice a year.

Question 5.
Write a note on EDIFACT subsets.
Answer:
Due to the complexity, branch-specific subsets of EDIFACT have developed. These subsets of EDIFACT include only the functions relevant to specific user groups.
Example:

  • CEFIC – Chemical industry
  • EDIFURN – furniture industry
  • EDIGAS – gas business

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write a short note on EDI.

  • The Electronic Data Interchange (EDI)is the exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically,
  • It is transferred through a dedicated channel or through the Internet in a predefined format without much human intervention,
  • It is used to transfer documents such as delivery notes, invoices, purchase orders, advance ship notices, functional acknowledgments, etc.

Question 2.
List the various layers of EDI.
Answer:
Electronic data interchange architecture specifies four different layers namely

  1. Semantic layer
  2. Standa, us translation layer
  3. Transport layer
  4. Physical layer

These EDI layers describe how data flows from one computer to another.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
Write a note on UN/EDIFACT.
Answer:

  • United Nations / Electronic Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce, and Transport
  • (UN / EDIFACT) is an international EDI – a standard developed under the supervision of the United Nations.
  • In 1987, the UN / EDIFACT syntax rules were approved as ISO: IS09735 standard by the International Organization for Standardization.
  • EDIFACT includes a set of internationally agreed standards, catalogs, and guidelines for the electronic exchange of structured data between independent computer systems.

Question 4.
Write a note on the EDIFACT message.
Answer:

  • The basic standardization concept of EDIFACT is that there are uniform message types called United Nations Standard Message (UNSM).
  • In so-called subsets, the message types can be specified deeper in their characteristics depending on the sector.
  • The message types, all of which always have exactly one nickname consisting of six uppercase English alphabets.
  • The message begins with UNH and ends with UNT.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 5.
Write about EDIFACT separators
Answer:
EDIFACT has the following punctuation marks that are used as standard separators.
Character Uses

Character

Uses

Apostrophe (‘)segment terminator
Plus sign (+)segment tag and data element separator
Colon (;)component data element separator
Question mark (?)Release character
Period (.)decimal point

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Briefly explain various types of EDI.
Answer:
The types of EDI were constructed based on how EDI communication connections and the conversion were organized. Thus based on the medium used for transmitting EDI documents the following are the major EDI types.

  1. Direct EDI
  2. EDI via VAN
  3. EDI via-FTP/VPN, SFTP, FTPS
  4. Web EDI
  5. Mobile EDI
  6. Direct EDI/Point-to-Point

It is also called as Point-to-Point EDI. It establishes a direct connection between various business stakeholders and partners individually. This type of EDI suits to larger businesses with a lot of day to day business transactions.

EDI via VAN:
EDI via VAN (Value Added Network) is where EDI documents are transferred with the support of third-party network service providers. Many businesses prefer this network model to protect them from the updating ongoing complexities of network technologies.

EDI via FTP/VPN, SFTP, FTPS:
When protocols like FTP/VPN, SFTP, and FTPS are used for the exchange of EDI-based documents through the Internet or Intranet it is called EDI via FTP/VPN, SFTP, FTPS.

Web EDI:
Web-based EDI conducts EDI using a web browser via the Internet. Here the businesses are allowed to use any browser to transfer data to their business partners. Web-based EDI is easy and convenient for small and medium organizations.

Mobile EDI:
When smartphones or other such handheld devices are used to transfer EDI documents it is called mobile EDI. Mobile EDI applications considerably increase the speed of EDI transactions.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 2.
What are the advantages of EDI?
Answer:

  • EDI was developed to solve the problems inherent in paper-based transaction processing and in other forms of electronic communication.
  • Implementing an EDI system offers a company greater control over its supply chain and allow it to trade more effectively. It also increases productivity and promotes operational efficiency.

The following are the other advantages of EDI.

  • Improving service to end-users
  • Increasing productivity
  • Minimizing errors
  • Slashing response times
  • Automation of operations
  • Cutting costs
  • Integrating all business and trading partners

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
Write about the structure of EDIFACT.
Answer:

  • EDIFACT is a hierarchical structure where the top level is referred to as an interchange, and lower levels contain multiple messages.
  • The messages consist of segments, which in turn consist of composites.
  • The final iteration is a data element.

Segment Tables

  • The segment table lists the message tags.
  • It contains the tags, tag names, requirements designator, and repetition field.
  • The requirement designator may be mandatory (M) or conditional (C).
  • The (M) denotes that the segment must appear at least once. The (C) denotes that the segment may be used if needed.
  • Example: CIO indicates repetitions of a segment or group between 0 and 10.

EDI Interchange

  • Interchange is also called an envelope.
  • The top-level of the EDIFACT structure is Interchange.
  • An interchange may contain multiple messages. It starts with UNB and ends with UNZ

EDIFACT message

  • The basic standardization concept of EDIFACT is that there are uniform message types called United Nations Standard Message (UNSM).
  • In so-called subsets, the message types can be specified deeper in their characteristics depending on the sector.
  • The message types, all of which always have exactly one nickname consisting of six uppercase English alphabets.
  • The message begins with UNH and ends with UNT

Service messages

  • To confirm/reject a message, CONTRL and APERAK messages are sent.
  • CONTRL- Syntax Check and Confirmation of Arrival of Message
  • APERAK – Technical error messages and acknowledgment

Data exchange

  • CREMUL – multiple credit advice
  • DELFOR- Delivery forecast
  • IFTMBC – Booking confirmation

EDIFACT Segment

  • It is the subset of messages.
  • A segment is a three-character alphanumeric code.
  • These segments are listed in segment tables.
  • Segments may contain one, or several related user data elements.

EDIFACT Elements

  • The elements are the piece of actual data.
  • These data elements may be either simple or composite.

EDI Separators
EDIFACT has the following punctuation marks that are used as standard separators.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

12th Computer Applications Guide Electronic Data Interchange – EDI Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
……………………. is the exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically.
(a) EDI
(b) UDI
(c) FDI
(d) DDI
Answer:
(a) EDI

Question 2.
First EDI standards were released by ………..
a) EDI
b) EFT
c) EDIA
d) TDCC
Answer:
d) TDCC

Question 3.
……………………. is a paperless trade.
(a) EDI
(b) XML
(c) EDIF
(d) EFT
Answer:
(a) EDI

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 4.
………… establishes a direct connection between various business stakeholders
and partners individually.
a) Direct EDI
b) EDI via VAN
c) Web EDI
d) Mobile EDI
Answer:
a) Direct EDI

Question 5.
Electronic data interchange architecture specifies ……………. different layers.
a) two
b) three
c) four
d) five
Answer:
c) four

Question 6.
TDCC was formed in the year …………………….
(a) 1964
(b) 1966
(c) 1968
(d) 1970
Answer:
(c) 1968

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 7.
In ……………… UN created the EDIFACT to assist with the global reach of technology in E-Commerce.
a)1985
b)1978
c)1974
d)1975
Answer:
a)1985

Question 8.
Expand EDIA
(a) Electronic Data Interchange Authority
(b) Electronic Data Information Association
(c) Electronic Data Interchange Association
(d) Electronic Device Interface Amplifier
Answer:
(c) Electronic Data Interchange Association

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 9.
Which of the following is for the exchange of EDI-based documents through the Internet?
a) FTP/VPN
b) SFTP
c) FTPS
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 10.
EDIA has become …………………….. committee.
(a) ANSIXI2
(b) ANSIXI3
(c) ANSIXI4
(d) ANSIX15
Answer:
(a) ANSIXI2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Fill In The Blanks:

1. ……….. was developed to solve the problems inherent in paper-based transaction processing.
Answer:
EDT

2. ………….. is also called as Point-to-Point EDI.
Answer:
Direct EDT

3. Interchange is also called…………..
Answer:
Envelope

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

4. EDT is ……………… Trade.
Answer:
Paperless

5. EFT is …………….. Payment
Answer:
Paperless

6. ………… is “the computer-to-computer interchange of strictly formatted messages.
Answer:
EDI

7. …………….. EDI is easy and convenient for small and medium organizations.
Answer:
Web-based

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

8. The …………. is the most critical part of the entire EDI.
Answer:
standard

Abbreviations

  1. EDI – Electronic Data Interchange
  2. EFT – Electronic Transfer
  3. TDCC – Transportation Data Coordinating Committee
  4. EDIA – Electronic Data Interchange Association
  5. ANSI – American National Standards Institute
  6. VAN – Value Added Network
  7. ANSI ASC – American National Standards Institute Accredited Standard Committee
  8. GTDI – Guideline for Trade Data Interchange
  9. UN/ECE/ – United -Nations Economic Commission for Europe
  10. UN/EDIFACT -United Nations / Electronic Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce, and Transport
  11. UNSM -United Nations Standard Message

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Assertion And Reason
Question 1.
Assertion (A): According to the National Institute of Standards and Technology, EDI is the computer-to-computer interchange of strictly formatted messages that represent documents other than monetary instruments.
Reason(R): The Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) is the exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) ¡s the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion(A): EFT is “Paperless Trade”
Reason(R): The Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) is the exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3,
Assertion (A): United Nations / Electronic Data Interchange for Administration, Commerce, and Transport (UN / EDIFACT) is an international EDI – a standard developed under the supervision of the United Nations.
Reason(R): In 1985, the UN / EDIFACT syntax rules were approved as ISO: IS09735 standard by the International Organization for Standardization.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 4.
Assertion (A): The segment table lists the message tags.
Reason(R): It contains the tags, tag names, requirements designator, and repatriation field.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 5.
Assertion (A): The top level of EDIFACT structure is Interchange.
Reason(R): Interchange is also called an envelope. An interchange may contain multiple messages. It starts with UNB and ends with UNZ
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Who is the father of EDI?
Answer:
Ed Guilbert is called the father of EDI

Question 2.
What is Paperless trade?
Answer:
The exchange of business documents between one trade partner and another electronically is called Paperless trade.

Question 3.
What is Paperless Payment?
Answer:
Transfer of money from one bank account to another, via computer-based systems, is known as Paperless payment

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 4.
What is another name of Direct EDI?
Answer:
Another name of Direct EDI is Point-to-Point EDI.

Question 5.
How many alphabets require for EDI messages?
Answer:
Every EDI message requires six uppercase English Alphabets

Match The Following:

1. EDI – Booking confirmation
2. EFT – Paperless Trade
3. EDIFACT – Envelope
4. Interchange – Delivery forecast
5. CEFIC – Directories
6. EDIFURN – Chemical industry
7. EDIGAS – Technical error
8. CONTRL – Multiple credit advice
9. APERAK – Furniture industry
10. CREMUL – Arrival of Message
11. DELFOR – Gas business
12. IFTMBC – Paperless Payment

Answers
1. Paperless Trade
2. Paperless Payment
3. Directories
4. Envelope
5. Chemical industry
6. Furniture industry
7. Gas business
8. Arrival of Message
9. Technical error
10. Multiple credit advice
11. Delivery forecast
12. Booking confirmation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Find The Odd One On The Following

1. (a) Deliver/ Notes
(b) Invoices
(c) Advance Ship Notice
(d) EDIFACT
Answer:
(d) EDIFACT

2. (a) EDIFACT
(b) XML
(c) CDMA
(d) ANSI ASCX12
Answer:
(c) CDMA

3. (a) Direct EDI
(b) InDirectEDI
(c) Web EDI
(d) Mobile EDI
Answer:
(b) InDirectEDI

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

4. (a) FTP/VPN
(b) HTTP
(c) SFTPP
(d) FTPS
Answer:
(b) HTTP

5. (a) Dial-Up Line
(b) I way
(c) point to point
(d) Internet
Answer:
(c) point to point

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

6. (a) Email
(b) MIME
(c) HTTP
(d) ANSI X12
Answer:
(d) ANSI X12

7. (a) Transport Layer
(b) Semantic Layer
(c) Application Layer
(d) physical Layer
Answer:
(c) Application Layer

8. (a) Standards
(b) Catalogs
(c) TDCC
(d) guidelines
Answer:
(c) TDCC

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

9. (a) CREMUL
(b) DELFOR
(c) APERAK
(d) IFTMBC
Answer:
(c) APERAK

10. (a) Segment Terminator
(b) : – component data
(c) ? – data element separator
(d). – decimal point
Answer:
(c) ? – data element separator

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Important Years To Remember:

1975First EDI standards were released by TDCC
1977Drafting and using an EDI project begin
1978TDCC is renamed as Electronic Data Interchange Association (EDIA)
1979ANSI ASC developed ANSI X12
1985UN created the EDIFACT
1986UN/EDIFACT is officially proposed
1987UN / EDIFACT syntax rules were approved

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
What is VAN?
Answer:
A value-added network is a company, that is based on its own network, offering EDI services to other businesses. A value-added network acts as an intermediary between trading partners. The principal operations of value-added networks are the allocation of access rights and providing high data security.

Question 2.
What are the types of EDI?
Answer:

  1. Direct EDI
  2. EDI via VAN
  3. EDI via FTP/VPN, SFTP, FTPS
  4. Web EDI
  5. Mobile EDI

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
Write a short note on the Segment Table?
Answer:
Segment Tables:
The segment table lists the message tags. It contains the tags, tag names, requirements designator, and repetitation field. The requirement designator may be mandatory (M) or conditional (C). The (M) denotes that the segment must appear atleast once. The (C) denotes that the segment may be used if needed.

Question 4.
Mention some International accepted EDI Standards.
Answer:

  • EDIFACT
  • XML
  • ANSI
  • ASC XI2,

Part C

Brief Answers

Question 1.
Write a short note on EDIFACT Structure.
Answer:

  • EDIFACT is a hierarchical structure where the top level is referred to as an interchange, and lower levels contain multiple messages.
  • The messages consist of segments, which in turn consist of composites.
  • The final iteration is a data element.

Question 2.
What is EDI interchange?
Answer:

  • The top-level of the EDIFACT structure is Interchange.
  • An interchange may contain multiple messages.
  • It starts with UNB and ends with UNZ

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 3.
What is the EDI segment?
Answer:

  • A segment is a three-character alphanumeric code.
  • These segments are listed in segment tables.
  • Segments may contain one, or several related user data elements.

Question 4.
Write a note on EDI Interchange?
Answer:
EDI Interchange:
Interchange is also called an envelope. The top-level of the EDIFACT structure is Interchange. An interchange may contain multiple messages. It starts with UNB and ends with UNZ.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Part D

Detailed Answers

Question 1.
Explain EDI standards?
Answer:
EDI Standards:

  • The standard is the most critical part of the entire EDI. Since EDI is the data transmission and information exchange in the form of an agreed message format, it is important to develop a unified EDI standard.
  • The EDI standard is mainly divided into the following aspects: basic standards, code-standards, message standards, document standards, management standards, application standards, communication standards, and security standards.
  • The first industry-specific EDI standard was the TDCC published by the Transportation Data Coordinating Committee in 1975.
  • Then other industries started developing unique standards based on their individual needs. E.g. WINS in the warehousing industry.
  • Since the application of EDI has become more mature, the target of trading operations is often not limited to a single industry.
  • In 1979, the American National Standards Institute Accredited Standard Committee (ANSI ASC) developed a wider range of EDI standards called ANSI XI2.
  • On the other hand, the European region has also developed an integrated EDI standard. Known as GTDI (Guideline for Trade Data Interchange).
  • ANSI X12 and GTDI have become the two regional EDI standards in North America and Europe respectively.
  • After the development of the two major regional EDI standards and a few years after the trial, the two standards began to integrate and conduct research and development of common EDI standards.
  • Subsequently, the United Nations Economic Commission for Europe (UN/ECE/WP.4) hosted the task of the development of international EDI standards. In 1986, UN/EDIFACT is officially proposed. The most widely used EDI message standards are the United Nations EDIFACT and the ANSI X12.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI

Question 2.
Draw the structure of the UN/EDIFACT message.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 18 Electronic Data Interchange – EDI 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Pdf Chapter 6 Optics Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Solutions

Chapter 6 Optics

12th Physics Guide Optics Text Book Back Questions and Answers

Part – I:

Textbook Evaluation:

I. Multiple Choice Questions:

Question 1.
The speed of light in an isotropic medium depends on,
a) its intensity
b) its wavelength
c) the nature of propagation
d) the motion of the source w.r.t medium
Answer:
b) its wavelength

Question 2.
A rod of length 10 cm lies along the principal axis of a concave mirror of focal length 10 cm in such a way that its end closer to the pole is 20 cm away from the mirror. The length of the image is,
a) 2.5 cm
b) 5 cm
c) 10 cm
d) 15 cm
Answer:
b) 5 cm
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 2

Question 3.
An object is placed in front of a convex mirror of focal length of f and the maximum and minimum distance of an object from the mirror such that the image formed is real and magnified.
a) 2f and c
b) c and ∞
c) f and O
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 4.
For light incident from the air onto a slab of refractive index 2. The maximum possible angle of refraction is,
(a) 30°
(b) 45°
(c) 60°
(d) 90°
Answer:
(a) 30°
Hint:
From Snell’s law, µ = \(\frac { sin i }{ sin r }\)
Now consider an angle of incident is 90°
\(\frac { sin 90° }{ 2 }\)
sin r = sin-1 (0.5)
r = 30°

Question 5.
If the velocity and wavelength of light in air is Va and λa, and that in water is Vw. and λw, then the refractive index of water is,
a) \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{W}}}{V_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
b) \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{a}}}{V_{\mathrm{w}}}\)
c) \(\frac{\lambda_{\mathrm{W}}}{\lambda_{\mathrm{a}}}\)
d) \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{a}} \lambda_{\mathrm{a}}}{V_{\mathrm{w}} \lambda_{\mathrm{W}}}\)
Answer:
b) \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{a}}}{V_{\mathrm{w}}}\)
Solution:
µ = \(\frac{V_{\mathrm{a}}}{V_{\mathrm{w}}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
Stars twinkle due to,
a) reflection
b) total internal reflection
c) refraction
d) polarisation
Answer:
c) refraction

Question 7.
When a biconvex lens of glass having a refractive index 1.47 is dipped in a liquid, it acts as a plane sheet of glass. This implies that the liquid must have a refractive index,
a) less than one
b) less than that of glass
c) greater than that of glass
d) equal to that of glass
Answer:
d) equal to that of glass
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 3

Question 8.
The radius of curvature of curved surface at a thin planoconvex lens is 10 cm and the refractive index is 1.5. If the plane surface is silvered, then the focal length will be
a) 5 cm
b) 10 cm
c) 15 cm
d) 20 cm
Answer:
b) 10 cm
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 4

Question 9.
An air bubble in a glass slab of refractive index 1.5 (near-normal incidence) is 5 cm deep when viewed from one surface and 3 cm deep when viewed from the opposite face. The thickness of the slab is,
(a) 8 cm
(b) 10 cm
(c) 12 cm
(d) 16 cm
Answer:
(c) 12 cm
Hint:
Let d1 = 5 cm and d2 = 3 cm ; n = 1.5
Actual width is the sum of real depth from 2 sides
Thickness of slab = d1n + d2 n
= (5 x 1.5) +(3 x 1.5)= 12 cm

Question 10.
A ray of light travelling in a transparent medium of refractive index n falls, on a surface separating the medium from air at an angle of incidents of 45°. The ray can undergo total internal reflection for the following n,
a) n = 1.25
b) n = 1.33
c) n = 1.4
d) n = 1.5
Answer:
d) n = 1.5
Solution:
For total internal reflection i > ic
sin i > sin ic
sin45° > \(\frac{1}{\mu}\)
µ > √2
µ > 1.414
µ = 1.50

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 11.
A plane glass is placed over a various coloured letters (violet, green, yellow, red) The letter which appears to be raised more is,
a) red
b) yellow
c) green
d) violet
Answer:
d) violet

Question 12.
Two-point white dots are 1 mm apart on a black paper. They are viewed by eye of pupil diameter 3 mm approximately. The maximum distance at which these dots can be resolved by the eye is, [take wavelength of light, λ = 500 nm]
a) 1 m
b) 5 m
c) 3 m
d) 6m
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 5

Question 13.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the slit separation is doubled. To maintain the same fringe spacing on the screen, the screen-to-slit distance D must be changed to,
(a) 2D
(b) \(\frac { D }{ 2 }\)
(c) √2D
(d) \(\frac { D }{ √2 }\)
Answer:
(a) 2D
Hint:
Young’s double -slite experiment is
β = \(\frac { λD }{ d}\) ; β’ = \(\frac { λD’ }{ d’}\) ; d’ = 2d
Same fringe space, β = β’
⇒ \(\frac { λD }{ d}\) = \(\frac { λD’ }{ d’}\) ; D’ = 2D

Question 14.
Two coherent monochromatic light beams of intensities I and 4I are superposed. The maximum and minimum possible intensities in the resulting beam are
a) 5I and I
b) 5I and 3I
c) 9I and I
d) 9I and 3I
Answer:
c) 9I and I
Solution:
Imax = I + 4I + 2\(\sqrt{I \times 4 I}\)
= 5I + 4I = 9I
Imin = I × 4I – 2\(\sqrt{I \times 4 I}\)
= 5I – 4I = I

Question 15.
When light is incident on a soap film of thickness 5 × 10-5 cm, the wavelength of light reflected maximum in the visible region is 5320 Å. Refractive index of the film will be,
a) 1.22
b) 1.33
c) 1.51
d) 1.83.
Answer:
b) 1.33
Solution:
2µt cos r = (2n + 1)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
For normal incidence
cos r = 1
for n = 0,
λ1 = 4µt = 26600 Å
n = 1,
λ2 = \(\frac{4 \mu t}{3}\) = 8866 Å
n=2,
λ3 = \(\frac{4 \mu t}{5}\) = 5320 Å
2µt = \(\frac{5 \lambda}{2}\)
µ = \(\frac{5 \lambda}{4 t}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 6
α = 1.33

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 16.
First diffraction minimum due to a single slit of width 1.0 × 10-5 cm is at 30°. Then wavelength of light used is,
a) 400 Å
b) 500 Å
c) 600 Å
d) 700 Å
Answer:
b) 500 Å
Solution:
d sin θ = n λ
d sin 30° = λ
1 × 10-7 × \(\frac{1}{2}\) = λ
0.5 × 10-7 = λ
λ = 500 Å

Question 17.
A ray of light strikes a glass plate at an angle 60°. If the reflected and refracted rays are perpendicular to each other, the refractive index of the glass is,
(a) √3
(b) \(\frac { 3 }{ 2 }\)
(c) \(\sqrt { \frac { 3 }{ 2 } } \)
(d) 2
Answer:
(a) √3
Hint.
Angle of refraction r = 60° ; Angle of incident i = 30°
sin i =n x sin r
n = \(\frac {sin 30°}{ sin 60°} \) = √3

Question 18.
One of the of Young’s double slits is covered with a glass plate as shown in figure. The position of central maximum will, Glass slide Screen will,

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 7

a) get shifted downwards
b) get shifted upwards
c) will remain the same
d) data insufficient to conclude
Answer:
b) get shifted upwards

Question 19.
Light transmitted by Nicol prism is,
a) partially polarised
b) unpolarised
c) plane polarised
d) elliptically polarised
Answer:
c) plane polarised

Question 20.
The transverse nature of light is shown in,
a) interference
b) diffraction
c) scattering
d) polarisation
Answer:
d) polarisation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

II. Short Answer Questions:

Question 1.
State the laws of reflection.
Answer:
(a) The incident ray, reflected ray and normal to the reflecting surface all are coplanar (ie. lie in the same plane).
(b) The angle of incidence i is equal to the angle of reflection r. i = r

Question 2.
What is angle of deviation due to reflection?
Answer:
The angle between the incident and deviated light ray is called angle of deviation.

Question 3.
Give the characteristics of image formed by a plane mirror.
Answer:

  1. The image formed by a plane mirror is virtual, erect, and laterally inverted.
  2. The size of the image is equal to the size of the object.
  3. The image distance far behind the mirror is equal to the object distance in front of it.
  4.  If an object is placed between two plane mirrors inclined at an angle 0, then the number of images n formed is as, n = \(\left( \frac { 360 }{ \theta } -1 \right) \)

Question 4.
Derive the relation between f and R for a spherical mirror.
Answer:
1. C be the center of curvature of the mirror
2. F be the principal focus.
3. Line CM is normal to the mirror at M.
4. i be the angle of incidence
∠MCP = i and ∠MFP = 2 i
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 8

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 9
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 10

Question 5.
What are the Cartesian sign conventions for a spherical mirror?
Answer:

  1. The Incident light is taken from left to right (i.e. object on the left of the mirror).
  2. All the distances are measured from the pole of the mirror (pole is taken as origin).
  3. The distances measured to the right of pole along the principal axis are taken as positive.
  4. The distances measured to the left of pole along the principal axis are taken as negative.
  5. Heights measured in the upward perpendicular direction to the principal axis are taken as positive.
  6. Heights measured in the downward perpendicular direction to the principal axis, are taken as negative.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
What is optical path? Obtain the equation for optical path of a medium of thickness d and refractive index n.
Answer:
1. Optical path of a medium is defined as the distance d’ light travels in vacuum at the same time it travels a distance ‘d’ in the medium.
2. n = refractive index.
3. d = thickness
ν = speed of light in the medium
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 11
As ‘n’ is always greater than 1, the optical path d’ of the medium is always greater than 1.

Question 7.
State the laws of refraction.
Answer:
Law of refraction is called Snell’s law.
Snell’s law states that,
(a) The incident ray, refracted ray and normal to the refracting surface are all coplanar (i.e. lie in the same plane).
(b) The ratio of angle of the incident i in the first medium to the angle of reflection r in the second medium is equal to the ratio of the refractive index of the second medium n2 to that of the refractive index of the first medium n1.
\(\frac { sin i }{ sin r }\) = \(\frac { { n }_{ 2 } }{ { n }_{ 1 } } \).

Question 8.
What is angle of deviation due to refraction?
Answer:

  1. When light travels from rarer to denser it deviates towards normal.
    d = i – r
  2. When light travels from denser to rarer it deviates away from normal.
    d = r – i

Question 9.
What is the principle of reversibility?
Answer:
The principle of reversibility states that light will follow exactly the same path if its direction of travel is reversed.

Question 10.
What is relative refractive index?
Answer:
\(\frac{\mathrm{n}_{2}}{\mathrm{n}_{1}}\) is called relative refractive index. It is the ratio of refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.

Question 11.
Obtain the equation for apparent depth.
Answer:
Light from object O at the bottom passes from denser (water) to rarer medium (air).
n1 and n2 are refractive of denser and rarer medium.
By snells law
n1 sin i = n2 sin r
sin i ≈ tan i, as i and r are small
n1 tan i ≈ n2 tan i
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 12

  1. Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 13
    Apparent depth

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 12.
Why do stars twinkle?
Answer:

  1. Light from the stars near the horizon reaches the earth obliquely through the atmosphere.
  2. It’s path changes due to refraction.
  3. Frequent atmosphere disturbances changes the path of light causes twinkling of stars.

Question 13.
What is critical angle and total internal reflection?
Answer:
The angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the refracted ray graces the boundary is called critical angle ic.
The entire light is reflected back into the denser medium itself. This phenomenon is called total internal reflection.

Question 14.
Obtain the equation for critical angle.
Answer:
The angle of incidence in the denser medium for which the refracted ray grace the boundary is called critical angle.
Snell’s law in Product form
n1 sin ic = n2 sin 90°
n1 sin ic = n2
sin ic = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
here n1 > n2,
If the rarer medium is air
n1 = n and n2 = 1
sin ic = \(\frac{1}{n}\)
ic = sin-1 \(\frac{1}{n}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 14
critical angle and total internal reflection

Question 15.
Explain the reason for glittering of diamond.
Answer:
The diamond appears dazzling because the total internal reflection of light happens inside the diamond. The refractive index of only diamond is about 2.417. It is much larger than that for ordinary glass which is about only 1.5. The critical angle of a diamond is about 24.4°. It is much less than that of glass. A skilled diamond cutter makes use of this larger range of angle of incidence (24.4° to 90° inside the diamond), to ensure that light entering the diamond is total internally reflected from the many cut faces before getting out. This gives a sparkling effect for diamonds.

Question 16.
What are mirage and looming?
Answer:

  1. It is an optical illusion observed in deserts or over hot extended surfaces like a coal – tarred road, due to which a traveller sees a shimmering Pond of water some distances ahead of him and in which the surrounding objects like trees etc appear inverted.
  2. In cold regions like glaciers and frozen lakes, the reverse effect of mirage will happen hence an inverted image is formed little above the surface. This phenomenon is called looming.

Question 17.
Write a short note on the prisms making use of total internal reflection.
Answer:

  1. Prisms can be designed to reflect light by 90° or 180°.
  2. It can also used to invert images without changing their size.
    Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 15
    Prisms making use of total internal reflection

Question 18.
What is Snell’s window?
Answer:
When light entering the water from outside is seen from inside the water, the view is restricted to a particular angle equal to the critical angle ic. The restricted illuminated circular area is called Snell’s window.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 19.
Write a note on optical fibre.
Answer:

  1. Principle – Total internal reflection.
  2. Inner part of optical fibre – core, outer part – cladding or sleeving.
  3. ‘µ’ of core must be higher than cladding.
  4. Light travels inside by means of total internal reflection with no appreciable loss in intensity of light.
  5. Even while bending the wire, total internal reflection ensures every reflection.

Question 20.
Explain the working of an endoscope.
Answer:
An endoscope is an instrument used by doctors which has a bundle of optical fibres that are used to see inside a patient’s body. Endoscopes work on the phenomenon of total internal reflection. The optical fibres are inserted in to the body through mouth, nose or a special hole made in the body. Even operations could be carried out with the endoscope cable which has the necessary instruments attached at their ends.

Question 21.
What are primary focus and secondary focus of convex lens?
Answer:

  1. Primary focus: It is defined as a point where an object should be placed to give parallel emergent rays to the principal axis.
  2. Secondary focus: It is defined as a point where all the parallel rays travelling close to the principal axis converge to form an image on the principal axis.

Question 22.
What are the sign conventions followed for lenses?
Answer:

  1. Sign of focal length is not decided on the direction of measurement of the focal length from the pole of the lens as they have two focal lengths (i.e Primary & Secondary focus)
  2. Focal length of thin lenses is taken as positive for a converging lens and negative for a diverging lens.

Question 23.
Arrive at lens equation from lens maker’s formula.
Answer:

  1. If the refractive index of the lens is n2 and it is placed in air, then n2 = n and n1 = 1.
  2. \(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\) This equation is called lens maker formula. This can be altered as
  3. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) This equation is known as lens equation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 24.
Obtain the equation for lateral magnification for thin lens.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 16
Lateral Magnificient in thin lens

1. OO’ be an object
2. II’ be the inverted real image.
3. Lateral Magnificient is defined as the ratio of height of the image to that of object.
4. m = \(\frac{I I^{\prime}}{O O^{\prime}}\)
∆ POO’ and ∆ PII’
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 17
m is negative for real image, Positive for virtual image.
Concave lens, m is always positive and less than one.
m for combining lenses,
\(\mathrm{m}=\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{f}{f+u}=\frac{f-\mathrm{v}}{f}\)

Question 25.
What is the power of a lens?
Power is reciprocal of focal length
P = \(\frac{1}{f}\)
Unit: diopter(D)

Question 26.
Derive the equation for effective focal length for lenses in contact.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 18
Lenses in Contact

1. Two lenses (1) and (2) having focal length are placed coaxially in contact.
2. Lens equation for first equation be
\(\frac{1}{v^{\prime}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}\)

3. Lens equation for second lens be
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}^{\prime}}=\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)

4. Adding the above equation
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)

5. If the combinations acts as single lens then,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)

6. On comparing,
\(\frac{1}{F}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)

∴ For any number of lens in contact
\(\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}+\frac{1}{f_{3}}+\)………..

Question 27.
What is the angle of minimum deviation?
Answer:
The minimum value of angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation D.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 28.
What is dispersion?
Answer:
Dispersion is splitting of white light into its constituent colours. This band of colours is called spectrum.

Question 29.
How are rainbows formed?
Answer:
Rainbow is formed by dispersion of sunlight into its constituent colours by raindrops which disperse sunlight by refraction and deviate the colours by total internal reflection.

Question 30.
What is Rayleigh’s scattering?
Answer:
Scattering of light by a particle of size less than wavelength of light is called Rayleigh scattering which is inversely proportional to the fourth power of wavelength.
\(I \alpha \frac{1}{\lambda^{4}}\)

Question 31.
Why does sky appear blue?
Answer:

  1. Blue colour of sky is due to scattering of sunlight by molecules of the atmosphere (eg. N2, O2)
  2. ‘λ’b is smaller hence it scattered more strongly based on Rayleigh Scattering law.
  3. Hence sky appears blue.

Question 32.
What is the reason for reddish appearance of sky during sunset and sunrise?
Answer:
During sunrise or sunset, the sun is near the horizon. Sunlight has to travel a greater distance. So shorter waves of blue region are scattered away by the atmosphere. Red waves of longer wavelength are least scattered and reach the observer. So the sun appears red.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 33.
Why do clouds appear white?
Answer:

  1. A cloud is composed of large-sized partic1e which do not obey Rayleigh scattering law
  2. Therefore all colours are scattered nearly equal.
  3. Hence clouds appear white.

Question 34.
What are the salient features of the corpuscular theory of light?
Answer:

  • According to this theory, light is emitted as tiny, massless (negligibly small mass) and perfectly elastic particles called corpuscles.
  • As the corpuscles are very small, the source of light does not suffer appreciable loss of mass even if it emits light for a long time.
  • On account of high speed, they are unaffected by the force of gravity and their path is a straight line in a medium of uniform refractive index.
  • The energy of light is the kinetic energy of these corpuscles. When these corpuscles impinge on the retina of the eye, the vision is produced.
  • The different size of the corpuscles is the reason for different colours of light.
  • When the corpuscles approach a surface between two media, they are either attracted or repelled.
  • The reflection of light is due to the repulsion of the corpuscles by the medium and refraction of light is due to the attraction of the corpuscles by the medium.

Question 35.
What is the wave theory of light?
Answer:

  1. Light travel as longitudinal waves in an invisible ether medium.
  2. This theory explains reflection, refraction, interference and diffraction.
  3. Existence of ether medium was disproved later.
  4. It could not explain the propagation of light in vacuum, polarisation phenomenon etc.
  5. It was proposed by Huygen.

Question 36.
What is electromagnetic wave theory of light?
Answer:

  1. It was proposed by maxwell.
  2. It is a transverse wave which does not require any medium.
  3. All phenomenon was successfully explained.
  4. It could not explain photoelectric effect and crompton effect.

Question 37.
Write a short note on the quantum theory of light.
Answer:
Light interacts with matter as photons to eject the electrons
A photon is a discrete packet of energy.
E = hυ
h = plancks constant
υ = frequency of radiation

Question 38.
What is a wavefront?
Answer:
A wavefront is the locus of points which are in the same state or phase of vibration.

Question 39.
What is Huygen’s principle?
Answer:
According to Huygens principle, each point of the wavefront is the source of secondary wavelets emanating from these points spreading out in all directions with the speed of the wave. These are called as secondary wavelets.

Question 40.
What is the interference of light?
Answer:
The phenomenon of addition or superposition of two light waves which produces increase intensity at some points and decrease in intensity at some other points is called interference of light.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 41.
What is a phase of a wave?
Answer:
Phase is the angular position of a vibration.

Question 42.
Obtain the relation between phase difference and path difference.
Answer:
Consider two waves of wavelength λ. A phase difference of 2π corresponds to a path difference of λ. If x is the path difference between two waves and φ is the phase difference then,
\(\delta=\frac{\lambda}{2 \pi} \phi\)

\(\delta\) – path difference, φ – Phase difference

Question 43.
What are coherent sources?
Answer:
Two light sources are said to be coherent if they produce waves which have same phase or constant phase difference, same frequency or wavelength (monochromatic), same waveform and preferably same amplitude.

Question 44.
What is intensity division?
Answer:
(i) Intensity or amplitude division:
1. If we allow light to pass through a partially silvered mirror (beam splitter), both reflection and refraction take place simultaneously.
2. As the two light beams are obtained from the same light source, the two divided light beams will be coherent beams.
3. They will be either in-phase or at constant phase difference.
4. Instruments like Michelson’s interferometer, Fabray- Perrot etalon work on this principle.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 19

Question 45.
How does wavefront division provide coherent sources?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 20

  1. A point source produces spherical wavefronts.
  2. All the points are in the same phase.
  3. If two points are chosen on the wavefront by using a double slit, It will act as coherent sources.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 46.
How do sources and images behave as coherent sources?
Answer:
Source and image will have waves in phase.
Fresnel biprism uses two virtual sources as two coherent sources.
Llyod’s mirror uses sources and its virtual image as two coherent sources.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 21

Question 47.
What is the bandwidth of the interference pattern?
Answer:
The bandwidth (β) is defined as the distance between any two consecutive bright or dark fringes.

Question 48.
What is diffraction?
Answer:
Bending of light around sharp edges is called diffraction.

Question 49.
Differentiate between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffraction.
Answer:

Fresnel diffractionFraunhofer diffraction
1. Spherical or cylindrical wavefront undergoes diffractionPlane wavefront undergoes diffraction
2. Lightwave is from a source at finite distanceLightwave is from a source at infinity
3. For Laboratory conditions, convex lenses need not be usedIn laboratory conditions, convex lenses are to be used
4. Difficult to observe and analyseEasy to observe and analyse
5.Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 22Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 23

Question 50.
Discuss the special cases on the first minimum in Fraunhofer diffraction.
Answer:
1. Divide the slit AB into two halts AC and CB.
2. Two different points on the slit which are separated by the same width is corresponding points.
3. The path difference of light waves from corresponding points meet at p and interfere destructive to make first minimum.
δ = \(\begin{array}{l}
\text { a } \\
\hline 2
\end{array}\) sin θ
> The condition for p to first minimum
\(\frac{a}{2} \sin \theta=\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
a sin θ = λ (first minimum)
a sin θ = 2 λ (second minimum)
a sin θ = 3 λ (third minimum)
\(\frac{\mathrm{a} \sin \theta}{2 \mathrm{n}}=\frac{\lambda}{2}\) (nth minimum)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 24

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 51.
What is Fresnel’s distance? Obtain the equation for Fresnel’s distance.
Answer:
1. Fresnel’s distance is the distance up to which the ray optics is valid in terms of rectilinear propagation of light.
2. Fresnel’s distance is the distance up to which ray optics is obeyed and beyond which ray optics is not obeyed but, wave optics becomes significant.
3. From the diffraction equation for first minimum,
sin θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\);
θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{a}\)
4. From the definition of Fresnel’s distance,
sin 2θ = \(\frac{a}{z}\) ;
2θ = \(\frac{a}{z}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 25

5. Equating the above two equation gives,
\(\frac{\lambda}{a}=\frac{a}{2 z}\)
6. After rearranging, we get Fresnel’s distance z as,
\(z=\frac{a^{2}}{2 \lambda}\)

Question 52.
Mention the differences between interference and diffraction.
Answer:

InterferenceDiffraction
1. Superposition of two wavesBending of waves around edges
2. Superposition of waves from two coherent sources.Superposition wavefronts emitted from various points of the same wavefront.
3. Equally spaced fringes.Unequally spaced fringes.
4. Intensity of all the bright fringes is almost same.Intensity falls rapidly for higher orders
5. Large number of fringes are obtainedLess number of fringes are obtained.

Question 53.
What is a diffraction grating?
Answer:
A diffraction grating is an optical component with a periodic structure that splits and diffracts light into several beams travelling in different directions.

Question 54.
What are resolution and resolving power?
Answer:

  1. Resolution is the quality of the image which is decided by diffraction effect and Rayleigh criterion.
  2. It is measured by the smallest distance which could be seen clearly without blur due to diffraction.
  3. The ability of an optical instrument to seperate or distinguish small or closely adjacent objects through the image formation is said to be resolving power.

Question 55.
What is Rayleigh’s criterion?
Answer:
The images of two-point objects are just resolved when the central maximum of the diffraction pattern of one falls over the first minimum of the diffraction pattern of the other.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 56.
What is polarisation?
Answer:
Polarisation is restricting electric or magnetic field vibrations to one plane.

Question 57.
Differentiate between polarised and unpolarised light.
Answer:

Polarised lightUnpolarised light
1. Consists of waves having their electric field vibrations in a single plane normal to the direction of the ray.Consists of waves having their electric field vibrations equally distributed in all directions normal to the direction of the ray.
2. Asymmetrical about the ray direction.Symmetrical about the ray direction.
3. It is obtained from unpolarised light with the help of polarisers.Produced by conventional light sources.

Question 58.
Discuss polarisation by selective absorption.
Answer:

  1. Selective absorption is the property of a material which transmits waves whose electric fields vibrate in a plane parallel to a certain direction of orientation and absorbs all other waves.
  2. The polaroids or polarisers are thin commercial sheets that make use of the property of selective absorption to produce an intense beam of plane polarised light.
  3. Selective absorption is also called dichroism.

Question 59.
What are polariser and analyser?
Answer:
Polariser: The Polaroid which plane polarises the unpolarised light passing through it is called a polariser.
Analyser: The polaroid which is used to examine whether a beam of light is polarised or not is called an analyser.

Question 60.
What are plane polarised, unpolarised and partially polarised light?
Answer:

  1. In-plane ploraised light the intensity varies from maximum to zero for every rotation of 90° of the analyser.
  2. If the intensity of light varies between maximum and minimum for every rotation of 90° of the analyser, the light is said to be partially polarised light.
  3. A Transverse wave which has vibrations in all directions in a plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation is said to be unpolarised light.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 61.
State and obtain Malus’ law.
Answer:
When a beam of plane polarised light of intensity I0 is incident on an analyser, the light transmitted of intensity I from the analyser varies directly as the square of the cosine of the angle θ between the transmission axis of polariser and analyser. This is known as Malus’ law.
I = I0 cos2θ
Proof:
1. Let us consider the plane of polariser and analyser are inclined to each other at an angle θ.
2. Let I0 be the intensity and ‘a’ be the amplitude of the electric vector transmitted by the polariser.
3. The amplitude ‘a’ of the incident light has two rectangular components, (acos θ) and (a sin θ) which are the parallel and perpendicular components to the axis of transmission of the analyser.
4. Only the component (a cosθ) will be transmitted by the analyser. The intensity of light transmitted from the analyser is proportional to the square of the component of the amplitude transmitted by the analyser.
5. I ∝ (a cos θ)2 I = k(a cos θ)2
Where k is constant of proportionality

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 26
Malu’s Law

I = ka2 cos2 θ
I = I0 cos2 θ
Where, I0 = ka2 is the maximum intensity of light transmitted form the analyser.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 27

Special cases:
Case (i):
When θ = 0°, cos 0 = 1, I = I0

Case (ii):
When θ = 90°, cos 90° = 0, I = 0

Question 62.
List the uses of polaroids.
Answer:

  1. Polaroids are used in goggles and cameras to avoid glare of light.
  2. Polaroids are useful in three-dimensional motion pictures i.e., in holography.
  3. Polaroids are used to improve contrast in old oil paintings.
  4. Polaroids are used in optical stress analysis.
  5. Polaroids are used as window glasses to control the intensity of incoming light.

Question 63.
State Brewster’s law.
Answer:
Tangent of Polarising angle is numerically equal to the refractive index of the medium.
tan ip = µ

Question 64.
What is the angle of polarisation and obtain the equation for the angle of polarisation
Answer:
1. The angle of incidence at which the reflected beam is plane polarised light is called polarising angle (ip)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 28
Polarisation by reflection

2. When ordinary light is incident on the surface of a transparent medium, the reflected light is partially plane polarised.
3. The extent of polarisation depends on the angle of incidence.
4. For a particular angle of incidence, the reflected light is found to be plane polarised.
5. The angle of incidence at which a beam of unpolarised light falling on a transparent surface is reflected as a beam of plane polarised light is called polarising angle or Brewster’s angle. It is denoted by i
6. At polarising angle, the reflected transmitted rays are perpendicular to other.
ip + 90° + rp = 180°
rp = 90° – ip
From Snell’s law,
\(\frac{\sin i_{p}}{\sin r_{p}}\) = n
7. Where n is the refractive index of the medium with respect to air.
8. Substitute the value of r from Equation, we get,
\(\frac{\sin i_{p}}{\sin \left(90^{\circ}-i_{p}\right)}\)}=\(\frac{\sin i_{p}}{\sin r_{p}}\) = n
tan ip = n
This relation is known as Brewster’s law.

Question 65.
Discuss pile of plates.
Answer:
1. The phenomenon of polarisation by reflection is used in the construction of pile of plates.
2. It consists of a number of glass plates placed one over the other in a tube
3. The plates are inclined at an angle of 33.7°(90° – 56.3°) to the axis of the tube. A beam of unpolarised light is allowed to fall on the pile of plates along the axis of the tube. So, the angle of incidence of light will be at 56.3° which is the polarising angle for glass.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 29

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 30
Pile of Plates

4. The vibrations perpendicular to the plane of incidence are reflected at each surface and those parallel to it are transmitted.
5. The larger the number of surfaces, the greater is the intensity of the reflected plane polarised light.
6. The pile of plates is used as a polarizer and also as an analyser.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 66.
What is double refraction?
Answer:
When a ray of unpolarised light is incident on a calcite crystal, two refracted rays are produced. Hence, two images of a single object are formed. This phenomenon is called double refraction.

Question 67.
Mention the types of optically active crystals with example.
Answer:
Uniaxial crystals :
Crystals with only one optic axis is called uniaxial crystals Ex: calcite, quartz, tourmaline.
Biaxial crystals:
Crystals with two optic axis is called biaxial crystal. Ex: Mica, topaz, selenite.

Question 68.
Discuss Nicol prism.
Answer:
Principle:
Double Refraction

Construction:
1. One of the most common forms of the Nicol prism is made by taking a calcite crystal which is a double refracting crystal with its length three times its breadth.
2. It is cut into two halves along the diagonal so that their face angles are 72° and 108°.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 31
Nicol Prism
3. The two halves are joined together by a layer of Canada balsam, a transparent cement.
4. A ray of unpolarized light from monochromatic source such as a sodium vapour lamp is incident on the face AC of the Nicol prism. Double refraction takes place and the ray is split into ordinary and extraordinary rays.
5. They travel with different velocities.
6. The refractive index of the crystal for the ordinary ray (monochromatic sodium light) is 1.658 and for extraordinary ray is 1.486. The refractive index of Canada balsam is 1.523.
7. Canada balsam does not polarise light.
8. The ordinary ray is total internally reflected at the layer of Canada balsam and is prevented from emerging from the other face.
9. The extraordinary ray alone is transmitted through the crystal which is plane polarised.

Uses of Nicol prism:

  • It produces plane polarised light and functions as a polariser
  • It can also be used to analyse the plane polarised light (i.e) used as an analyser.

Drawbacks of Nicol prism:

  • Its cost is very high due to the scarcity of large and flawless calcite crystals
  • Due to extraordinary ray passing obliquely through it, the emergent ray is always displaced a little to one side.
  • The effective field of view is quite limited
  • Light emerging out of it is not uniformly plane polarised.

Question 69.
How is polarisation of light obtained by scattering of light?
Answer:
The light from a clear blue portion of the sky shows a rise and fall of intensity when viewed through a polaroid which is rotated. This is because of sunlight, which has changed its I direction (having been scattered) on encountering the molecules of the earth’s atmosphere. The electric field of light interact with the electrons present in the air molecules.

Under the influence of the electric field of the incident wave the electrons in the molecules acquire components of motion in both these directions. We have an observer looking at 90° to the direction of the sun. Clearly, charges accelerating parallel do not radiate energy towards this observer since their acceleration has no transverse component. The radiation scattered by the molecule is therefore polarized perpendicular to the plane.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 32
Polarisation by Scattering

Question 70.
Discuss simple microscope and obtain the equations for magnification for near point focusing and normal focusing.
Answer:
(i) A simple microscope is a single magnifying (converging) lens of small focal length.
(ii) The idea is to get an erect, magnified and virtual image of the object. For this the object is placed between F and P on one side of the lens and viewed from other side of the lens.
(1) Near point focusing:
The image is formed at near point, i.e. 25 cm for normal eye. This distance is also called as least distance D of distinct vision. In this position, the eye feels comfortable but there is little strain on the eye.
(2) Normal focusing:
The image is formed at infinity. In this position, the eye is most relaxed to view the image.

Magnification in near point focusing:
(i) Object distance u is less than f. The image distance is the near point D. The magnification m is given by the relation,
m = \(\frac{v}{u}\)
(ii) The magnification can further be written as,
m = 1 – \(\frac{v}{f}\)(using lens equation)
Substituting for ν with sign convention,
ν = -D
m = \(1+\frac{D}{f}\)
This is the magnification for near point focusing.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 33

Magnification in normal focusing (angular magnification):
(i) The magnification for image is formed at infinity.
(ii) The angular magnification is defined as the ratio angle θi, subtended by the image with an aided eye to the angle θ0 subtended by the object with unaided eye.
m = \(\frac{\theta_{i}}{\theta_{0}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 34

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 35
Normal focusing

For unaided eye
tan θ0 ≈ θ0 = \(\frac{h}{D}\)
For aided eye
tan θ0 ≈ θ0 = \(\frac{h}{f}\)

The angular magnification is,
m = \(\frac{\theta_{i}}{\theta_{0}}=\frac{h / f}{h / D}\)

m = \(\frac{D}{f}\)
This is the magnification for normal focusing.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 71.
What are the near point and normal focusing?
Answer:
Near Point focusing:
If the image is formed at 25 cm which is the distance of distinct vision for normal eye, then the focusing is called near point focusing.
Normal focusing:
If the image is formed at infinity then the focusing is called normal focusing.

Question 72.
Why is oil-immersed objective preferred in a microscope?
Answer:
By placing an immersion oil with a refractive index equal to that of the glass slide in the space filled with air, more light is directed through the objective and a clearer image is observed.

Question 73.
What are the advantages and disadvantages of using a reflecting telescope?
Answer:
Advantages:

  • The main advantage is reflector telescope can escape from chromatic aberration because wavelength does not effect reflection.
  • The primary mirror is very stable because it is located at the back of the telescope and can be support in the back.
  • More cost-effective than refractor of similar size.
  • Easier to make a high quality mirror than lens because mirror need to only concern with one side of the curvature.

Disadvantages:

  • Optical misalignment can occur quite easily.
  • Require frequent cleaning because the inside is expose to the atmosphere.
  • Secondary mirror can cause diffraction of original incoming light rays causing the “Christmas star effect” where a bright object have spikes.

Question 74.
What is the use of an erecting lens in a terrestrial telescope?
Answer:
It makes the final image to be erect.

Question 75.
What is the use of collimator?
Answer:
The collimator is an arrangement to produce a parallel beam of light.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 76.
What are the uses of spectrometer?
Answer:

  1. To study the spectra of different sources of light.
  2. To measure the refractive index of materials.

Question 77.
What is myopia? What is its remedy?
Answer:
A human eye is shortsighted or myopic if it can see near objects clearly but is unable to see the far objects.
Remedy:
By using a concave lens of the required focal length.

Question 78.
What is hypermetropia? What is its remedy?
Answer:
A human eye can see distant objects clearly but cannot see near objects clearly is said to be suffering by long-sightedness or hypermetropia.
Remedy: By using concave of required focal length.

Question 79.
What is presbyopia?
Answer:
This defect is similar to hypermetropia i.e., a person having this defect cannot see nearby objects distinctly, but can see distant objects without any difficulty. This defect occurs in elderly persons (aged persons).

Question 80.
What is astigmatism?
Answer:
It is a defect of vision in which, a person cannot simultaneously see both horizontal and vertical lines with the same clarity.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

III. Long Answer Questions:

Question 1.
Derive the mirror equation and the equation for lateral magnification.
Answer:
1. AB is an object considered on the principal axis of a concave mirror.
2. Consider three paraxial rays from point B on the object.
3. The three reflected rays intersect at the point ‘B’.
4. A perpendicular drawn as A’ B’ to the principal axis is the real, inverted image of the object AB.
5. ∆ BPA and ∆ B’PA are similar
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 36

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 37
Mirror equation

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 38
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 39

Question 2.
Describe Fizeau’s method to determine the speed of light.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 40
speed of light by Fizeau’s method

Apparatus:

  • The light from a source S was first allowed to fall on a partially silvered glass plate G kept at an angle of 45°
  • It is then allowed to fall on a rotating tooth wheel with N teeth and N cuts of equal widths.
  • Light passing through one cut will be reflected by a mirror M kept at a long distance d (about 8 km)
  • If the wheel is not rotating, it gets reflected by a partially silvered glass plate.

Working:

  • Angular speed of rotation of wheel was increased from zero to GO Until it blocked by an adjacent tooth.
  • It is ensured by the disappearance of light while looking partially silvered glass plate.

Expression:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 41

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 3.
Obtain the equation for radius of illumination (or) Snell’s window.
Answer:

  1. When light entering the water from outside is seen from inside the water, the view is restricted to a particular angle equal to the critical angle ic.
  2. This restricted illuminated circular area is called Snell’s window.
  3. The angle of view for water animals is restricted to twice the critical angle 2ic. The critical angle for water is 48.6°. The angle of view is 97.2°.
  4. The radius R of the circular area depends on the depth d from which it is seen and the refractive indices of the media.
  5. Light is seen from a point A at a depth d.

Snell’s law
n1 sin ic = n2 sin 90°
n1 sin ic = n2 ∵ sin 90° = 1
sin ic = \(=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
6. From the Right angle triangle ∆ ABC,
sin ic = \(\frac{C B}{A B}=\frac{R}{\sqrt{d^{2}+R^{2}}}\)
Equating the above two equations
\(\frac{R}{\sqrt{d^{2}+R^{2}}}=\left(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\right)\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 42
Radius of snell’s window

Squaring on both sides,
\(\frac{R^{2}}{R^{2}+d^{2}}=\left(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\right)^{2}\)
Taking reciprocal,
\(\frac{R^{2}+d^{2}}{R^{2}}=\left(\frac{n_{1}}{n_{2}}\right)^{2}\)
On further simplifying,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 43

Question 4.
Derive the equation for acceptance angle and numerical aperture of optical fiber.
Answer:
1. To ensure the critical angle incident in the core-cladding boundary inside the optical fibre, the light should be incident at a certain angle at the end of the optical fiber while entering into it. This angle is called an acceptance angle.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 44
Acceptance angle

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 45
Acceptance Cone

2. By Snell’s law
n3 sin ia = n1 sin ra
To have the internal reflection inside optical fibre,
n1 sin i1 = n2 sin 90°
n1 sin ic = n2 sin 90° = 1
∴ sin ic = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
3. From the right angle triangle AABC,
ic = 90° – ra
Now, equation becomes
sin (90° – ra) = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)

4. Using trigonometry,
cos ra = \(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
sin ra = \(\sqrt{1-\cos ^{2} r_{a}}\)
Substituting for cos ra
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 46
5. Light can have any angle of incidence from o to ia with the normal at the end of the optical fibre forming a conical shape called acceptance cone. The term (n3 sin ia) is called
numerical aperture NA of the optical fibre
NA = n3 sin ia = \(\sqrt{n_{1}^{2}-n_{2}^{2}}\)
6. If outer medium is air, then n3 = 1. The numeric aperture NA becomes,
NA = sin ia = \(\sqrt{n_{1}^{2}-n_{2}^{2}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 5.
Obtain the equation for lateral displacement of light passing through a glass slab.
Answer:
1. When a ray of light passes through a glass slab it refracts at two refracting surfaces.
2. When the light ray enters the slab it travels from rarer medium (air) to denser medium (glass), results in deviation of ray towards the normal. When the light ray leaves the slab it travels from denser medium to rarer medium resulting in deviation of ray away from the normal.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 47
Refraction in glass slab

3. After the two refractions, the emerging ray has the same direction as that of the incident ray on the slab with a lateral displacement or shift L.
4. Consider a glass slab of thickness and refractive index n is kept in air medium.
5. In the right angle triangle ∆ BCE,
sin (i – r) = \(\frac{L}{B C}\);
BC = \(\frac{L}{\sin (i-r)}\) ……………(1)
6. In the right angle triangle ∆ BCF, ……………….(2)
cos(r) = \(\frac{t}{B C}\);

BC = \(\frac{t}{\cos (r)}\)
Equating equations (1) & (2)
\(\frac{L}{\sin (i-r)}=\frac{t}{\cos (r)}\)

7. After rearranging,
L = \(t\left[\frac{\sin (i-r)}{\cos (r)}\right]\)

Question 6.
Derive the equation for refraction at a single spherical surface
Answer:
1. Let us consider two transparent media having refractive indices n1 and n2 are separated by a spherical surface.
2. Let C be the centre of curvature of the spherical surface. Let a point object O be in the medium n1.
3. The line OC cuts the spherical surface at the pole P of the surface.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 48
Refraction at single Spherical Surface

4. As the rays considered are paraxial rays, the perpendicular dropped for the point of incidence to the principal axis is very close to the pole or passes through the pole itself.
5. Light from O falls on the refracting surface at N. The normal drawn at the point of incidence passes through the centre of curvature C.
6. As n2 > n1, light in the denser medium deviates towards the normal and meets the principal axis at I where the image is formed,
7. By Snell’s law,
n1 sin i = n2 sin r
As the angles are small,
n1 i = n2 r
Let the angles,
∠ NOP = α, ∠ NCP = β ∠ NIP = γ
tan α = \(\frac{P N}{P O}\);

tan β = \(\frac{P N}{P C}\);

tan γ = \(\frac{P N}{P I}\)
8. As these angles are small, tan of angle could be approximated to the angle itself.
α = \(\frac{P N}{P O}\);

β = \(\frac{P N}{P C}\);

γ = \(\frac{P N}{P I}\)
for the triangle, ΔONC,
i = α + β
for the triangle, ΔINC,
β = r + γ (or) r = β – γ
9. on sub i & r, we get
n1 ( α + β) = n2 (β – γ)
Rearranging
n1α + n2γ = (n2 – n1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 49

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 7.
Obtain the lens maker’s formula and mention its significance.
Answer:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 50

1. Let us consider a thin lens made up of a medium of refractive index n2 is placed in a medium of refractive index n1. Let R1 and R2 be the radii of curvature of two spherical surfaces (1) and (2) respectively.
2. The general equation for the refraction at a spherical surface is given from Equation
\(\frac{n_{2}}{v}-\frac{n_{1}}{u}=\frac{\left(n_{2}-n_{1}\right)}{R_{1}}\)
For the refracting surface (1) , the light goes from n1 to n2

3. \(\frac{n_{2}}{v}-\frac{n_{1}}{u}=\frac{\left(n_{2}-n_{1}\right)}{R_{1}}\)
For the refracting surface (2), the light goes from medium n2 to n1.

\(\frac{n_{1}}{v}-\frac{n_{2}}{v^{\prime}}=\frac{\left(n_{1}-n_{2}\right)}{R_{2}}\)

4. By adding
\(\frac{n_{1}}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{n_{1}}{u}=\left(n_{2}-n_{1}\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)

Further simplifying and rearranging,

\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\left(\frac{n_{2}-n_{1}}{n_{1}}\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\) \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\left[\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}-1\right]\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)

5. If the object is at infinity, the image is formed at the focus of the lens.
Thus, for u = ∞, υ = f.
Then the equation becomes,
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\left[\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}-1\right]\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)

\(\frac{1}{f}=\left(\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}-1\right)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)

6. If the refractive index of the lensis n2 and it is placed in air, then n2 = n and n1 = 1. So the equation becomes,

\(\frac{1}{f}=(n-1)\left(\frac{1}{R_{1}}-\frac{1}{R_{2}}\right)\)
The above equation is called the lens maker’s formula,

7. \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)
This is called lens equation.

Question 8.
Derive the equation for a thin lens and obtain its magnification.
Answer:
1. Let us consider an object OO’ of height h1 placed on the principal axis with its height perpendicular to the principal axis.
2. The ray OP passing through the pole of the lens goes undefeated.
3. The inverted real image II’ formed has a height h2
4. The lateral or transverse magnification m is defined as the ratio of the height of the image to that of the object.
m = \(\frac{I I^{\prime}}{O O^{\prime}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 109

5. From the two similar triangle ∆POO’ and PII’, we can write,
\(\frac{I I^{\prime}}{O O^{\prime}}=\frac{P I}{P O}\)

Applying sign convention,
\(\frac{-h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}}{-\mathrm{u}}\)

6. Substituting this in equation for magnification,
m = \(\frac{-h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}}{-u}\)

After rearranging
m = \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)

7. The magnification is negative for real image and positive for the virtual image.
8. Magnification by combining the lens equation with the formula for magnification as,
\(m=\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{f}{f+u}\) (or)
\(m=\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{f-\mathrm{v}}{f}\)

Question 9.
Derive the equation for effective focal length for lenses in out of contact.
Answer:
Focal length of lens in out of contact:
1. Let O be a point object on the principal axis of a lens. OA is the incident ray on the lens at a point A at a height h above the optical centre. The ray is deviated through an angle δ and forms the image I on the principle axis.
2. The incident and refracted rays subtend the angles. ∠ AOP = α and ∠ AIP = β with the principle axis respectively.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 51
3. In the triangle ∆ OAI, the angle of deviation δ can be δ = α + β
If the height h is small as compared to PO and PI the angles α, β and δ are also small then,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 52
4. For a parallel ray that falls on the arrangement, the two lenses produce deviations δ1 and δ2 respectively and The net deviation δ is
δ = δ1 + δ2

δ1 = \(\frac{h_{1}}{f_{1}}\)

δ2 = \(\frac{h_{2}}{f_{2}}\)

δ = \(\frac{h_{1}}{f}\) …………(1)

\(\frac{h_{1}}{f}=\frac{h_{1}}{f_{1}}+\frac{h_{2}}{f_{2}}\)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 53
Lens in out of contact

From the geometry,
h2 – h1 = P2G – P1G = CG
h2 – h1 = BG tan δ1 ≈ BG δ1
h2 – h1 = \(\frac{d h_{1}}{f_{1}}\)
h2 = h1 + \(\frac{d h_{1}}{f_{1}}\) ……………..(2)
\(\frac{h_{1}}{f}=\frac{h_{1}}{f_{1}}+\frac{h_{1}}{f_{2}}+\frac{h_{1} d}{f_{1} f_{2}}\)
On further simplification,

\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}+\frac{d}{f_{1} f_{2}}\)
The above equation could be used to find the equivalent focal length.
To find the position of the equivalent lens, we can further write from the geometry.
PP2 = EG = \(\frac{\mathrm{GC}}{\tan \delta}\)
PP2 = EG = \(\frac{h_{1}-h_{2}}{\tan \delta}=\frac{h_{1}-h_{2}}{\delta}\)
From equation (1) and (2)
h2 – h1 = d\(\frac{\mathrm{h}_{1}}{\mathrm{f}_{1}}\) and
δ = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}_{1}}{\mathrm{f}}\)
PP2 = [d \(\frac{f}{f_{1}}\)]
The position of the equivalent single lens from the second lens. Its position from the first lens.
PP1 = d – [d \(\frac{f}{f_{1}}\)];
PP1 = d[1 – \(\frac{f}{f_{1}}\)]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 10.
Derive the equation for angle of deviation produced by a prism and thus obtain the equation for the refractive index of material prism.
Answer:
1. The angle between the direction of the incident ray PQ and the emergent ray RS is called the angle of deviation d.
2. The deviation d1 at the surface AB is,
angle ∠RQM = d1 = i1 – r1
3. The deviation d2 at the surface AC is, angle ∠QRM =
d2 = i2 – r2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 54

4. Total angle of deviation d produced is
d = d1 + d2
Substituting for d1 and d2,
d = (i1 – r1) + (i2 – r2)
After rearranging,
5. d = (i1 + i2) – (r1 + r2)
In the quadrilateral AQNR, two of the angles (at the vertices Q and R) are right angles. Therefore, the sum of the other angles of the quadrilateral is 180°.
6. ∠A + ∠QNR = 180°
From the triangle ∆ QNR,
r1 + r2 + ∠QNR = 180°
Comparing these two equations and we get,
r1 + r2 = A
substituting this in equation (6.98) for angle of deviation,
d = i1 + i2 – A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 55

7. A graph plotted between the angle of incidence and angle of deviation.
8. The minimum value of angle of deviation is called the angle of minimum deviation D. At minimum deviation,
(a) the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence, i1 = i2
(b) the angle of refraction at face one and face two are equal, r1 = r2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 56

(c) the incident ray and emergent ray are symmetrical with respect to the prism.
(d) the refracted ray inside the prism is parallel to its base of the prism.
The case of the angle of minimum deviation is shown in figure
9. Refractive index of the material of the prism
At minimum deviation, i1 = i2 = i and r1 = r2 = r
D = i1 + i2 – A = 2i – A (or)
i = \(\frac{(\mathrm{A}+\mathrm{D})}{2}\)
r1 + r2 = A ⇒ 2r = A (or)
r = \(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{2}\)
n = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+D}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)}\)

Question 11.
What is dispersion? Obtain the equation for dispersive power of a medium.
Answer:
1. Dispersion is splitting of white light into its constituent colours. This band of colours of light is called its spectrum.
2. Consider a beam of white light passes through a prism; it gets dispersed into its constituent colours.
3. Let δV, δR are the angles of deviation for violet and red light. Let nv and nr are the refractive indices for the violet and red light respectively.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 57

4. The refractive index of the material of a prism.
n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+D}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)}\)
Here A is the angle of the prism and D is the angle of minimum deviation.
n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+\delta}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)}\)
For small angles of A and δm,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 58
δ = (n – 1) A
Whn white light enters the prism, the deviation is different for different colours. Thus, the refractive index is also different for different colours.
For violet light, δ =(nv – 1) A
For Red light, δR =(nR – 1) A
5. As, angle of deviation for violet colour δv is greater than the angle of deviation for red colour, δv the refractive index for violet colour nv is greater than the refractive index for red colour nR.
Subtracting δv from δR we get,
δv – δR = (nv – nR) A
6. The term (δv – δR) is the angular separation between the two extreme colours (violet and red) in the spectrum is called angular dispersion. Clearly, the angular dispersion produced by a prism depends upon.
(i) Angle of the prism
(ii) Nature of the material of the prism.
7. It is defined as the ratio of the angular dispersion for the extreme colours to the deviation for any mean colour.
Dispersive power (ω),
ω = \(\frac{\text { angular dispersion }}{\text { mean deviation }}=\frac{\delta_{\mathrm{v}}-\delta_{\mathrm{R}}}{\delta}\)
Substituting for (δv – δR) and (δ),
ω = \(\frac{\left(n_{\mathrm{v}}-n_{R}\right)}{(n-1)}\)

Question 12.
Prove laws of reflection using Huygen’s principle.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 59
Laws of Reflection

1. Let us consider a parallel beam of light, incident on a reflecting plane surface such as a plane mirror XY.
2. The incident wavefront is A’B’ and the reflected wavefront is AB in the same medium.
3. These wavefronts are perpendicular to the incident rays L, M and reflected rays L ‘, M’ respectively.
4. By the time point A of the incident wavefront touches the reflecting surface, the point B is yet to travel a distance BB’ to touch the reflecting surface B’.
5. When point B falls on the reflecting surface at B’, the point A would have reached A’. This is applicable to all the points on the wavefront.
6. Thus, the reflected wavefront A’B’ emanates as a plane wavefront. The two normals N and N’ are considered at the points where the rays L and M fall on the reflecting surface. As reflection happens in the same medium, the speed of light is same before and after the reflection.
7. Hence, the time taken for the ray to travel from B to B’ is the same as the time taken for the ray to travel from A to A’. Thus, the distance BB’ is equal to the distance AA’ (AA’ = BB’)
(i) The incident rays, the reflected rays the normal are in the same plane.
(ii) Angle of incidence,
∠ i = ∠ NAL = 90° – ∠ NAB = ∠ BAB’
Angle of reflection,
∠ r =∠ N’B’M’ = 90° – ∠ N’B’A’=∠ A’B’A
8. For the two right angle triangles, ∆ ABB’ and ∆ B’A’A, the two triangles are congruent. As per the property of congruency; the two angles, ∠ BAB’ and ∠ A’B’A must also be equal.
i = r
hence the laws of reflection is proved.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 13.
Prove laws of refraction using Huygen’s principle.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 60
Law of refraction

1. Let us consider a parallel beam of light is incident on a refracting plane surface XY such as a glass surface.
2. The incident wavefront AB is in rarer medium (1) and the refracted wavefront ” AB is in denser medium (2).
3. These wavefronts are perpendicular to the incident rays L, M and refracted rays L’, M’ respectively.
4. By the time the point A of the incident wavefront touches the refracting surface, the point B is yet to travel a distance BB’ to touch the refracting surface at B’.
5. When point B falls on the refracting surface at, B, the point A would have reached A’ in the other medium.
6. The time taken t for the ray to travel from B to B is the same as the time taken for the ray to travel from A to A’
t = \(\frac{B B^{\prime}}{\mathrm{v}_{1}}=\frac{A A^{\prime}}{\mathrm{v}_{2}}\) (or)
t = \(\frac{B B^{\prime}}{A A^{\prime}}=\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\)

(i) The incident rays, the refracted rays and the normal are in the same plane.
(ii) Angle of incidence,
i = ∠ NAL = 90° – ∠NAB = ∠ BAB’
Angle of refraction,
r = ∠N’B’M’= 90° – ∠N’B’A’ = ∠ A’B’A
7. For the two right angle triangle ABB’ and B’A’A,
\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{B B^{\prime} / A B^{\prime}}{A A^{\prime} / A B^{\prime}}=\frac{B B^{\prime}}{A A^{\prime}}=\frac{\mathrm{v}_{1}}{\mathrm{v}_{2}}=\frac{c / \mathrm{v}_{2}}{c / \mathrm{v}_{1}}\)

8. Here, c is speed of light in vacuum. The ratio c/υ is the constant, called refractive index of the medium.
\(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{n_{2}}{n_{1}}\)
In product form,
n1 sin i = n2 sin r
Hence, the laws of refraction are proved.

Question 14.
Obtain the equation for resultant intensity due to interference of light.
Answer:
1. The phenomenon of addition or superposition of two light waves which produces increase in intensity at some points and a decrease in intensity at some other points is called interference of light.
2. Let us consider two light waves from the two sources S1 and S2 meeting at a point P as shown
3. The wave from S1 at an instant t and P is, y1 = a1 sin ωt
The wave from S2 an instant t at P is
y2 = a2 sin(ωt + Φ)
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 61
Superposition principle

4. The two waves have different amplitudes a1 and a2, same angular frequency ω’ and a phase difference of Φ between them. The resultant displacement will be given by.
y = y1 + y2 = a1 sin ωt + a1 sin2 (ωt + Φ) y = A sin (ωt + Φ)
Where, A =\(\sqrt{a_{1}^{2}+a_{2}^{2}+2 a_{1} a_{2} \cos \phi}\) ………….(1)
θ = \(\tan ^{-1} \frac{a_{2} \sin \phi}{a_{1}+a_{2} \cos \phi}\) ………….(2)

5. The resultant amplitude is maximum.
Amax = \(\sqrt{\left(a_{1}+a_{2}\right)^{2}}\);
when Φ = 0, ±2π, ± 4π …………….(3)
6. The resultant amplitude is minimum.
Amin = \(\sqrt{\left(a_{1}-a_{2}\right)^{2}}\);
when Φ = 0, ±π, ± 3π ± 5π ………..(4)
7. The intensity of light is proportional to the square of amplitude.
8. I α A2 ……………(5)
Now equation (1) becomes
I α I1 + I2 + 2\(\sqrt{I_{1} I_{2}}\) cos Φ ………….(6)
9. If the phase difference, Φ = 0, ± 2π, ± 4π., it corresponds to the condition for maximum intensity of light called as constructive interference.
10. The resultant maximum intensity is,
Imax α (a1 + a2)2 ……………….(7)
11. If the phase difference, Φ = + π, ± 3π, ± 5π …., it corresponds to the condition for the minimum intensity of light called destructive interference.
12. The resultant minimum intensity is Imin α
(a1 – a2)2 α I1 + I2 – 2\(\sqrt{\mathrm{I}_{1} \mathrm{I}_{2}}\) ………….(8)

As a special case, if a1 = a2 = a, then equation (1) becomes,
A = \(\sqrt{2 a^{2}+2 a^{2} \cos \phi}\)
= \(\sqrt{2 a^{2}(1+\cos \phi)}\)
= \(\sqrt{2 a^{2} 2 \cos ^{2}(\phi / 2)}\)

13. A = 2 a cos(Φ/2) ……….(9)

I α 4a2 cos2 (Φ/2) [∴ I α A2] …………(10)
I α 4 I0 cos2 (Φ/ 2) [ΦI0 α a2] ……….(11)
IMax = 4I0 when, Φ = o, ± 2π, 4π ……………(12)
Imin = 0 when, Φ = ± π, ± 3π, ± 5π ……………..(13)
Conclusion:
The phase difference between the two waves decides the intensity of light meet at a point.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 15.
Explain Young’s double-slit experimental setup and obtain the equation for path difference.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 62
Young’s double slit experiment

1. Wavefronts from S1 and S2 spread out and overlapping takes place to the right side of double slit.
2. When a screen is placed at a distance of about 1 meter from the slits, alternate bright and dark fringes which are equally spaced appear on the screen. These are called interference fringes or bands.

Equation for path difference:
3. The Let d be the distance between the double slits S1 and S2 which act as coherent sources of wavelength λ.
4. A screen is placed parallel to the double slit at a distance D from it. The mid-point of S1 and S2 is C and the mid-point of the screen O is equidistant from S1 and S2. P is any point at a distance y from O.
5. The waves from S1 and S2 meet at P either in-phase or out-of-phase depending upon the path difference between the two waves.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 63
Young’s double slit experiment setup.

δ = S2P – S1P
δ = S2P – MP = S2M

6. The angular position of the point P from C is θ. ∠ OCP = θ.
7. From the geometry, the angles ∠ OCP and ∠ S2S1M are equal.
∠ OCP = ∠ S2S1M = θ.
In right angle triangle ∆ S1S2M, the path difference,
S2M = d sin θ
δ = d sin θ
If the angle θ is small, sin θ »tan θ θ
From the right angle triangle ∆ OCP,
tan θ = \(\frac{\mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{D}}\)

The path difference, δ = \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{D}}\)

Question 16.
Obtain the equation for bandwidth in Young’s double slit experiment.
Answer:
Condition for bright fringe (or) maxima:
The condition for the constructive interference or the point P to be have a bright fringe is,
Path difference, δ = nλ
where, n = 0,1,2,…….. ∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \mathrm{y}}{\mathrm{D}}\) = nl
y = n\(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\) (or)
yn = n\(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)

Condition for dark fringe (or) minima:
The condition for the destructive interference or the point P to be have a dark fringe is,
Path difference δ = (2n -1) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
when, n = 1, 2, 3,………..
∴ \(\frac{d y}{D}\) =(2n-l) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
y = \(\frac{(2 n-1)}{2} \frac{\lambda D}{d}\) (or)
yn = \(\frac{(2 n-1)}{2} \frac{\lambda D}{d}\)

Equation for bandwidth:
1. The bandwidth (β) is defined as the distance between any two consecutive bright or dark fringes.
2. The distance between (n+l)th and nth consecutive brigh fringes from O is given by,
β = y(n + 1) – yn ((n + 1) \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)) – (n\(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\))
β = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 17.
Obtain the equations for constructive and destructive interference for transmitted and reflected waves in thin films.
Answer:
Interference in thin films:
1. Let us consider a thin film of transparent material of refractive index p and thickness d. A parallel beam of light is incident on the film at an angle i.
2. The wave is divided into two parts at the upper surface, one is reflected and the other is refracted. The refracted part, which enters into the film, again gets divided at the lower surface into two parts; one is transmitted out of the film and the other is reflected back into the film.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 64
Interference in thin films

For transmitted light:
1. The light transmitted may interfere to produce a resultant intensity. Let us consider the path difference between the two light waves transmitted from B and D. The two waves moved together and remained in phase up to B where splitting occurred.
2. The extra path travelled by the wave transmitted from D is the path inside the film, BC + CD. If we approximate the incidence to be nearly normal (i = 0), then the points B and D are very close to each other. The extra distance travelled by the wave is approximately twice thickness of the film, BC + CD = 2d. As this extra path is travelled in a medium of refractive index p, the optical path difference is,
δ = 2μd.
3. The condition for constructive interference in transmitted ray is,
2μd = nλ
Similarly, the condition for destructive interference in transmitted ray is
2μd = (2n-l) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)

For reflected light:
1. Wave while travelling in a rarer medium and getting reflected by a denser medium, undergoes a phase change of n or an additional path difference of \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\).
2. Let us consider the path difference between the light waves reflected by the upper surface at A and the other wave coming out at C after passing through the film.
3. The additional path travelled by wave coming out from C is the path inside the film, AB + BC. For nearly normal incidence this distance could be approximated as, AB + BC = 2d. As this extra path is travelled in the medium of refractive index p, the optical path difference is, δ = 2μd.
4. The condition for constructive interference for reflected ray is,
2μd + \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = nλ (or)
2μd = (2n – 1) \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)

5. The additional path difference λ/2 is due to the phase change of n in rarer to denser reflection taking place at A. The condition for destructive interference for reflected ray is,
2μd + \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) = (2n + l)\(\frac{\lambda}{2}\) (or)
2μd = nλ

Question 18.
Discuss diffraction at single slit and obtain the condition for nth minimum.
Answer:
1. Let a parallel beam of light fall normally on a single slit AB of width. The diffracted beam falls on a screen kept at a distance. The center of the slit is C. A straight line through C perpendicular to the plane of slit meets the center of the screen at O.
2. All the waves start parallel to each other from different points of the slit and interfere at point P and other points to give the resultant intensities. The point P is in the geometrically shadowed region, up to which the central maximum is spread due to diffraction.

Condition for P to be first minimum:
1. Let us divide the slit AB into two half’s AC and CB. Now the width of AC is (a/2). They are called corresponding points.
2. The path difference of light waves from different corresponding points meeting at point P and interfere destructively to make it first minimum.
3. The path difference δ between waves from these corresponding points is,
δ = \(\frac{a}{2}\) sin θ
The Condition for P to be first minimum,
\(\frac{a}{2}\) sin θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
a sin θ = λ (first minimum)

Condition for P to be nth order minimum:
Dividing the slit into 2n number of (even number of) equal parts the condition for nth order minimum is
\(\frac{a}{2 n}\) sin θ = \(\frac{\lambda}{2}\)
a sin θ = nλ (nth minimum)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 65
Diffraction at single slit

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 66
Corresponding points

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 19.
Discuss the diffraction at a grating and obtain the condition for mth maximum.
Answer:
1. Grating has multiple slits with equal widths of size comparable to the wavelength of diffracting light.
2. Grating is a plane sheet of transparent material on which opaque rulings are made with a fine diamond pointer.
3. The rulings act as obstacles having a definite width b and the transparent space between the rulings act as slit of width a.
4. The combined width of a ruling and a slit is called grating element (e = a + b). Points on successive slits separated by a distance equal to the grating element are called corresponding points.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 67
Diffraction grating experiment

5. Let a plane wavefront of monochromatic light with wave length λ be incident normally on the grating.
6. As the slits size is comparable to that of wavelength, the incident light diffracts at the grating.
7. A diffraction pattern is obtained on the screen when the diffracted waves are focused on a screen using a convex lens.
8. The path difference δ between the diffracted waves from one pair of corresponding points is,
δ = (a + b) sin θ
This path difference is the same for any pair of corresponding points. The point P will be bright, when
δ = mλ where m = 0,1,2,3
Combining the above two equations, we get,
(a + b) sin θ = mλ
Here, m is called an order of diffraction.
Condition for zero order maximum, m = 0
For (a + b) sinθ = 0, the position, θ = 0. sin θ = 0 and m = 0. This is called zero order diffraction or central maximum.
Condition for first-order maximum, m = 1
If (a + b) sin θ1 = λ, the diffracted light meet at an angle θ1 to the incident direction and the first-order maximum is obtained.

Condition for second-order maximum, m = 2
Similarly, (a + b) sin θ2 = 2λ forms the second-order maximum at the angular position θ2.
Condition for higher-order maximum
On either side of central maxima, different higher orders of diffraction maxima are formed at different angular positions.
If we take,
N = \(\frac{1}{a+b}\)
\(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~N}}\) sin θ = mλ (or) sin θ = Nmλ

Question 20.
Discuss the experiment to determine the wavelength of monochromatic light using diffraction grating.
Answer:
1. The wavelength of a spectral line can be very accurately determined with the help of a diffraction grating and a spectrometer.
2. Initially all the preliminary adjustments of the spectrometer are made.
3. The slit of collimator is illuminated by a monochromatic light, whose wavelength is to be determined.
4. The telescope is brought in line with a collimator to view the image of the slit.
5. The given plane transmission grating is then mounted on the prism table with its plane perpendicular to the incident beam of light coming from the collimator
6. The telescope is turned to one side until the first-order diffraction image of the slit coincides with the vertical cross wire of the eyepiece.
7. The reading of the position of the telescope is noted.
8. Similarly the first-order diffraction image on the other side is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire and corresponding reading is noted. The difference between the two positions gives 2θ.
9. Half of its value gives θ, the diffraction angle for first-order maximum. The wavelength of light
λ = \(\frac{\sin \theta}{\mathrm{Nm}}\)
10. Here, N is the number of rulings per metre in the grating and m is the order of the diffraction image.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 68

Determination of wavelength using grating and spectrometer

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 21.
Discuss the experiment to determine the wavelength of different colours using diffraction grating.
Answer:
1. When white light is used, the diffraction pattern consists of a white central maximum and on both sides, continuous coloured diffraction patterns are formed.
2. The central maximum is white as all the colours meet here constructively with no path difference. As θ increases, the path difference, (a+b)sin θ, passes through the condition for maxima of diffraction of different orders for all colours from violet to red.
3. It produces a spectrum of diffraction pattern from violet to red on either side of central maximum
4. By measuring the angle at which these colours appear for various orders of diffraction, the wavelength of different colours could be calculated using the formula,
\(\lambda=\frac{\sin \theta}{\mathrm{Nm}}\)
Here, N is the number of rulings per metre in the grating and m is the order of the diffraction image.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 69
Diffraction with white light

Question 22.
Obtain the equation for resolving power of optical instrument.
Answer:
1. For a single rectangular slit, the half-angle θ subtended by the spread of central maximum is given by the relation,
a sin θ = λ
2. Similar to a rectangular slit, when a circular aperture or opening forms an image of a point object, the image formed will not be a point but a diffraction pattern of concentric circles that become fainter while moving away from the centre. These are known as Airy’s discs. The circle of central maximum has the half angular spread given by the equation,
a sin θ = 1.22 λ
3. The numerical value 1.22 comes for central maximum formed by circular apertures.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 70
Airy’s disc

For small angles, sin θ ≈ θ
a θ =1.22 λ
Rewriting further,
θ = 1.22 λ/a  and
\(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{0}}{\mathrm{f}}=\frac{1.22 \lambda}{\mathrm{a}}\)
r0 = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda f}{\mathrm{a}}\)

4. This equation is called spacial resolution.
5. When two-point sources close to each another form image on the screen, the diffraction pattern of one point source can overlap with another and produce a blurred image. To obtain a good image of the two sources, the two-point sources must be resolved i.e., the point sources must be imaged in such a way that their images are sufficiently far apart that their diffraction patterns do not overlap.
6. According to Rayleigh’s criterion, for two-point objects to be just resolved, the minimum distance between their diffraction images must be in such a way that the central maximum of one coincides with the first minimum of the other and vice versa. Such an image is said to be just resolved image of the object. The Rayleigh’s criterion is said to be limit of resolution.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 71
7. According to Rayleigh’s criterion the two-point sources are said to be just resolved when the distance between the two maxima is at least r0. The angular resolution has a unit in radian (rad) and it is given by the equation,
θ = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{\mathrm{a}}\)
8. The ability of an optical instrument to separate or distinguish small or closely adjacent objects through the image formation is said to be resolving power of the instrument.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 23.
Discuss about simple microscope and obtain the equations for magnification for near point focusing and normal focusing.
Answer:
1. A simple microscope is a single magnifying (converging) lens of small focal length The idea is to get an erect, magnified and virtual image of the object.
2. (1) Near point focusing – The image is formed at near point, i.e. 25 cm for normal eye. This distance is also called as least distance D of distinct vision. In this position, the eye feels comfortable but there is little strain on the eye.
3. (2) Normal focusing – The image is formed at infinity. In this position the eye is most relaxed to view the image.
> Object distance u is less than f. The image distance is the near point D. The magnification m is given by the relation,
m = \(\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)
4. With the help of lens equation,
\(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) the magnification can further be written as,
m = 1 – \(\frac{v}{f}\)
5. Substituting for v with sign convention,
v = -D
6. m = 1 + \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{f}\)
This is the magnification for near point focusing.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 72
Near Point focusing

7. The angular magnification is defined as the ratio of angle θi subtended by the image with aided eye to the angle θ0 subtended by the object with unaided eye.
m = \(\frac{\theta_{i}}{\theta_{0}}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 73

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 74
Normal focusing

8. For unaided eye shown in Figure (a),
tan θ0 ≈ θ0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{D}}\)
9. For aided eye shown in Figure (b),
tan θi ≈ θi = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{f}\)
10. The angular magnification is,
m = \(\frac{\theta_{i}}{\theta_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{h} / \mathrm{f}}{\mathrm{h} / \mathrm{D}}\)
m = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{f}\)
This is the magnification for normal focusing.

Question 24.
Explain about compound microscope and obtain the equation for magnification.
Answer:
1. The lens near the object, called the objective, forms a real, inverted, magnified image of the object. This serves as the object for the second lens which is the eyepiece.
2. Eyepiece serves as a simple microscope that produces finally an enlarged and virtual image.
3. The first inverted image formed by the objective is to be adjusted close to, but within the focal plane of the eyepiece so that the final image is formed nearly at infinity or at the near point.
4. The final image is inverted with respect to the original object. We can obtain the magnification for a compound microscope.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 75
Compound microscope
5. From the ray diagram,
m0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}^{1}}{\mathrm{~h}}\)
tan β = \(\frac{\mathrm{h}}{\mathrm{f}_{0}}=\frac{\mathrm{h}^{1}}{\mathrm{~L}}\) then
\(\frac{\mathrm{h}^{\prime}}{\mathrm{h}}=\frac{\mathrm{L}}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{o}}}\)
m0 = \(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{f_{0}}\)
Jo
6. Here, the distance L is between the first focal point of the eyepiece to the second focal point of the objective. This is called the tube length L of the microscope as f0 and fe are comparatively smaller than L.
7. If the final image is formed at P (near point focusing), the magnification me of the eyepiece is, D
me = 1 + \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{f_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
8. The total magnification m in near point focusing is,
m = m0 me = \(\left(\frac{L}{f_{0}}\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_{e}}\right)\)

9. If the final image is formed at infinity (normal focusing), the magnification me of the eyepiece is,
me = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{f}_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
10. The total magnification m in normal focusing is,
m = m0 me = \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{L}}{f_{0}}\right)\left(\frac{\mathrm{D}}{f_{\mathrm{e}}}\right)\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 25.
Obtain the equation for resolving power of microscope.
Answer:
1. A microscope is used to see the details of the object under observation. The ability of microscope depends not only in magnifying the object but also in resolving two points on the object separated by a small distance dmin. Smaller the value of dmin better will be the resolving power of the microscope.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 79

r0 = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda v}{a}\)
2. then the magnification m is,
m = \(\frac{\mathrm{r}_{0}}{\mathrm{~d}_{\min }}\)
dmin = \(\frac{r_{0}}{m}=\frac{1.22 \lambda v}{a m}=\frac{1.22 \lambda v}{a(v / u)}=\frac{1.22 \lambda u}{a}\)
[∴ m = v/u]
dmin = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda f}{a}\) [∴ u ≈f]
On the other side,
2 tan β ≈ 2 sin β = \(\frac{a}{f}\) ∴ [a = f 2sin β]
dmin = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{2 \sin \beta}\)
3. To further reduce the value of dmin the optical path of the light is increased by immersing the objective of the microscope into a bath containing oil of refractive index n.
dmin = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{2 n \sin \beta}\)
4. Such an objective is called oil immersed objective. The term n sin β is called numerical aperture NA.
d min = \(\frac{1.22 \lambda}{2(N A)}\)

Question 26.
Discuss about astronomical telescope.
Answer:
1. An astronomical telescope is used to get the magnification of distant astronomical objects like stars, planets, moon etc. the image formed by the astronomical telescope will be inverted.
2. It has an objective of long focal length and a much larger aperture than the eyepiece.
3. Light from a distant object enters the objective and a real image is formed in the tube at its second focal point.
4. The eyepiece magnifies this image producing a final inverted image.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 76
Astronomical Telescope

5. The magnification m is the ratio of the angle β subtended at the eye by the final image to the angle ∞ which the object subtends at the lens or the eye.
m = \(\frac{\beta}{\alpha}\)
From the diagram,
m = \(\frac{h / f_{e}}{h / f_{0}}\)
m = \(\frac{f_{0}}{f_{e}}\)
The length of the telescope is approximately, L = f0 +fe

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 27.
Mention different parts of the spectrometer and explain the preliminary adjustments.
Answer:
The spectrometer is an optical instrument used to study the spectra of different sources of light and to measure the refractive indices of materials. It consists of basically three parts. They are
(i) collimator,
(ii) prism table and
(iii) Telescope.

(i) Collimator:
1. The collimator is an arrangement to produce a parallel beam of light. It consists of a long cylindrical tube with a convex lens at the inner end and a vertical slit at the outer end of the tube.
2. The distance between the slit and the lens can be adjusted such that the slit is at the focus of the lens. The slit is kept facing the source of light.
3. The width of the slit can be adjusted. The collimator is rigidly fixed to the base of the instrument.

(ii) Prism table:
1. The prism table is used for mounting the prism, grating etc. It consists of two circular metal discs provided with three levelling screws.
2. It can be rotated about a vertical axis passing through its centre and its position can be read with verniers V1 and V2. The prism table can be raised or lowered and can be fixed at any desired height.

(iii) Telescope:

1. The telescope is an astronomical type. It consists of an eyepiece provided with cross wires at one end and an objective lens at its other end.
2. The distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece can be adjusted so that the telescope forms a clear image at the cross wires when a parallel beam from the collimator is incident on it.
3. The telescope is attached to an arm which is capable of rotation about the same vertical axis as the prism table. A circular scale graduated in a half degree is attached to it.
4. Both the telescope and prism table is provided with radial screws for fixing them in a desired position and tangential screws for fine adjustments.

Adjustments of the spectrometer:
(a) Adjustment of the eyepiece:
The telescope is turned towards an illuminated surface and the eyepiece is moved to and fro until the cross wires are clearly seen.
(b) Adjustment of the telescope:
The telescope is adjusted to receive parallel rays by turning it towards a distant object and adjusting the distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece to get a clear image on the cross wire.
(c) Adjustment of the collimator:
The telescope is brought along the axial line with the collimator. The slit of the collimator is illuminated by a source of light. The distance between the slit and the lens of the collimator is adjusted until a clear image of the slit is seen at the cross wire of the telescope. Since the telescope is already adjusted for parallel rays, a well- defined image of the slit can be formed, only when the light rays emerging from the collimator are parallel.
(d) Levelling the prism table:
The prism table is adjusted or levelled to be in a horizontal position by means of levelling screws and a spirit level.

Question 28.
Explain the experimental determination of material of the prism using a spectrometer.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 77
Angle of prism

1. The prism is placed on the prism table with its refracting edge facing the collimator.
2. The slit is illuminated by a sodium light (monochromatic light). The parallel rays coming from the collimator fall on the two faces AB and AC.
3. The telescope is rotated to the position T1 until the image of the slit formed by the reflection at the face AB is made to coincide with the vertical cross wire of the telescope.
4. The readings of the verniers are noted. The telescope is then rotated to the position T2 where the image of the slit formed by the reflection at the face AC coincides with the vertical cross wire. The readings are again noted.
5. The difference between these two readings gives the angle rotated by the telescope, which is twice the angle of the prism. Half of this value gives the angle of the prism A.

(ii) Angle of minimum deviation (D):
1. The prism is placed on the prism table so that the light from the collimator falls on a refracting face, and the refracted image is observed through the telescope. The prism table is now rotated so that the angle of deviation decreases.
2. A stage comes when the image stops for a moment and if we rotate the prism table further in the same direction, the image is seen to recede and the angle of deviation increases.
3. The vertical cross wire of the telescope is made to coincide with the image of the slit where it turns back. This gives the minimum deviation position.

Angle of Minimum deviation:

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 78
Angle of minimum deviation.

1. The readings of the verniers are noted. Now, the prism is removed, and the telescope is turned to receive the direct ray and the vertical cross wire is made to coincide with the image. The readings of the verniers are noted.
2. The difference between the two readings gives the angle of minimum deviation D. The refractive index of the material of the prism n is calculated using the formula,
n = \(\frac{\sin \left(\frac{A+D}{2}\right)}{\sin \left(\frac{A}{2}\right)}\)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

IV. Conceptual Questions:

Question 1.
Why are dish antennas curved?
Answer:
In order to receive parallel signal rays coming from same direction to fall on a single point; its focus where the receiver is placed.

Question 2.
What type of lens is formed by a bubble inside water?
Answer:
Air bubble has spherical surface and is surrounded by medium (water) of higher refractive index. When light passes from water to air, it gets diverged. So it behaves as a concave lens.

Question 3.
Is it possible for two lenses to produce zero power? Explain.
Answer:

  1. Yes, possible
  2. If one lens is converging lens with some focal length so that its power is P1 = P.
  3. The other lens is a diverging lens with the same focal length with a negative sign, so that its power is P2 = -P.
  4. The combination of these two lenses is given by
    Ptotal = P1 + P2 = P + (-P)
    P = 0

Question 4.
Why does the sky look blue and clouds look white?
Answer:

  1. Blue colour of the sky is due to scattering of sunlight by air molecules. According to Rayleigh’s law, I α \(\frac{1}{\lambda^{4}}\) So blue light (λmin) is scattered much more.
  2. Clouds have large particles like dust and water droplets which scatter light of all colours almost equally. Hence clouds generally appear white.

Question 5.
Why is yellow light preferred to during fog?
Answer:
Yellow light has longer wavelength than green, blue or violet components of white light. According to Rayleigh scattering law yellow colour is least scattered and produces sufficient illumination.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
Two independent monochromatic sources cannot act as coherent sources. Why?
Answer:

  1. Two independent monochromatic sources emit waves of the same wavelength. But the waves are not in phase. So they are not coherent.
  2. This is because atoms cannot emit light waves in same phase.

Question 7.
Does diffraction take place at Young’s double-slit?
Answer:
Yes, light waves arriving at each slit are diffracted and then diffracted waves interfere to produce interference pattern.

Question 8.
Is there any difference between coloured light obtained from prism and colours of soap bubble?
Answer:

  1. Coloured light obtained from prism is due to the phenomenon of dispersion.
  2. Colours of soap bubble are due to interference of light waves from the upper and lower surface of the soap film.

Question 9.
A small disc is placed in the path of the light from distance source. Will the center of the shadow be bright or dark?
Answer:
Waves diffracted from the edge of circular obstacle interfere constructively at the center of the shadow resulting in the formation of a bright spot.

Question 10.
When a wave undergoes reflection at a denser medium, what happens to its phase?
Answer:
Its phase changes at 180 degrees.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

V. Numerical problems:

Question 1.
An object is placed at a certain distance from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. Find the distance of the object if the image obtained is magnified 4 times.
Answer:
Given:
f = 20 cm
m = -4 = \(\frac{v}{u}\)
v = -4u
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 80
u = -15 cm

Question 2.
A compound microscope has a magnification of 30. The focal length of eyepiece is 5 cm. Assuming the final image to be at least distance of distinct vision, find the magnification produced by the objective.
Answer:
me = \(\frac{v}{u}=\frac{\mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{u}_{e}}=1+\frac{\mathrm{D}}{f_{\mathrm{e}}}\)
= 1 + \(\frac{25}{5}\)
= 6
for compound microscope,
m = m0 × me
30 = m0 × 6
m0 = \(\frac{30}{6}\) = 5

Question 3.
An object is placed in front of a concave mirror of focal length 20 cm. The image formed is three times the size of the object. Calculate two possible distances of the object from the mirror.
Answer:
First case when the image is virtual, m = 3
m = \(-\frac{v}{u}\)
3 = \(-\frac{v}{u}\)
v = -3u
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{v}\)
\(-\frac{1}{20}=\frac{1}{u}-\frac{1}{3 u}\)
\(\frac{3 \mathrm{u}}{4}\) = – 20
3u = -40
u = –\(\frac{40}{3}\) cm
Second case when the image is real
m = -3
m = \(-\frac{\mathrm{v}}{\mathrm{u}}\)
-3 = \(-\frac{v}{u}\)
V = 3u
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{\mathrm{u}}+\frac{1}{\mathrm{v}}\)
\(-\frac{1}{20}=\frac{1}{u}+\frac{1}{3 u}\)
\(\frac{3 \mathrm{u}}{4}\) = -20
u = – \(\frac{80}{3}\) cm

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 4.
A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing water to a depth of 80 cm. What is the area of the surface of water through which light from the bulb can emerge out? Refractive index of water is 1.33. (Consider the bulb to be a point source.)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 81
The light rays from the small bulb S which are incident at an angle i > ic are totally internally reflected and cannot emerge out of water surface. The light from the bulb ‘S’ comes out through a circles path of radius r is given by
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 82
Area of the patch = πr²
= π h2 tan2 ic
= 3.14 × 0.802 × \(\frac{9}{7}\)
= 2.58 m2
≈ 2.6 m2

Question 5.
A thin converging glass lens made of glass with refractive index 1.5 has a power of + 5.0 D. When this lens is immersed in a liquid of refractive index n, it acts as a divergent lens of focal length 100 cm. What must be the value of n?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 83

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
If the distance D between an object and screen is greater than 4 times the focal length of a convex lens, then there are two positions of the lens for which images are formed on the screen. This method is called conjugate foci method. If d is the distance between the two positions of the lens, obtain the equation for focal length of the convex lens.
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 84
seperation between object screen is
D = u + v
m1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{V}}{\mathrm{u}}\);
m2 = \(\frac{u}{v}\)
m1m2 = 1
size of image 1 = m1 times the size of object
SI1 = m1S0
SI2 = m2S0
S0 = \(\sqrt{\mathrm{S}_{\mathrm{I}_{1}} \mathrm{~S}_{\mathrm{I}_{2}}}\)
here distance between its two positions of lens where sharp images are obtained
d = v – u
focal length of lens f = \(\frac{\mathrm{uv}}{\mathrm{u}+\mathrm{v}}\)
= \(\frac{(u+v)^{2}-(u-v)^{2}}{4(u+v)}\)
f = \(\frac{\mathrm{D}^{2}-\mathrm{d}^{2}}{4 \mathrm{D}}\)
when D > 4f

Question 7.
A beam of light of wavelength 600 nm from a distant source falls on a single slit 1 mm wide and the resulting diffraction pattern is observed on a screen 2 m away. What is the distance between the first dark fringe on either side of the central bright fringe?
Answer:
β = \(\frac{\lambda D}{d}\)
d = 1mm
λ = 600 × 10-9 m
D = 2m
= \(\frac{6 \times 10^{2} \times 10^{-9} \times 2}{1 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 1.2 mm
Distance between two dark fringes which are on either side of the central bright fringe = 2 × 1.2 mm = 2.4 mm

Question 8.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, the slits are 2 mm apart and are illuminated with a mixture of two-wavelength λ0 = 750 nm and λ = 900 nm. What is the minimum distance from the common central bright fringe on a screen 2 m from the slits where bright fringe from one interference pattern coincides with a bright fringe from the other?
Answer:
Let n1 bright fringe of λ1 coincides with (n+1) bright fringe of λ2.
\(\frac{\mathrm{n} \lambda_{1} \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}=\frac{(\mathrm{n}+1) \lambda_{2} \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}\)
n × 900 × 10-9 = (n + 1) × 750 ×10-9
minimum distance from central maxima = \(\frac{\mathrm{n} \lambda_{1} \mathrm{D}}{\mathrm{d}}\)
= \(\frac{5 \times 900 \times 10^{-9} \times 2}{2 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 4.5 mm

Question 9.
In Young’s double-slit experiment, 62 fringes are seen in the visible region for sodium light of wavelength 5893 Å. If violet light of wavelength 4359 Å is used in place of sodium light, then what is the number of fringes seen? Answer:
n1λ1 = n2 λ2
62 × 5893 A° = n2 × 4358 A°
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 85

Question 10.
A compound microscope has a magnifying power of 100 when the image is formed at infinity. The objective has a focal length of 0.5 cm and the tube length is 6.5 cm. What is the focal length of the eyepiece?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 86
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 87

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Part – II:

12th Physics Guide Optics Additional Questions and Answers

I. Matching type Questions:

Question 1.
Match the column – I and column – II:

Column IColumn – II
A) An object is placed at focus before a convex mirrorMagnification is -∞
B) An object is placed at centre of curvature before a concave mirrorMagnification is 0.5
C) An object is placed at focus before a concave mirrorMagnification is +1
D) An object is placed at centre of curvature before a convex mirrorMagnification is 0.33

a) (A) → (2); (B) → (3); (C) → (4); (D) → (1)
b) (A) → (2); (B) → (4); (C) → (3); (D) → (1)
c) (A) → (2); (B) → (4); (C) → (1); (D) → (3)
d) (A) → (3); (B) → (1); (C) → (2); (D) → (4)
Answer:
c) (A) → (2); (B) → (4); (C) → (1); (D) → (3)

Question 2.
Match the column – I and column – II:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 88
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 89
a) (A) → (3); (B) → (1); (C) → (2); (D) → (4)
b) (A) → (2); (B) → (3); (C) → (4); (D) → (1)
c) (A) → (2); (B) → (4); (C) → (3); (D) → (1)
d) (A) → (3); (B) → (2); (C) → (1); (D) → (4)
Answer:
b) (A) → (2); (B) → (3); (C) → (4); (D) → (1)

Question 3.
Match the column – I and column – II:

Column IColumn – II
A) Mirage(1) Refraction of light
B) Apparent depth of object is lesser than the actual depth in water(2) Scattering of sun Light
C) Blue colour of sky(3) Total internal reflection
D) The formation of rainbow(4) Dispersion of sunlight

a) (A) → (2); (B) → (3); (C) → (4); (D) → (1)
b) (A) → (3); (B) → (4); (C) → (1); (D) → (2)
c) (A) → (4); (B) → (1); (C) → (2); (D) → (3)
d) (A) → (3); (B) → (1); (C) → (2); (D) → (4)
Answer:
d) (A) → (3); (B) → (1); (C) → (2); (D) → (4)

Question 4.
Match the Column I and Column II:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 90
a) (A) → (3); (B) →(1); (C) → (2); (D) →(4)
b) (A) → (4); (B)→ (3); (C) →(2); (D) → (1)
c) (A) →(1); (B) → (2); (C) → (3); (D) → (4)
d) (A) → (3); (B)→ (4); (C) → (1); (D) → (2)
Answer:
d) (A) → (3); (B)→ (4); (C) → (1); (D) → (2)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

II. Assertion – Reason type Question:

Directions:
Each of these questions contains two statements, Assertion and Reason. Each of these also has four alternative choices, only one of which is the correct answer. You have to select one of the code (a), (c) and (d) given below.
a) Assertion is correct, reason is correct, reason is a correct explanation for assertion
b) Assertion is correct, reason is correct, reason is not a correct explanation for assertion
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct

Question 1.
Assertion:
The plane mirror may form a real image.
Reason:
The plane mirror forms virtual image, if object is real.
Answer:
b) Assertion is correct, reason is correct, reason is not a correct explanation for assertion

Question 2.
Assertion:
The focal length of the convex mirror will increase if the mirror is placed in water.
Reason:
The focal length of a convex mirror of radius R is equal to f = R/2.
Answer:
d) Assertion is incorrect, reason is correct

Question 3.
Assertion:
The image formed by a concave mirror is certainly real if the object is virtual.
Reason:
The image formed by a concave mirror is certainly virtual if the object is real.
Answer:
c) Assertion is correct, reason is incorrect.

Question 4.
Assertion:
The image of an extended object placed perpendicular to the principal axis of a mirror, will be erect if the object is real but the image is virtual.
Reason:
The image of an extended object placed perpendicular to the principal axis of a mirror, will be erect if the object is virtual but the image is real.
Answer:
b) Assertion is correct, reason is correct, reason is not a correct explanation for an assertion.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

III. Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
The angle of a ray by a plane mirror or a plane surface is _________ the glancing angle.
Answer:
twice

Question 2.
Critical angle for diamond is _________.
Answer:
24° 41°

Question 3.
At minimum deviation position, the emergent ray is _________.
Answer:
Parallel to the base of the prism

Question 4.
Colours in thin films is due to _________.
Answer:
interference of light

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

IV. Graph Questions:

Question 1.
Figures shows two rays A and B being reflected by a mirror and going as A and B. The mirror
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 91
(a) is plane
(b) is convex
(c) is concave
(d) maybe any spherical mirror
Answer:
(a) is plane

Question 2.
Refraction of light from air to glass and from air to water is shown in figure (i) and figure (ii) below. The value of the angle – in the case of refraction as shown
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 92
(a) 30°
(b) 35°
(c) 60°
(d) 41°
Answer:
(b) 35°
Solution:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 93

Question 3.
The following figure shows refraction of light at the interface of three media
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 94
Correct the order of optical density (d) of the media is
(a) d1 > d2 > d3
(b) d2 > d1 > d3
(c) d3 > d1 > d2
(d) d2 > d3 > d1
Answer:
(d) d2 > d3 > d1
As r2 < i incident ray bend towards normal.
⇒ medium 2 is denser (or) r2 < i1
⇒ medium 3 is denser than medium 1, Also r2 > r1
⇒ medium 2 is denser than medium 3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

V. Choose the Odd man out:

Question 1.
a) interference
b) diffraction
c) reflection
d) Photo electric effect
Answer:
(d) Photo electric effect explains particle nature while other phenomenon explains the wave nature of light.

Question 2.
a) Myopia
b) hypermetropia
c) Astigmatism
d) dispersion
Answer:
(d) dispersion other options are defects of eye.

Question 3.
a) Canada balsam
b) ordinary ray
c) extraordinary ray
d) grating
Answer:
(d) the grating is a component for diffraction while others related, to double reflection wave nature of light.

Question 4.
a) Sunglass
b) Holography
c) Spectrometer
d) 3D picture
Answer:
(c) Polaroids are used in sunglass, Holography, 3-D picture.

VI. Choose the correct pair:

Question 1.

Column IColumn – II
i) Terrestrial telescope(1) final image is erected
ii) Galileo’s telescope(2) final image is inverted
iii) Reflecting telescope(3) Use concave lens for the eyepiece to obtain an erected image
iv) Astronomical telescope(4) No chromatic observation

Answer:
i) Terrestrial _ (1) final image is telescope erected

Question 2.

Column IColumn – II
i) Nice prism(1) Cheap in cost due to availability of flawless calcite crystal
ii)Sky appear blue colour(2) dispersion
iii) Polarisation(3) Sunglass
iv) diamond(4) total internal reflection

Answer:
(iii) Polarisation – Sunglass

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

VII. Choose the Incorrect pair:

Question 1.

Column IColumn – II
i) Interference of light(1) Coherent source
ii) Brewster’s law(2) μ = sin i/ sin r
iii) Diffraction of light(3) Obstacle / aperture size = 1
iv) Law of Malus(4) I = Icos2 θ

Answer:
ii) Brewster’s law – μ = sin i / sin r

Question 2.

Column IColumn – II
i) Reflection(1) Change in the path of light without a change in medium
ii) Refraction(2) μ = sin i / sin r
iii) Interference(3) Fibre-optic communication
iv) Polarisation(4) used for reducing glare.

Answer:
iii) Interference – Fibre-optic communication.

VIII. Choose the correct Statement:

Question 1.
Which of the following statement about laws of reflection is / are correct?
I. The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal all lie in the same plane.
II. Angle of incidence is equal to the angle of reflection.
III. After reflection, velocity, wavelength and frequency of light remains the same but intensity decreases.
Answer:
I, II and III

Question 2.
A convex mirror is used to form the image of an object, then which of the following statements is/ are true?
I. The image is lies between the pole and focus.
II. The image is diminished in size.
III. The image is real.
Answer:
I and II

Question 3.
A convex mirror is used to form the image of an object, then which of the following statements is/ are true?
I. Normal is taken as perpendicular of tangent at the point of incidence.
II. Perpendicular to incident ray which is perpendicular to the plane of incident ray.
III. Line joining centre of curvature of mirror with point of incidence.
IV. Line joining the centre of curvature and pole of curved surface.
Answer:
I and III

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

IX. Choose the incorrect Statement:

Question 1.
Which of the following statement is incorrect?
I. Light diverging from a point source is spherical.
II. Light emerging out of a convex lens when a point source is placed at its focus is plane..
III. the portion of wavefront of light from a distant star intercepted by the earth is plane.
Answer:
I only

Question 2.
Which of the following statement is incorrect?
I. A Polaroid consist of long-chain molecules aligned in a particular direction.
II. Electric vectors along the direction of the aligned molecule in a polaroid gets absorbed.
III. An unpolarized light wave is incident on polaroid. then it will not get linearly polarised.
Answer:
a) III only

Question 3.
Which of the following statement is incorrect?
The resolving power of telescope is limited by
I. focal length of objective lens
II. the diameter of objective lens
III. the wavelength of light used
IV. the thickness of objective lens
Answer:
I and IV

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

X. Choose the correct answer:

Question 1.
When a ray of light enters a glass slab from air
(b) its wavelength increases
(c) its frequency increases
(d) neither its wavelength nor its frequency changes
Answer:
(a) its wavelength decreases
Hint:
Wavelength, λ = \(\frac { Velocity }{ Frequency }\) = \(\frac { u }{ v }\)
When light travels from air to glass, frequency v remains unchanged, velocity u decreases and hence wavelength X also decreases.

Question 2.
If the light moving in a straight line bends but a small in fixed angle, it may be a case of
a) reflection
b) Frequency
c) Velocity
d) Amplitude
Answer:
d) Amplitude

Question 3.
The difference between reflection and total internal reflection is that
a) the laws of reflection hold true for reflection but not for total internal reflection
b) total internal reflection can take place only when light travels from a rarer medium to a denser medium while reflection can take place vice-versa also.
c) reflection can take place when light. travels from rarer medium to denser medium and vice-versa but total internal reflection can take place only when it travels from an optically denser to an optically rarer medium
d) reflection is a natural phenomenon while total internal reflection is man-made.
Answer:
c) reflection can take place when light travels from rarer medium to denser medium and vice-versa but total internal reflection can take place only when it travels from an optically denser to an optically rarer medium

Question 4.
When the angle of incidence of a light ray is greater than the critical angle it gets
a) critically refracted
b) totally reflected
c) total internally reflected
d) totally refracted
Answer:
c) total internally reflected

Question 5.
Which of the following is used in optical fibres?
(a) Total internal reflection
(b) Diffraction
(c) Refraction
(d) Scattering
Answer:
(a) Total internal reflection
Hint:
The working of optical fibres is based on total internal reflection.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
The apparent flattening of the sun at sunset and sunrise is due
a) refraction
b) diffraction
c) total internal reflection
d) Interference
Answer:
a) refraction

Question 7.
The speed of light in an isotropic medium depends on
a) the nature of the source
b) its wavelength
c) its direction of propagation
d) its intensity
Answer:
b) its wavelength

Question 8.
Time image formed by an objective of a compound microscope is
(a) virtual and diminished
(b) real and diminished
(c) real and enlarged
(d) virtual and enlarged
Answer:
(c) real and enlarged
Hint:
The image formed by the objective of a compound microscope is real and enlarged.

Question 9.
The rays of different colours fail to converge at a point after going through a converging lens. This defect is called
a) spherical aberration
b) distortion
c) coma
d) chromatic aberration
Answer:
d) chromatic aberration

Question 10.
What causes chromatic aberration?
a) Marginal rays
b) Central rays
c) Difference in radii of curvature of its surfaces
d) Variation of focal length of lens with colour
Answer:
d) Variation of focal length of lens with colour

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 11.
The focal length of a converging lens are fv and fR for violet and red light respectively. Then
a) fv > fR
b) fv = fR
c) fv < fR
d) any of the three is possible depending on the value of the average refraction index m
Answer:
c) fv < fR

Question 12.
A pencil of light rays falls on a plane mirror and forms a real image, so the incident rays are
(a) parallel
(b) diverging
(c) converging
(d) statement is false
Answer:
(c) converging
Hint:
When converging rays fall on a plane mirror, they get reflected a point d in front of the mirror forming a real image.

Question 13.
If a glass prism is dipped in water, its dispersive power
a) increases
b) decreases
c) does not change
d) may increase or decrease depending on whether the angle of the prism is less than or greater than 60°
Answer:
b) decreases

Question 14.
If D is the deviation of a normally falling light beam on a thin prism of angle A and δ is the dispersive power of the same prism then
a) D is independent of A
b) D is independent of refractive Index
c) δ is independent of refractive Index
d) δ is independent of A
Answer:
d) δ is independent of A

Question 15.
When white light enters a prism, it gets split into its constituent colours, This is due to
a) high density of prism material
b) because μ is different for different wavelength
c) diffraction of light
d) velocity changes for different frequency
Answer:
b) because μ is different for different wavelength

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 16.
Yellow light is refracted through a prism producing minimum deviation. If i1 and i2 denote the angle of incidence and emergence for this prism, then
a) i1 = i2
b) i1 > i2
c) i1 < i2
d) i1 + i2 = 90°
Answer:
a) i1 = i2

Question 17.
The wavelength of sodium light in air is 5890 Å. The velocity of light in air is 3 x 108 ms-1. The wavelength of light in a glass of refractive index 1.6 would be close to
(a) 5890 Å
(b) 3681 Å
(c) 9424 Å
(d) 15078 Å
Answer:
(b) 3681 Å
Hint:
μ = \(\frac { { \lambda }_{ a } }{ { \lambda }_{ g } } \) ⇒λg= \(\frac { { \lambda }_{ a } }{ μ } \) = \(\frac { 5890 Å }{ 1.6 }\) = 3681 Å

Question 18.
The dispersive power of a prism depends on its
a) shape
b) size
c) angle of the prism
d) refractive index of the monitorial of the prism
Answer:
d) refractive index of the monitorial of the prism

Question 19.
The angle of prism is 60° and angle of deviation is 30°. In the position of minimum deviation, the values of angle of incidence and angle of emergence are:
a) i = 45°; e = 50°
b) i = 30°; e = 45°
c) i = 45°; e = 45°
d) i = 30°; e = 30°
Answer:
c) i = 45°; e = 45°

Question 20.
In primary rainbow what is the order of colors observed from earth?
a) Violet innermost, red outermost
b) Red innermost, violet outermost
c) Random
d) White and dark alternatively
Answer:
a) Violet innermost, red outermost

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 21.
A point source of light is placed 4 m below the surface of water of refractive index 5/3. The minimum diameter of a disc which should be placed over the source, on the surface of water to cut-off all light coming out of water is
(a) infinite
(b) 6 cm
(c) 4 cm
(d) 3 cm
Answer:
(b) 6 cm
Hint:
r = \(\frac{h}{\sqrt{\mu^{2}-1}}\) = \(\frac{4}{\sqrt{\left(\frac{5}{3}\right)^{2}-1}}\) = 3 cm

Question 22.
In secondary rainbow what is the order of colours observed from earth?
a) Violet innermost, red outermost.
b) Red innermost, violet outermost.
c) Random.
d) White and dark alternatively.
Answer:
b) Red innermost, violet outermost.

Question 23.
Astigmatism is corrected using
a) Cylindrical lens
b) plano-convex lens
c) Plano-concave lens
d) convex lens
Answer:
a) Cylindrical lens

Question 24.
The focal length of a normal eye-lens is about
a) 1 mm
b) 2 cm
c) 25 cm
d) 1 m
Answer:
b) 2 cm

Question 25.
The image formed by an objective of a compound microscope is
a) real and diminished
b) real and enlarged
c) virtual and enlarged
d) virtual and diminished
Answer:
b) real and enlarged

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 26.
Two lenses of power 3D and -ID are kept in contact. What is the focal length and nature of the combined lens?
(a) 50 cm, convex
(b) 200 cm, convex
(c) 50 cm, concave
(d) 200 cm, concave
Answer:
(a) 50 cm, convex
Hint:
P = P1 + P2 = 3 – 1 = 2D
F= \(\frac { 1 }{ P }\) = \(\frac { 1 }{ 2 }\) m = 50 cm

Question 27.
To increase the angular magnification of a simple microscope, one should increase
a) the focal length of the lens
b) the power of the lens
c) the aperture of the lens
d) the object size
Answer:
b) the power of the lens

Question 28.
In which of the following the final image is erect?
a) Simple microscope
b) Compound microscope
c) Astronomical telescope
d) None of these
Answer:
a) Simple microscope

Question 29.
Dispersion of light is caused due to
(a) Wavelength
(b) intensity of light
(c) density of medium
(d) none of these
Answer:
(a) Wavelength
Hint:
Dispersion is due to the dependence of the speed of a wave on its wavelength in any medium.

Question 30.
The condition for observing Fraunhofer diffraction from a single slit is that the light wavefront incident on the slit should be
a) Spherical
b) cylindrical
c) plane
d) elliptical
Answer:
c) plane

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 31.
Which colour of light has the highest speed
a) violet
b) Red
c) green
d) All the same speed
Answer:
a) violet

Question 32.
Two light waves from S1 and S2 on reaching points P and Q on a screen in young’s double slit experiment have a path, difference zero and λ /4 respectively. The ratio of light intensities at P and Q will be
a) 4 : 1
b) 3 : 2
c) √2
d) 2 : 1
Answer:
d) 2 : 1

Question 33.
What is the Brewster angle for air to glass transition? (µag= 1.5)
a) tan (1.5)
b) sin (1.5)
c) sin-1 (1.5)
d) tan-1 (1.5)
Answer:
d) tan-1 (1.5)

Question 34.
When ordinary light is made incident on a quarter-wave plate, the emergent light is
a) linearly polished
b) circularly polarised
c) unpolarised
d) elliptically polarised
Answer:
d) elliptically polarised

Question 35.
The angular magnification of a simple microscope can be increased by increasing
(a) focal length of lens
(b) size of object
(c) aperture of lens
(d) power of lens
Answer:
(b) size of object

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 36.
Light waves can be polarised because they
a) have high frequencies
b) have a short wavelength
c) are transverse
d) can be reflected
Answer:
c) are transverse

Question 37.
Light transmitted by Nicol prism is
a) unpolarised
b) plane polarised
c) circularly polarised
d) elliptically polarised
Answer:
b) plane polarised

Question 38.
F1 and F2 are focal length of objective and eyepiece respectively of the telescope. The angular magnification for the given telescope is equal to
(a) \(\frac {F_{1}}{F_{2}}\)
(b) \(\frac { { F }_{ 2 } }{ { F }_{ 1 } } \)
(c) \(\frac { { F }_{ 1 }{ F }_{ 2 } }{ { F }_{ 1 }+{ F }_{ 2 } } \)
(d) \(\frac { { F }_{ 1 }+{ F }_{ 2 } }{ { F }_{ 1 }{ F }_{ 2 } } \)
Answer:
(a) \(\frac { { F }_{ 1 } }{ { F }_{ 2 } } \)
Hint:
In normal adjustment of the telescope, \(\left| m \right| \) = \(\frac { { f }_{ 0 } }{ { f }_{ e } } \) = \(\frac { { F }_{ 1 } }{ { F }_{ 2 } } \)

Question 39.
Polaroid glass is used in sunglasses because
a) it reduces the light intensity to half on account of polarisation
b) it is fashionable
c) it has good colour
d) it is cheaper
Answer:
a) it reduces the light intensity to half on account of polarisation

Question 40.
In the propagation of light waves, the angle between the plane of vibration and plane of polarisation is
a) 0°
b) 90°
c) 0°
d) 0°
Answer:
b) 90°

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 41.
In the propagation of electromagnetic waves, the angle between the direction of propagation and plane of polarisation is
a) 0°
b) 45°
c) 9°
d) 180°
Answer:
a) 0°

Question 42.
Rainbow is formed by _______ of light by droplets of water.
a) dispersion
b) partial polarisation
c) plane polarisation
d) interference
Answer:
a) dispersion

Question 43.
The light-gathering power of a camera lens depends on
(a) its diameter only
(b) the ratio of diameter and focal length
(c) product of focal length and diameter
(d) the wavelength of the light used
Answer:
(a) its diameter only
Hint:
The light-gathering power of a camera lens is proportional to its area or to the square of its diameter.

Question 44.
When a ray of light enters a glass slab, then
(a) its frequency and velocity change
(b) only frequency changes
(c) its frequency and wavelength change
(d) its frequency does not change
Answer:
(d) its frequency does not change
Hint:
When a ray of light enters a glass slab, its velocity, and wavelength change while frequency does not change.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

XI. Two Marks Questions:

Question 1.
What is the reflection of light?
Answer:
The bouncing back of light into the same medium when it encounters a reflecting surface is called reflection of light.

Question 2.
Differentiate between real and virtual images.
Answer:

Real imageVirtual image
i. Image can be formed on the screen.Image cannot be formed on the screen.
ii. The image is formed infront of the mirrorThe image is formed behind the mirror
iii. Rays actually coverage at the image.Rays appear to diverge from the image.
iv. Example :

Image formed on a cinema screen.

Example :

Image formed in a plane mirror.

Question 3.
Two light sources of equal amplitudes interfere with each other. Calculate the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities.
Answer:
Let the amplitude by a
The intensity is, I α 4a2 cos22 (Φ/2)
or I = 4I0 cos22(Φ/2)
Resultant intensity is maximum when,
Φ = 0, cos 0 = 1, Imax α 4a2
Resultant amplitude is minimum when
Φ = π cos (π/2) = 0, Imin = 0
Imax: Imin = 4a2 : 0

Question 4.
Give the condition for nature of objects and images.
Answer:

Nature of object/ imageCondition
Real ImageRays actually converge at the image
Virtual ImageRays appear to diverge from the image.
Real ObjectRays actually diverge from the object
Virtual ObjectRays appear to converge at the object

Question 5.
Define pole of a mirror?
Answer:
Pole:
The middle point on the spherical surface of the mirror (or) the geometrical center of the mirror is called pole (P) of the mirror.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 6.
Define radius of curvature?
Answer:
Radius of curvature:
The radius of the sphere of which the spherical mirror is a part is called the radius of curvature (R) of the mirror.

Question 7.
Define Focus or focal point.
Answer:
Focus (or) Focal point:
Light rays travelling parallel and close to the principal axis when incident on a spherical mirror, converge at a point for concave mirror or appear to diverge from a point for convex mirror on the principal axis. This point is called the focus or focal point (F) of the mirror.

Question 8.
Define focal plane.
Answer:
Focal plane:
The plane through the focus and perpendicular to the principal axis is called the focal plane of the mirror.

Question 9.
Define focal length.
Answer:
Focal length:
The distance between the pole and the focus is called the focal length (f) of the mirror.

Question 10.
Define principal axis.
Answer:
Principal axis:
The line joining the pole and the centre of curvature is called the principal axis of the mirror. The light ray travelling along the principal axis towards the mirror after reflection travels back along the same principal axis. It is also called optical axis.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 11.
Define Centre of curvature.
Answer:
Centre of curvature:
The centre of the sphere of which the mirror is a part is called the center of curvature (C) of the mirror.

Question 12.
Define marginal rays.
Answer:
The rays travelling far away from the principal axis and fall on the mirror far away from the pole are called as marginal rays.

Question 13.
Define paraxial ray?
Answer:
The rays travelling very close to the principal axis and make small angles with it are called paraxial rays.

Question 14.
Identify the type of mirror used in each of the application shown below.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 95
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 96
Answer:
a) Concave mirror
b) Convex mirror
c) Plane mirror

Question 15.
Define Optical path?
Answer:
Optical path of a medium is defined as the distance d’ light travels in vacuum in the same time it travels a distance d in the medium.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 16.
What is meant by refractive index?
Answer:
Refractive index of a transparent medium is defined as the ratio of the speed of light in vacuum (or air) to the speed of light in that medium.

Question 17.
What is meant by simultaneous reflection or refraction?
Answer:
The phenomenon in which a part of the light from a source undergoing reflection and the other part of the light from the same source undergoing refraction at the same surface is called simultaneous reflection or simultaneous refraction.

Question 18.
How do you identify a normal mirror and two-way mirror?
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 97
There is a method to test the two-way mirror. Place the fingernail against the mirror surface. If there is a gap between the nail and its image, then it is a regular mirror. If the fingernail directly touches its image then it is a two-way mirror.

Question 19.
Define acceptance angle in optical fiber.
Answer:
To ensure the critical angle incidence in the core-cladding boundary inside the optical fiber, the light should be incident at a certain angle at the end of an optical fiber while entering it. This is called an acceptance angle.

Question 20.
What is meant by Primary focus?
Answer:
The primary focus F1 is defined as a point where an object should be placed to give parallel emergent rays to the principal axis.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 21.
What is meant by secondary focus?
Answer:
The secondary focus F2 is defined as a point where all the parallel rays travelling close to the principal axis converge to form an image on the principal axis.

Question 22.
What is the reason for reddish appearance of sun during sunrise and sunset?
Answer:

  1. During sunrise or sunset, the light has to pass through a greater distance in the atmosphere.
  2. Blue light is scattered most while the red colour is less scattered and reaches the observer.
  3. This is the reason for reddish appearence of sun during sunrise and sunset.

Question 23.
What is meant by double refraction or birefringence?
Answer:
When a ray of unpolarised light is incident on a calcite crystal, two refracted rays are produced. Hence, two images of a single object are formed. This phenomenon is called double refraction or birefringence.

Question 24.
Give the methods of producing polarised light.
Answer:
i) Polarisation by selective absorption
ii) Polarisation by reflection
iii) Polarisation by double refraction
iv) Polarisation by scattering

Question 25.
A lens of glass is immersed in water what will be its effect on the power of the lens?
Answer:
Power of a lens, ρ α (μ – 1). As wμg < aμg so the power of glass lens will decrease when it is immersed in water.

Question 26.
What are the conditions for total internal reflection?
Answer:
i) Light must travel from denser to rarer medium.
ii) Angle of incidence in the denser medium must be greater than critical angle (i > ic).

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

XII. Five Marks Questions:

Question 1.
Distinguish between a wavefront and a ray of light. What are spherical, cylindrical and plane wavefronts?
Give their examples, sketch wavefront corresponding to parallel, converging and diverging rays of light?
Answer:

  1. The focus of All points oscillating in the same phase is called a wavefront, thus every crest or a trough is a wavefront.
  2. A wavefront is defined as the continuous locus of all such particles of the medium which are vibrating in the same phase at any instant.
  3. Thus a wavefront is a surface of constant phase. The speed with which the wavefront moves outwards from the source is called the phase speed.
  4. Different types of wavefront:
    The geometrical shape of a wavefront depends on the source of disturbance some of the common shapes are:

i) Spherical Wavefront:
1. In the case of waves travelling in all directions from a point source, the wavefront is spherical in shape.
2. This is because all such points which are equidistant from the point source will lie on a sphere and the disturbance starting from the source S will reach all these points simultaneously.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 98

ii) Cylindrical wavefront:
1. When the source of light is linear in shape, such as a fine rectangular slit, the wavefront is cylindrical in shape.
2. This is because the locus of all such points which are equidistant from the linear source will be a cylinder.

iii) Plane wavefront:
1. As a spherical or cylindrical wavefront advances, its curvature decreases progressively.
2. So a small portion of such a wavefront at a large distance from the source will be a plane wavefront.
3. A ray of light represented the path along which light travels.
4. If we measure the separation between a pair of wavefront along any ray, it is found to be a constant
5. This illustrates two general principles:

  • Rays are perpendicular to wavefronts.
  • The time taken for light to travel from one wavefront to another is the same along any ray.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 99
6. In case of a plane wavefront the rays are parallel
7. A group of parallel rays is called a beam of light
8. In case of a spherical wavefront the rays either converge to point or diverge from a point.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 2.
What are unpolarised and polarised waves? Explain polarisation, taking an example of mechanical waves. Can longitudinal waves be polarised?
Answer:
1. Polarisation of waves. The waves are of two types:
Transverse and Longitudinal. Both types of these waves undergoes reflection, refraction, interference and diffraction.
2. The difference is that only transverse waves can be polarised.
3. At transverse wave in which vibrations are present in all possible directions, in a plane perpendicular to the direction of propagation, is said to be unpolarised. If the vibrations are perpendicular to the direction of propagation, the wave is said to be polarised or plane polarised. The phenomenon of restricting the oscillations of a wave to just one direction in the transverse plane is called polarisation of waves.

Experimental demonstration:
1. Consider a long string AB passing through two rectangular slits S1 and S2
2. The end B of the string is tied to a hook in a wall and the free end A is jerked in all possible directions perpendicular to the length of the string so as to generate transverse waves in it.
3. The portion AS1 of the string has vibrations in all directions perpendicular to AB, so that the wave is unpolarised.
4. The first slit S1 will permit only those vibrations to pass through it which are parallel to the slit and will cut off all other vibrations.
5. Thus the wave emerging from the slit S1 is plane polarised. The slit S1 is called the polariser. If the second slit S2, called analyzer, is held parallel to S1, the wave from S1 will pass through S2 unchanged. If S2 is held perpendicular to S1, no vibrations will emerge from the slit S2.
6. This indicates that the slit S1 has polarised the incoming wave in the vertical plane.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 100

7. Longitudinal waves cannot be polarised. This is because these waves are symmetrical about the direction of propagation. For example, if we pass a long spring through two sits and generate a longitudinal wave in it by alternately compressing and releasing its free end, it is seen that the compressions and rarefactions pass through the two slits, whatever is their relative orientation.
8. This is so because the oscillations occur along the length of the spring, i.e. along the direction of the wave propagation. On the other hand, the transverse waves can be polarised as they do not show any symmetry about the direction of wave propagation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 3.
What is myopia or short-sightedness? What is its cause? How can it be remedied? Explain by ray diagram
Answer:
Myopia or short-sightedness:
It is a vision defect in which a person can see nearby objects clearly but cannot see the distant objects clearly beyond a certain point. This defect is common among children.

Cause of myopia:
This defect arises due to either of the following two reasons:
i) The eyeball gets elongated along its axis so that the distance between the eye lens and the retina becomes larger.
ii) The focal length of the eye lens becomes too short due to the excessive curvature of cornea.
iii) As a result of the above causes, the parallel rays coming from a distant object do not meet at the retina but at a point in front of the retina, and the distant object is not seen clearly. The object has to be moved closer to the eye to point F to focus it on the retina. Thus the far point of a myopic eye is not at infinity but only a few metres from the eye.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 101
Myopic eye and correction

Correction of myopia:
1. A myopia eye is corrected by using a concave lens of focal length equal to the distance of the far point F from the eye.
2. This lens diverges the parallel rays from distant object as if they are coming from the far point F. Finally, the eye lens forms a clear image at the retina.

Question 4.
How can we determine the focal length and power of the concave lens required to correct a myopic eye?
Answer:
Calculation of focal length and power of correcting lens in myopia:
Let x be the distance of the actual far point from the eye and hence from the concave lens placed close to the eye. The rays coming from infinity, after refraction through the concave lens, appear to come from the far point F.
∴ u = -∞, υ = -x, f = ?
By lens formula,
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{-x}-\frac{1}{-\infty}={-\frac{1}{x}+0=-\frac{1}{x}}\)
∴ Required focal length, f = -x
Required power, P = \(\frac{1}{f}=-\frac{1}{x}\)
The negative sign shows that the correcting lens is a concave lens.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 5.
What is hypermetropia or long¬sightedness? What is its cause? How can it be corrected? Explain by ray diagrams.
Answer:
Hypermetropia or long-sightedness:
It is a vision defect in which a person can see distant objects clearly but cannot see the nearby objects clearly.

Cause of Hypermetropia:
This defect arises due to either of the following reasons:
i) The eyeball becomes too small along its axis so that the distance between the eyelens and the retina is reduced.
ii) The focal length of the eye lens becomes too large resulting in the low converging power of the eyelens.
As a result of the above causes, the rays coming from an object placed at 25 cm (normal near point) from the eye meet at point behind the retina. So the object is not seen clearly.

To focus the rays again on the retina, the object has to be moved away from the eyes to a distance greater than 25 cm, Thus the near point of the eye is not at 25 cm but it has shifted to N’ at a distance greater than 25 cm from the eyes.

Correction of hypermetropia:
A hypermetropia eye is corrected by using a convex lens of suitable focal length.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 102
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 103
Hypermetropic eye and correction

This lens converges the rays such that the rays coming from normal near point N appear to come after refraction, from near point N’ of the defected eye. That is a virtual image of the object placed at N is formed at N’. Then the eyelens forms a clear image at the retina.

Question 6.
What is presbyobia? How does it differ from hypermetropia?
Answer:
Presbyopia:

  1. This defect is similar to hypermetropia i.e. a person having this defect cannot see nearby objects distinctly, but can see distant objects without any difficulty.
  2. This defect differs from hypermetropia in the cause by which it is produced. It usually occurs in elderly persons.
  3. Due to the stiffening of the ciliary muscles, § the eyelens loses flexibility and hence the accommodating power of the eyelens deceases.
  4. Like hypermetropia, this defect can be corrected by using a convex lens of suitable focal length.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 7.
What is astigmatism? How is it caused? How is it corrected?
Answer:
Astigmatism:
It is the defect of vision in which a person cannot simultaneously see both the horizontal and vertical views of an object with the same clarity. This defect can occur along with myopia or hypermetropia.

Cause of astigmatism:
1. This defect occurs when the cornea is not perfectly spherical in shape. It may have a large curvature in the vertical plane than in the horizontal plane or vice versa.
2. If one looks at a wire mesh with such a defect in the evelens, focusing in the vertical plane may not be as sharp as in the horizontal plane or vice versa.
3. Astigmatism results in lines in one direction well focused while those in perpendicular direction will be distorted or curved.
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 104

Correction of Astigmatism:
Astigmatism can be corrected by a lens whose one surface is cylindrical. Such a surface focuses rays in one plane but not in the perpendicular plane. By suitably choosing the radius of curvature and axis direction of the cylindrical surface astigmatism can be corrected.

Question 8.
How can we determine the focal length and power of the convex lens required to correct a hypermetropic eye?
Answer:
Calculation of focal length and power of correcting lens in hypermetropia.
Let y = distance of the near point N’ from the defective eye. Now the near point N of the normal eye is at distance D = 25 cm. The object placed at N forms its virtual image at N’ due to the convex lens.
∴ u = -D, ν = -y,f = ?
By lens formula
\(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{-y}-\frac{1}{-D}=\frac{y-D}{y D}\)

∴ Required focal length
f = \(\frac{y D}{y-D}\)

Required power P = \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{y-D}{y D}\)

As y > D, so both f and D are positive. That is the correcting lens must be a convex lens.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

XIII. Additional Problems:

Question 1.
White light is incident on a small angled prism of angle 5° calculate the angular dispersion if the refractive indices of red and violet rays are 1.642 and 1.656 respectively.
Answer:
Angular dispersion δv – δr = (μv – μr) A
= (1.656 – 1.642) 5°
= 0.070°
Angular dispersion = 0.070

Question 2.
A person runs towards a plane mirror at a speed of 1.5ms-1. with what speed does the image approach the person?
Answer:
The person moves towards the mirror by 1.5 m in one second. Hence the image moves towards the mirror by 1.5 m in one second.
∴ The net displacement of the image with respect to the person is = 1.5 + 1.5 = 3m per second

Question 3.
Calculate the Refractive index of the material. Whose polarising angle is 60°.
Answer:
ip = 60°
tan ip = n
n = tan ip
= tan 60°
n = 1.732

Question 4.
Young’s double slit experiment two coherent sources of intensity ratio of 64 : 1, produce interference fringes. Calculate the ratio of maximum aqd minimum intensities.
Answer:
Given data:
I1 : I2 : : 64 : 1
\(\frac{I_{\max }}{I_{\min }}\) = ?
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 105

Question 5.
A parallel beam of monochromatic light is allowed to incident normally on a plane transmission grating having 5000 lines per centimetre. A second order special line is found to be diffracted at an angle 30° Find the wavelength of the light?
Answer:
Data:
N=5000 lines/cm = 5000 × 102 lines/m
m = 2; θ = 30°; λ = ?
sin θ = Nm λ

λ = \(\frac{\sin \theta}{\mathrm{Nm}}\)

λ = \(\frac{\sin 30^{\circ}}{5 \times 10^{5} \times 2}=\frac{0.5}{5 \times 10^{5} \times 2}\)
λ = 5 × 10-7 m = 5000 Å

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

XIV. Additional problems:

Question 1.
The light of wavelength 590 nm, 596nm are used in turn to study the diffraction taking place a single slit of aperture 2 × 10-1 in. The distance between the slit and the screen is 1.5m. Calculate the separation between the positions of first maximum of the diffraction pattern obtained in the two cases.
Answer:
Wave length of first sodium line,
λ1 = 590 nm
Wavelength of second sodium line,
λ2 = 596 nm
Aperture or width of single slit, d = 2 × 10-4 m
Distance between the slit and the screen, D = 1.5 m
Separation between the first maximum is given by,
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 106

Question 2.
A monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident on a water surface having refractive index 1.33. Find the velocity, frequency and wave length of light in water, μ (refractive index of water)
Answer:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 107

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics

Question 3.
A transmission grating has 5000 lines/cm. Calculate the angular separation in second order spectrum of red line 7070 Å and blue line 5000 Å.
Answer:
(i) sin θ = Nmλ
sin θR = 5 × 105 × 2 × 7070 × 10-10
sin θR = 1/√2
θR = 45°

(ii) sin θB = 5 × 105 × 2 × 5 × 10-7
= 50 × 10-2 = 0.5
θB = 30°
Angular separation (θR – θB) = 45° – 30° = 15°

Question 4.
An object is placed at a distance of 20.0 cm from a concave mirror of focal length 15.00 m. What distance from the mirror a screens should be placed to get a sharp image? What is the nature of image? F=-150m, u = -20 cm
Answer:
F = 150 m, u = -20 cm
a) Samacheer Kalvi 12th Physics Guide Chapter 6 Optics 108
ν = – 60 cm
The screen is to be placed at distance 60 cm to the left of the concave mirror.

b) Magnification, m = \(\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{-v}{u}\)
m = \(\frac{h^{\prime}}{h}=\frac{-v}{u}\) = -3
As magnification is negative, the image is inverted.

Question 5.
The refractive index of a prism material is 1.541. Find its critical angle.
Answer:
Given data:
n = 1.541
ic = sin-1 \(\left(\frac{1}{n}\right)\)
= sin-1 \(\left(\frac{1}{1.541}\right)\)
ic = sin-1 (0.6489)
ic = 40°5′

Question 6.
A microscope has an objective and eyepiece of focal lengths 5 cm and 50 cm respectively with tube length 30 cm. Find the magnification of the microscope in the near point and normal focusing.
Answer:
f0 = 5cm = 5 × 10-2 m;
fe = 50 cm = 50 × 10-2 m;
L = 30cm =30 × 10-2 m;
D=25 cm = 25 × 10-2 m
(i) The total magnification m in near point focusing is,
m = m0 me = \(\left(\frac{L}{f_{0}}\right)\left(1+\frac{D}{f_{0}}\right)\)
Substituting,
m = m0 me = \(\left(\frac{30 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\right)\left(1+\frac{25 \times 10^{-2}}{50 \times 10^{-2}}\right)\)
= (6) (1.5) = 9

(ii) The total magnification m in normal focusing is,
m = m0 me = \(\left(\frac{L}{f_{0}}\right)\left(\frac{D}{f_{e}}\right)\)
Substituting,
m = m0 me
= \(\left(\frac{30 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\right)\left(\frac{25 \times 10^{-2}}{50 \times 10^{-2}}\right)\)
= (6) (0.5)
= 3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Pdf Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Solutions Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

12th Computer Applications Guide Multimedia and Desktop Publishing Text Book Questions and Answers

Part I

Choose The Correct Answers

Question 1.
…………….. refers to any type of application that involves more than one type of media such as text, graphics video animation and sound
a) An executable files
b) desktop publishing
c) multimedia
d) hypertext
Answer:
c) multimedia

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 2.
One of the disadvantages of the multimedia is its……………………
a) Cost
b) adaptability
c) usability
d) relativity
Answer:
a) Cost

Question 3.
Expand JPEG
a) Joint photo experts gross
b) Joint photographic experts group
c) Joint processor experts group
d) Joint photographic expression group
Answer:
b) Joint photographic experts group

Question 4.
You need hardware, software and to make multimedia
a) Network
b) compact disk drive
c) good idea
d) programming knowledge
Answer:
c) good idea

Question 5.
Match the following by choosing the right one
1. Text – TGA
2. Image – MIDI
3. Sound – MPEG
4. Video – RTF
a. 1, 2, 3, 4
b. 2, 3, 4, 1
c. 4, 1, 2, 3
d. 3, 4, 1, 2
Answer:
b. 2, 3, 4, 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 6.
Find the odd one on the following which is not an image format
a) TIFF
b) BMP
c) RTF
d) JPEG
Answer:

Question 7.
……………….. is the process displaying still images they give continuous movement
a) Text formats
b) Sound
c) MP3
d) Animation
Answer:
c) MP3

Question 8.
The live telecasting of real time program through Internet is known as
a) Web casting
b) web hosting
c) data manipulation
d) none of the above
Answer:
a) Web casting

Question 9.
GIF use …………… color look up table
a) 8 bit
b) 8 KB
c) 8 MB
d) 8 GB
e) 13bit
Answer:
e) 13bit

Question 10.
RTF file format was introduced by………………..
a) TCS
b) Microsoft
c) Apple
d) IBM
Answer:
b) Microsoft

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Part II

Short Answers

Question 1.
Define Multimedia and their features.
Answer:

Question 2.
List out Multimedia Components
Answer:
Multimedia has five major components are

  1. Text
  2. Images
  3. Sound
  4. Video
  5. Animation.

Question 3.
Classify the TEXT component in multimedia
Answer:

  • Static Text
  • Hypertext

Question 4.
Classify the IMAGE component in multimedia
Answer:
Images acts as an vital component in multimedia. These images are generated by the Image components are classified in two ways, as bitmap or raster images and as vector images. Raster or Bitmap Images:
The common and comprehensive form of storing images in a computer is raster or bitmap image.

Vector Images:
Drawing elements or objects such as lines, rectangles, circles and so on to create images are based on Vector images.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 5.
Define Animation and its features
Answer:
The animation is the process of displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement.

Features:

  • Using numerical transformations the movement of that image along its paths is calculated for their defining coordinates.
  • Animations may be two or three-dimensional.
  • Animation tools are very powerful and effective.

Question 6.
List out image file formats.
Answer:
TIFF (Tagged Image File Format), BMP (Bitmap), DIB (Device Independent Bitmap), GIF (Graphics Interchange Format), JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group), TGA (Tagra), PNG (Portable Network Graphics).

Question 7.
List out audio file formats
Answer:

  • WAV (Waveform Audio File Format)
  • MP3 (MPEG Layer-3 Format)
  • OGG
  • AIFF (Audio Interchange File Format)
  • WMA (Windows Media Audio)
  • RA (Real Audio Format)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 8.
List out video file formats
Answer:

  • AVI (Audio/Video Interleave)
  • MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group)
  • WMV (Windows Media Video)
  • FLV (Flash Video)
  • MKV (Matroska Video)

Question 9.
Define Multimedia Production
Answer:
In basic terms, multimedia production is any sort of production that uses imagery and a combination of text, audio, and graphics to tell a story.

Question 10.
List out Multimedia Production team members
Answer:
Production Manager, Content Specialist, Script Writer, Text Editor, Multimedia Architect, Computer Graphic Artist, Audio and Video Specialist, Computer Programmer, WebMaster.

Part III

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Briefly explain about Multimedia Components
Answer:
Multimedia has five major components like text, images, sound, video, and animation.

  1. Text: Text is the basic component of multimedia and most common ways of communicating information to other person.
  2. Image: Images act as a vital component in multimedia. These images are generated by the computer in two ways, bitmap or raster images and as vector images.
  3. Animation: Animation is the process of displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement.
  4. Sound: Sound is a meaningful speech in any language and is the most serious element in multimedia, providing the pleasure of music, special effects and so on.
  5. Video: Video is defined as the display of recorded event, scene etc.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 2.
Describe the features and techniques of animation
Answer:
The animation is the process of displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement. In animation, the screen object is a vector image in the animation. Using numerical transformations the movement of that image along its paths is calculated for their defining coordinates.

The least frame rate of at least 16 frames per second gives the impression of smoothness and for natural-looking, it should be at least 25 frames per second. Animations may be in two or three-dimensional. The two-dimensional animation brings an image alive, that occurs on the flat X and Y-axis of the screen, while in three-dimensional animation it occurs along the three axis X, Y, and Z. Animation tools are very powerful and effective. The two basic types of animations are Path animation and Frame animation.

Question 3.
Write roles and responsibilities of Production team members,
Answer:

  • The production team comprises of members playing various roles and responsibilities like Scriptwriter, Production manager, Editor, Graphics Architect, Multimedia Architect, and Web Master,
  • It is for a high-end multimedia project that requires team efforts.
  • The team should understand the strength and limitations of hardware and software,

Question 4.
Describe the various file formats in multimedia.
Answer:
1) Text Formats
RTF; Rich Text Format is the primary file format introduced by Microsoft

2) Image Formats

  • GIF (Graphics Interchange Format): It is a compressed image format,
  • JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group):
  • It was designed to attain maximum image 1 compression,

3) Audio File Formats
• WAV (Waveform Audio File Format): It is the !j audio file format in windows
• MP3 (MPEG Layer-3 Format): MPEG Layer-3 |j format for storing and downloading music,

4) Video Fife Formats:

  • AVI (Audio/Video Interleave): It is the video file format for Windows,
  • MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group): It is a j; standard for generating digital video and au- K dio compression,

5) Explain animation industry and its scope

  • The animation industry encompasses traditional 2D animation, 3D animation and visual effects for feature films.
  • The animation industry is expected to grow at a pace faster than the IT industries.
  • Animation as a career option is a field where you can fulfill your dream of “enjoy-as-you-work” feel satisfied at the end of your day and get praise from your clients as well.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Part IV

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
Explain in detail the Process of Multimedia.
Answer:

Adequate time and efficient planning is required for multimedia production, which assures that the project will proceed smoothly and certainly ensures that the information reaches the target audience. Following are the phases for the development of complex multimedia projects. Multimedia and Desktop Publishing.

Conceptual Analysis and Planning:
The process of multimedia making begins with a conceptual ignition point. Conceptual analysis identifies a appropriate theme, budget and content availability on that selected theme. Additional criteria like copyright issues also are considered in this phase.

Project design:
Once the theme is finalized objectives, goals, and activities are drawn for the multimedia project. General statements are termed as goals. The specific statements in the project is known as the objectives. Activities are series of actions performed to implement an objective. These activities contribute to the Project design phase.

Pre-production:
Based on the planning and design, it is necessary to develop the project.
The following are the steps involved in pre-production:

Budgeting:
Budgeting for each phases like consultants, hardware, software, travel, communication and publishing is estimated for all the multimedia projects.

Multimedia Production Team:
The production team for a high-end multimedia project requires a team efforts. The team comprises of members playing various roles and responsibilities like Script writer, Production manager, Editor, Graphics Architect, Multimedia Architect and Web Master.

Hardware/Software Selection:
All multimedia Application requires appropriate tools to develop and playback the application. Hardware includes the selection of fastest CPU, RAM and huge monitors, sufficient disc for storing the records. Selection of the suitable software and file formats depends on the funds available for the project being developed.

Defining the Content:
Content is the “stuff’ provided by content specialist to the multimedia architect with which the application is developed, who prepares the narration, bullets, charts and tables etc.

Preparing the structure:
A detailed structure must have information about all the steps ‘along with the time line of the future action. This structure defines the activities, responsible person for each activity and the start/end time for each activity.

Production:
In the multimedia application, after the pre-production activities, the production phase starts. This phase includes the activities like background music selection, sound recording and so on. Text is incorporated using OCR software, Pictures shot by digital camera, Video clips are shot, edited and compressed. A pilot project is ready by this time.

Testing:
The complete testing of the pilot product is done before the mass production to ensure that everything is in place, thereby avoiding the failure after launch. If it’s an web . based product its functioning is tested with different browsers like Internet Explorer, Chrome, Mozilla and Netscape Navigator. If it is a locak multimedia application on a LAN it must be deployed in the server for testing purpose. After the testing process are over, the product is incorporated with valid suggested changes.

Documentation User documentation is a mandatory feature of all multimedia projects. The documentation has all the valuable information’s starting from the system requirement till the completion of testing. Contact details, e-mail address and phone numbers are provided for technical support and sending suggestions and comments.

Delivering the Multimedia Product:
Multimedia applications are best delivered on CD/DVD or in the website. In reality, various challenges are faced while delivering through internet, like bandwidth problems, huge number of plug-ins required to play audio and video and long downloading time. Finally, a multimedia application is delivered in a more effective way by the integration of two mediums CD-ROM/DVD and Internet.

Question 2.
Explain in detail Techniques of Animation
Answer:

  • Animation is the process displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement.
  • In animation the screen object is a vector image in animation. Using numerical transformations the movement of that image along its paths is calculated for their defining coordinates.
  • The least frame rate of at least 16 frames per second gives the impression of smoothness and for natural looking it should be at least 25 frames per second.
  • Animations may be in two or three dimensional, jj The two dimensional animation, bring an image alive, that occur on the flat X and Y axis of the screen.
  • While in three dimensional animation it occurs along the three axis X, Y and Z. The two basic types of animations are Path animation and Frame animation.

Path Animation
Path animation involves moving an object on a screen that has a constant background

Frame Animation
In frame animations, multiple objects are allowed to travel simultaneously and the background or the objects also changes.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 3.
Explore the opportunities Animation filed movie industry.
Answer:

In India, the VFX domain, or the animation and visual effects industry has been growing stronger and stronger in recent years.

  1. Animation and visual effects requirement for massive international projects such as HBO’s top TV series and Marvels’ hit Infinity War and Black Panther was outsourced to Indian companies in Mumbai and Pune.
  2. This led to a significant increase in the number of students enrolling for a VFX course.
  3. As such, a student that completes a 3D animation course cap hope to build a rewarding and satisfying career in the Media and Entertainment field these days.
  4. The timeless classics Tom and Jerry and Mickey Mouse created a milestone but the legacy is not disappointing.
  5. Indian animation has risen from an amateur piece of craft like “The Banyan Deer” to the million rupees project “Chhota Bheem”
  6. POGO, the leading cartoon channel in India is the most successful entertainment channel for kids.
  7. Indian animation industry is anticipated to grow faster than the IT industry.
  8. The industry has grown to a multibillion net work standard.
  9. As a result of the growing demand in industry, the scope of animation course in tremendous.
  10. The number of VFX artists and animators that worked on Baahubali was around 750.
  11. Ex. For Top animates Movies: Spider-Man, Incredibles 2, Zootopia, Inside Out, Toy Story 3, Finding Nemo, Frozen, etc.

Question 4.
Explain in detail about production team Roles and Responsibilities
Answer:
1. Production Manager
The production manager should be an expert in technology expert, good at proposal writing, good communication skills, budget management skills, human resource management and act as an efficient team leader.

2. Content Specialist
Content specialist is responsible for performing all research activities concerned with the proposed application’s content.

3. Script Writer
The scriptwriter visualizes the concepts in three-dimensional environments and if needed uses the virtual reality integration into the program.

4. Text Editor
The content of a multimedia production always must flow logically and the text should always be structured and correct grammatically.

5. Multimedia Architect
The multimedia architect integrates all the multimedia building blocks like graphics, text, au-dio, music, video, photos and animation by using authoring software.

6. Computer Graphic Artist
The role of Computer Graphic Artist is to deal with the graphic elements of the programs like backgrounds, bullets, buttons, pictures editing, 3-D objects, animation, and logos etc.

7. Audio and Video Specialist
The roles of these specialists are needed for dealing with narration and digitized videos to be added in a multimedia presentation. They are responsible for recording, editing sound effects and digitizing.

8. Computer Programmer
The computer programmer writes the lines of code or scripts in the appropriate language.

9. WebMaster
The responsibility of the webmaster is to create and maintain an Internet web page. They convert a multimedia presentation into a web page.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 5.
Explain about different file formats in multimedia files
Answer:
a) Text Formats
RTF: Rich Text Format is the primary file format introduced in 1987 by Microsoft

b) Image Formats

  • GIF (Graphics Interchange Format): GIF is a compressed image format. Most of the computer color images and backgrounds are GIF files.
  • JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) : JPEG was designed to attain maximum im-age compression. It uses lossy compression technique,

c) Audio File Formats

  • WAV (Waveform Audio File Format): It is the most popular audio file format in windows for storing uncompressed sound files.
  • MP3 (MPEG Layer-3 Format): MPEG Layer-3 format is the most popular format for storing and downloading music.

d) Digital Video File Formats

  • AVI (Audio/Video Interleave) :AVI is the video file format for Windows. Here sound and picture elements are stored in alternate interleaved chunks in the file.
  • MPEG (Moving Picture Experts Group): MPEG is a standard for generating digital video and audio compression under the International Standards Organization (ISO) by the group of people.

12th Computer Applications Guide Multimedia and Desktop Publishing Additional Important Questions and Answers

Part A

Choose The Correct Answers:

Question 1
……………………….. applications play a vital role in presenting information to the user.
(a) Powerpoint
(b) Multimedia
(c) Star office
(d) PHP
Answer:
(b) Multimedia

Question 2.
Multimedia has …………… major components
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
d) 5

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 3.
What is the plural form of the medium?
(a) medium
(b) mediu
(c) media
(d) median
Answer:
(c) media

Question 4.
Classifications of text are and
a) Static and Hypertext
b) Static and Text
c) Hyper and Text
d) All of the above
Answer:
a) Static and Hypertext

Question 5.
Which is not a multimedia component? [Pick the odd one out].
(a) Test
(b) Image
(c) Sound
Answer:
(a) Test

Question 6.
Images are generated by the computer In ……………..ways.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
a) 2

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 7.
Each pixel consists of colours,
a) two
b) two or more
c) one
d) None of these
Answer:
b) two or more

Question 8.
Vector Images are used to create……………… Objects.
a) Lines
b) Rectangle
c) Circle
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 9.
The readability of the text depends on the ………………………….
(a) pronunciation
(b) spacing
(c) punctuation
(d) b & c
Answer:
(d) b & c

Question 10.
……………..is the process of conducting a conference between more than two participants at different sites by using computer networks
a) Video conferencing
b) Webcasting
c) Web hosting
d) All of the above
Answer:
a) Video conferencing

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 11.
……………… is a free-standing furnished equipped multimedia computer that allows users to retrieve information via a touch screen.
a) Kiosk
b) Maya
c) PHP
d) Python
Answer:
a) Kiosk

Question 12.
Kiosk is usually located near the entrance of the ……………, used for displaying announcements,
a) Library
b) Railway Station
c) Airport
d) Colleges
Answer:
a) Library

Question 13.
Which of the following is not a role of the Multimedia production team?
a) Text Editor
b) Script Writer
c) Production Manager
d) None of these
Answer:
d) None of these

Question 14.
Rich Text Format is the primary file format introduced in………….
a) 1989
b) 1999
c) 1997
d) 1987
Answer:
d)1987

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 15.
In determining the number of colors, ……………………. bits indicates 256 colors.
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 8
(d) 16
Answer:
(c) 8

Question 16.
Match the following
Notepad – 1) Unix, Linux
Gedit or nano – 2) Mac OSX
TextEdit – 3) Windows
Choose the correct order
a) 3 1 2
b) 1 2 3
c) 2 3 1
d) 3 2 1
Answer:
Notepad – 1) Unix, Linux

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 17.
………………….. image format is used for high-resolution or large images.
a) TIFF
b) GIF
c) BMP
d) JPEG
Answer:
c) BMP

Question 18.
Most of the computer color images and backgrounds are ………….. files.
a) TIFF
b) GIF
c) BMP
d) JPEG
Answer:
b) GIF

Question 19.
How many frames per second are needed for normal natural-looking images?
(a) 10
(b) 15
(c) 20
(d) 25
Answer:
(d) 25

Question 20.
Which of the following audio file format used by apple?
a) WAV
b) RA
c) OGG
d) AIFF
Answer:
d) AIFF

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 21.
……………… format is designed for streaming audio over the Internet.
a) WAV
b) RA
c) OGG
d) AIFF
Answer:
b) RA

Question 22.
How many types of animations are there?
(a) 2
(b) 3
(c) 4
Answer:
(a) 2

Question 23.
The process of multimedia making begins with
a) Conceptual Analysis and Planning
b) Project design
c) Pre-production
d) Budgeting
Answer:
a) Conceptual Analysis and Planning

Question 24.
Copyright issues also are considered in
a) Conceptual Analysis and Planning
b) Project design
c) Pre-production
d) Budgeting
Answer:
a) Conceptual Analysis and Planning

Question 25.
………….. is estimated for all the multimedia projects.
a) Conceptual Analysis and Planning
b) Project design
c) Pre-production
d) Budgeting
Answer:
d) Budgeting

Question 26.
Which one of the following is the most serious element in multimedia and provides the pleasure of music, special effects, etc?
(a) Text
(b) Image
(c) Sound
(d) Video
Answer:
(c) Sound

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 27.
………….. phase includes the activities like background music selection, sound recording
a) Testing
b) Production
c) Delivering the Multimedia Product
d) Documentation
Answer:
b) Production

Question 28.
Which of the following is related to documentation?
a) Contact details
b) e-mail address
c) Phone numbers
d) All of the above
Answer:
d) All of the above

Question 29.
………………………….. Sound is a digitized sound.
(a) Recorded
(b) Digital
(c) Frame
(d) Sampled
Answer:
(d) Sampled

Question 30.
The ……………… visualizes the concepts in three-dimensional environments and if needed uses the virtual reality integration into the program.
a) Scriptwriter
b) Production manager
c) Editor
d) Content specialist
Answer:
a) Scriptwriter

Question 31.
The ……………….. integrates all the multimedia building blocks
a) Scriptwriter
b) Multimedia Architect
c) Editor
d) WebMaster
Answer:
b) Multimedia Architect

Question 32.
The responsibility of the ……………….. is to create and maintain an Internet web page.
a) Scriptwriter
b) Multimedia Architect
c) Editor
d) WebMaster
Answer:
d) WebMaster

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 33.
How many categories of Analog videos are there?
(a) 1
(b) 2
(c) 3
(d) 4
Answer:
(b) 2

Question 34.
Research on MPEG-21 “Multimedia Framework” has started in………………
a) 2000
b) 2001
c) 2002
d) 2003
Answer:
a) 2000

Question 35.
Which video format produces low polarity videos?
(a) Analog video
(b) Digital video
(c) Component Analog Video
(d) Composite Analog Video
Answer:
(d) Composite Analog Video

Fill In The Blanks;

1. The Word Multimedia means ………………
Answer:
Multiple forms of media

2. Raster images are also called as ………………
Answer:
Bitmap Images

3. Bitmap is a simple matrix of the tiny dots called ………………
Answer:
Pixel

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

4. ………………techniques are used to reduce the file size of images
Answer:
Compression

5. Video can be categorized in ………………types
Answer:
2

6. ………………and……………… are the categories of video
Answer:
Analog video and Digital video.

7. ………………is the measurement of volume.
Answer:
Decibels

8. A sample of ………………is taken and stored every nth fraction of a second as digital information in bits and bytes.
Answer:
Sound

9. ………………is defined as the display of recorded event, scene, etc.
Answer:
Video

10. The powerful way to convey information in multimedia applications are ………………
Answer:
embedding of video.

11. In ………………, the video data’s are stored in any non-computer media.
Answer:
Analog video

12. Analog video is divided into ………………types.
Answer:
2

13. ………………and ………………are the types of analog video
Answer:
Composite and Component

14. The File extension of WAV files is………………
Answer:
wav

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

15. The File extension of MPEG Layer-3 files is………………
Answer:
mp3

16. The specific statements in the project is known as the ………………
Answer:
Objectives.

17. Multimedia based teaching and learning system named as ………………at GMU.
Answer:
MODULO

18. Banks uses ………………in the form of ATM machines.
Answer:
Kiosks

19. Initially Bitmap format is in use with ………………OS
Answer:
Windows 3.1.

20. Text is incorporated using ………………software
Answer:
OCR

21. ……………… tool is flexible and easy for composing the projects in multimedia.
Answer:
MIDI

Abbreviation

  1. TIFF -Tagged Image File Format
  2. JPEG -Joint Photographic Experts Group
  3. MIDI -Musical Instrument Digital Identifier
  4. RTF -Rich Text Format
  5. BMP -Bitmap
  6. GIF -Graphics Interchange Format
  7. TGA -Tagra
  8. PNG -Portable Network Graphics
  9. WAV -Waveform Audio File Format
  10. MP3 -MPEG Layer-3 Format
  11. AIFF -Audio Interchange File Format
  12. WMA -Windows Media Audio
  13. RA -Real Audio Format
  14. AVI -Audio Video Interleave
  15. MPEG -Moving Pictures Experts Group
  16. ISO -International Standard Organization
  17. LAN -Local Area Network
  18. EDUSAT -Education Satellite
  19. DIB -Device Independent Bitmap
  20. DRM -Digital Right Management

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Assertion And Reason

Question 1.
Assertion (A): The word multimedia consists of two words “multi” and “media”
Reason (R): Multimedia means that multiple forms of media are combined to gather and provide services
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 2.
Assertion (A): Text is the basic components of multimedia
Reason (R): It is one of the most common ways of communicating information to another person.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 3.
Assertion (A); Static text, the text or the words will remain static as a heading or in a line, or in a paragraph.
Reason (R): The words are given along with the images to explain the images.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 4.
Assertion (A): A hypertext is a system which consists of nodes, the text and the links between the nodes.
Reason (R): It defines the paths the user needs to follow for the text access in non-sequential ways.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 5.
Assertion (A): Images act as a vital component in multimedia.
Reason (R): These images are generated by the computer in three ways
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 6.
Assertion (A): Pixel is nothing but a picture element
Reason (R): Pixel is a physical point (tiny dots) in a raster image
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 7.
Assertion (A): Multimedia conferencing or video conferencing is a system that performs face-to-face interactions among participating users.
Reason (R): Located far from each other, as if they were sitting and discussing in a single room.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 8.
Assertion (A): Animation is the process of displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement.
Reason (R): In animation, the screen object is a bitmap image in the animation.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 9.
Assertion (A): Path animation involves moving an object on a screen that has a constant background.
Reason (R): A cartoon character may move
across the screen regardless of any change in the background or the character.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 10.
Assertion (A) MIDI is a standard communication tool developed for computers and electronic instruments.
Reason (R): This tool is flexible and easy for composing projects in multimedia. Tools for synthesizing the sound and software for sequencing are necessary forMIDI.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 11.
Assertion (A): In frame animations, only two objects are allowed to travel simultaneously. Reason (R): In frame animations, the
background or the objects also changes.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 12.
Assertion (A): Sound is a meaningful speech in any language and is the most serious element in multimedia, providing the pleasure of music, special effects, and so on.
Reason (R): Decibels are the measurement of volume, the pressure level of sound.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 13.
Assertion (A): JPEG was designed to attain maximum age compression.
Reason(R): It uses lossless compression technique, where a compression method
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
c) (A) is true and (R) is false

Question 14.
Assertion (A): The process of multimedia making begins with a conceptual ignition point. Reason(R): Conceptual analysis identifies an appropriate theme, budget and content available on that selected theme.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 15.
Assertion (A): Once the theme is finalized objectives, goals, and activities are drawn for the multimedia project.
Reason(R): General statements are termed as goals. The specific statements in the project are known as the objectives.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 16.
Assertion (A): All multimedia Application requires appropriate tools to develop and playback the application.
Reason(R): Hardware includes the selection of the fastest CPU, RAM and huge monitors, sufficient disc for storing the records.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 17.
Assertion (A): Content is the “stuff ” provided by content specialist to the multimedia architect with which the application is developed, Reason(R); Content specialist prepares the narration, bullets, charts and tables.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)

Question 18.
Assertion (A): In the multimedia application, after the pre-production activities, the production phase starts.
Reason(R); This phase includes the activities like background music selection, sound recording and so on.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Question 19.
Assertion (A): In multimedia production, the role of the production manager is to define, and coordinate, the production of the multimedia project in time and with full quality.
Reason(R): The production manager should be an expertise in technology expert, good at proposal writing, good communication skills and budget management skills.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 20.
Assertion (A): The content specialist is not responsible for performing all research activities concerned with the proposed application’s content.
Reason(R): Program content refers to projects
information, graphics, data, or facts presented through multimedia production.
a) Both (A) and (R) are correct and (R) is the correct explanation of (A)
b) Both (A) and (R) are correct, but (R) is not the correct explanation of (A)
c) (A) is true and (R) is false
d) (A) is false and (R) is true
Answer:
d) (A) is false and (R) is true

Find The Odd One On The Following

1. (a) Video
(b) Text
(c) Animation
(d) Audio
Answer:
(b) Text

2. (a) Sound
(b) Video
(c) Graphics
(d) Image
Answer:
(c) Graphics

3. (a) Videotape
(b) Laserdisc
(c) Film
(d) Pen drive
Answer:
(d) Pen drive

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

4. (a) Dots
(b) Rectangles
(c) Lines
(d) Circles
Answer:
(a) Dots

5. (a) GIF
(b) RTF
(c) TIFF
(d)JPEG
Answer:
(b) RTF

6. (a) Bit depth
(b) Resolutions
(c) Decibels
(d) Sample size
Answer:
(c) Decibels

7. (a) Notepad
(b) Gedit
(c) Paint
(d) Nano
Answer:
(c) Paint

8. (a) Flash
(b) Picasa
(c) Photoshop
(d) Text Edit
Answer:
(d) Text Edit

9. (a) TIFF
(b) MPEG
(c) GIF
(d)JPEG
Answer:
(b) MPEG

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

10. (a) RA
(b) AVI
(c) WMA
(d) AIFF
Answer:
(b) AVI

11. (a) Background
(b) Digitizing
(c) Bui Sets
(d) Picture editing
Answer:
(b) Digitizing

12. (a) Recording
(b) Editing
(c) Animation
(d) Sound Effects
Answer:
(c) Animation

13. (a) Script Writer
(b) Text Editor
(c) Multimedia Player
(d) WebMaster
Answer:
(c) Multimedia Player

14. (a) MODULO
(b) EDUSAT
(c) BYJUS
(d) MIDI
Answer:
(d) MIDI

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

15. (a) Scanned Image
(b) Digital Books
(c) Graphics
(d) Nodes
Answer:
(d) Nodes

Choose The Incorrect Pairs:

1. a) Hyper Text, Static text
b) Raster Image, Vector Image
c) Path Animation, Frame Animation
d) JPEG, MPEG
Answer:
d) JPEG, MPEG

2. a) Webcasting and Video Conferencing
b) Audio and Video Specialist
c) Real Audio Format and Tagra
d) Hardware and Software Selection
Answer:
c) Real Audio Format and Tagra

3. a) Sound, Decibel
b) Bitmap, Static Text
c) Hypertext, Links
d) Animation, Vector Image
Answer:
b) Bitmap, Static Text

4. a) Library, Multimedia Kiosk
b) Medical Services, Tiny digital cameras
c) Business Systems, High resolution projectors
d) EDUSAT, Entertainment
Answer:
d) EDUSAT, Entertainment

5. a) GIF, 13-bit Color lookup table
b) Animation, 25 Frames
c) Raster Images, 256 colors
d) Multimedia, 6 components.
Answer:
d) Multimedia, 6 components.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Part B

Short Answers

Question 1.
What are the advantages of vector images?
Answer:
A relatively small amount of data is required to represent the image and thereby only less memory is needed to store.

Question 2.
What are the various of Digital Media?
Answer:
Information are available in digital formats that include digital books, scanned images, graphics, and digitized audio-visual clips, etc stored in Digital Multimedia Library.

Question 3.
Mention some compression formats?
Answer:

  1. GIF – Graphics Interface Format
  2. TIFF – Tagged Image File Format
  3. JPEG – Joint Photographic Experts Group

Question 4.
Write a short note on Vector Images.
Answer:
Drawing elements or objects such as lines, rectangles, circles and so on to create an images are based on Vector images.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 5.
What are the advantages of Vector Images?
Answer:

  • A relatively small amount of data is required to represent the image and thereby only less memory is needed to store.
  • Compression techniques are used to reduce the file size of images that is useful for storing a large number of images and speeding transmission for networked application.

Question 6.
Write a note on MIDI?
Answer:
Musical Instrument Digital Identifier (MIDI) is a standard communication tool developed for computers and electronic instruments. This tool is flexible and easy for composing the projects in multimedia. Tools for synthesizing the sound and software for sequencing are necessary for MIDI.

Part C

Explain In Brief Answer

Question 1.
Write a short note on Hypertext.
Answer:

  • A hypertext is a system which consists of nodes, the text, and the links between the nodes, which defines the paths the user; needs to follow for the text access in non-sequential ways.
  • The author of the working system created this structure. The user is permitted to define their own paths in more sophisticated hypertext systems.
  • The user is provided with the flexibility and choice to navigate in hypertext.

Question 2.
Define composite Analog video? Mention same characteristics of composite Analog video?
Answer:
Composite Analog Video has all the video components like brightness, color, and synchronization combined into one signal. Due to the combining of the video components, the quality of the composite video resulted in color blending, low clarity and high generational loss.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Question 3.
How Multimedia is used in Entertainment?
Answer:

  • The remarkable advancement in the entertainment industry is due to the Multimedia Technology mainly.
  • Thistechnology is needed in all mode of entertainment like radio, TV, online gaming, vid-eo on demand etc.
  • Video on demand or movies on demand is a service that provides movies to television sets on an individual basis at homes.
  • Movies are stored in a centralserver and transmitted througha communication network.

Question 4.
How Multimedia is used InMedicitl Services?
Answer:

  • Medical services are grown drastically with the development of multimedia.
  • Medical Students practices surgery methods via simulation prior toactual surgery.
  • Tiny digital camerasare inserted in human body and it displays the inner scene of the body.
  • In this way the medical practitioners were able to see the inner part without dissecting it.

Question 5.
Explain PNG format?
Answer:
An extensible file format for the less loss, portable and well-compressed storage of raster images. PNG acts as a replacement for GIF and also replaces multiple common uses of TIFF. PNG works good with online viewing applications like world wide web. so it is fully streameable with a best display option.

Question 6.
How Multimedia is used in Multimedia Conferencing
Answer:
Multimedia conferencing or video conferencing is a system that performs face-to-face interaction samong participating users, located far from each other, as if they weresitting and discussing in a ‘ single room.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Applications Guide Chapter 1 Multimedia and Desktop Publishing

Part D

Explain In Detail

Question 1.
How Multimedia is used in Business systems?
Answer:

  • Business applications for multimedia include presentations, training, and internet protocols and soon.
  • The marketing and advertising agencies are using animation techniques for sales promotion.
  • Multimedia is used very commonly for building employee ID.
  • High-resolution projectors are common for multi-media presentations on the road.
  • Cell phones and personal digital assistants with Bluetooth and Wi-Fi communication technology make multimedia communication for business more efficient.

Question 2.
Explain various components of Multimedia?
Answer:
Multimedia has five major components like text, images, sound, video and animation. They are explained in detail below:
1. Text:
is the basic components of multimedia and most common ways of communicating information to other person. Static text, the text or the words will remain static as a heading or in a line, or in a paragraph. A hypertext is a system which consists of nodes, the text and the links between the nodes, which defines the paths the user need to follow for the text access in non-sequential ways.

2. Images:
acts as an vital component in multimedia. These images are generated by the computer in two ways, as bitmap or raster images and as vector images. Raster or Bitmap Images: The common and comprehensive form of storing images in a computer is raster or bitmap image.

3. Vector images:
Drawing elements or objects such as lines, rectangles, circles and so on to create an images are based on Vector images.

Animation is the process displaying still images so quickly so that they give the impression of continuous movement. Path animation involves moving an object on a screen that has a constant background e g. a cartoon character may move across the screen regardless of any change in the background or the character.

4. Frame animation:
In frame animations, multiple objects are allowed to travel simultaneously and the background or the objects also changes.

5. Sound:
Sound is a meaningful speech in any language and is the most serious element in multimedia, providing the pleasure of music, special effects and so on.

6. Video:
is defined as the display of recorded event, scene etc. The powerful way to convey information in multimedia applications are embedding of video. The video can be categorized in two types as Analog video and Digital video.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 7 Python Functions Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Solutions  Chapter 7 Python Functions

12th Computer Science Guide Python Functions Text Book Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer (I Marks)

Question 1.
A named blocks of code that are designed to do one specific job is called as
a) Loop
b) Branching
c) Function
d) Block
Answer:
c) Function

Question 2.
A Function which calls itself is called as
a) Built-in
b) Recursion
c) Lambda
d) return
Answer:
b) Recursion

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
Which function is called anonymous un-named function PTA –
a) Lambda
b) Recursion
c) Function
d) define
Answer:
a) Lambda

Question 4.
Which of the following keyword is used to begin the function block?
a) define
b) for
c) finally
d) def
Answer:
d) def

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 5.
Which of the following keyword is used to exit a function block?
a) define
b) return
c) finally
d) def
Answer:
b) return

Question 6.
While defining a function which of the following symbol is used.
a) ; (semicolon)
b) . (dot)
c) : (colon)
d) $ (dollar)
Answer:
c): (colon)

Question 7.
In which arguments the correct positional order is passed to a function?
a) Required
b) Keyword
c) Default’
d) Variable-length
Answer:
a) Required

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 8.
Read the following statement and choose the correct statement(s).
I) In Python, you don’t have to mention the specific data types while defining function.
II) Python keywords can be used as function name.
a) I is correct and II is wrong
b) Both are correct
c) I is wrong and II is correct
d) Both are wrong
Answer:
a) I is correct and II is wrong

Question 9.
Pick the correct one to execute the given statement successfully, if ………… : print
(x, ” is a leap year”)
a) x%2=0
b) x%4==0
c) x/4=0
d) x%4=0
Answer:
b) x%4==0

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 10.
Which of the following keyword is used to define the function testpython(): ?
a) define
b) pass
c) def
d) while
Answer:
c) def

II. Answer the following questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is a function?
Answer:
Functions are named blocks of code that are designed to do a specific job. If you need to perform that task multiple times throughout your program, you just call the function dedicated to handling that task.

Question 2.
Write the different types of functions.
Answer:

  1. User-defined functions
  2. Built-in functions
  3. Lambda functions
  4. Recursive functions

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
What are the main advantages of function?
Answer:

  • It avoids repetition and makes high degree of code reusing.
  • It provides better modularity for your application.

Question 4.
What is meant by scope of variable? Mention its types.
Answer:

  • Scope of variable refers to the part of the program, where it is accessible, i.e., area where the variables can refer (use).
  • The scope holds the current set of variables and their values.
  • The two types of scopes are – local scope and global scope

Question 5.
Define global scope.
Answer:
A variable, with global scope can be used anywhere in the program. It can be created by defining a variable outside the scope of any function/block.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 6.
What is the base condition in a recursive function
Answer:

  • A recursive function calls itself. Imagine a process would iterate indefinitely if not stopped by some condition. Such a process is known as infinite iteration.
  • The condition that is applied in any recursive function is known as a base condition.
  • A base condition is must in every recursive function otherwise it will continue to execute like an infinite loop.

Question 7.
How to set the limit for recursive function? Give an example.
Answer:
Python also allows you to change the limit using sys.setrecursionlimit (limit value).
Example:
import sys
sys.setrecursionlimit(3000)
def fact (n):
if n = = 0:
return 1
else:
return n * fact (n – 1)
print (fact (2000))

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

III. Answer the following questions (3 Marks)

Question 1.
Write the rules of the local variable.
Answer:

  • A variable with a local scope can be accessed only within the function or block that it is created in.
  • When a variable is created inside the function/block, the variable becomes local to it.
  • A local variable only exists while the function is executing.
  • The format arguments are also local to function.

Question 2.
Write the basic rules for a global keyword in python.
Answer:

  • When we define a variable outside a function, it’s global by default. We don’t have to use the global keyword.
  • We use a global keyword to read and write a global variable inside a function.
  • Use of global keyword outside a function has no effect.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
What happens when we modify the global variable inside the function?
Answer:
It will change the global variable value outside the function also.

Question 4.
Differentiate ceil() and floor() function?

Cell()

Floor ()

ceil () returns the smallest integer greater than or equal to the given value.floor() returns the largest integer less than or equal to the given value.

Question 5.
Write a Python code to check whether a given year is leap year or not
Answer:
n = int (input(“Enter any year”))
if (n % 4 = = 0):
print “Leap year”
else:
print “Not a Leap year”
Output:
Enter any year 2001
Not a Leap year

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 6.
What is a composition in functions?
Answer:

  • The value returned by a function may be used as an argument for another function in a nested manner is called composition.
  • For example, if we wish to take a numeric value or an expression as a input from the user, we take the input string from the user using the function input() and apply eval() function to evaluate its value

Question 7.
How recursive function works?
Answer:

  • Recursive function is called by some external code.
  • If the base condition is met then the program gives meaningful output and exits.
  • Otherwise, the function does some required processing and then calls itself to continue recursion.

Question 8.
What are the points to be noted while defining a function?
Answer:

  • Function blocks begin with the keyword “def”followed by function name and parenthesis() .
  • Any input parameters or arguments should be placed within these parentheses when you define a function.
  • The code block always comes after colon(;) and is indented.
  • The statement “return [expression]” exits a function, optionally passing back an expression to the caller.
  • A “return” with no arguments is the same as return None.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

IV. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain the different types of function with an example.
Answer:

Functions

Description

User-defined functionsFunctions defined by the users themselves
Built-in functionsFunctions that are inbuilt within Python.
Lambda functionsFunctions that are anonymous un-named function.
Recursive functionsFunctions that call themselves is known as recursive.

1. User-defined function:
Functions defined by the users themselves are called User-defined functions.
Syntax:
def :
< Block of statement >
return < expression / None>
Example:
def welcome():
print(“Welcome to Python”)
return

2. Built-in functions:
Functions which are using Python libraries are called Built-in functions.
Example:
x=20
y=-23
print(‘First number = ” ,x)
print(‘Second number = ” ,y)
Output:
First number = 20
Second number = 23
3. Lambda function:

  • Lambda function is mostly used for creating small and one-time anonymous function.
  • Lambda functions are mainly used in combination with the functions like filter]), map]) and reduce]).
    Syntax of Lambda function (Anonymous Functions):
    lambda [argument(s)]: expression

Example:
sum = lambda arg1, arg2: arg1 + arg2
print (The Sum is :’, sum(30, 40)
print (The Sum is sum(-30, 40)

Output:
The Sum is: 70
The Sum is: 10

4. Recursive function:

  • A recursive function calls itself. Imagine a process would iterate indefinitely if not stopped by some condition! Such a process is known as infinite iteration.
  • The condition that is applied in any recursive function is known as a base condition.
  • A base condition is must in every recursive function otherwise it will continue to execute like an infinite loop.
  • Overview of how recursive function works:
  • Recursive function is called by some external code.
  • If the base condition is met then the. program gives meaningful output and exits.
  • Otherwise, function does some required processing and then calls itself to continue recursion.
    Here is an example of recursive function used to calculate factorial.

Example:
def fact(n):
if n==0:
return 1
else:
return n * fact (n-1)
print (fact (0))
print (fact (5))

Output:
1
120

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 2.
Explain the scope of variables with an example.
Answer:
Scope of Variables:
Scope of variable refers to the part of the program, where it is accessible, i.e., an area where you can refer (use) it. We can say that scope holds the current set of variables and their values.
The two types of scopes are local scope and global scope.

(I) Local scope:
A variable declared inside the function’s body or in the local scope is called a local variable.

Rules of local variable:

  1. A variable with local scope can be accessed only within the function/block that it is created in.
  2. When a variable is created inside the function/block; the variable becomes local to it.
  3. A local variable only exists while the function is executing.
  4. The formate arguments are also local to function.

Example: Create a Local Variable
def loc ( ):
y = 0 # local scope
print (y)
loc ( )
Output:
0
(II) Global Scope:
A variable, with global scope can be used anywhere in the program. It can be created by defining a variable outside the scope of any function/block.

Rules of global Keyword:
The basic rules for global keyword in Python are:

  1. When we define a variable outside a function, it’s global by default. You don’t have to useglobal keyword.
  2. We use global keyword to read and write a global variable inside a function.
  3. Use of global keyword outside a function has no effect

Example: Global variable and Local variable with same name
x = 5 def loc ( ):
x = 10
print (“local x:”, x)
loc ( )
print (“global x:”, x)
Output:
local x: 10
global x: 5
In the above code, we used same name ‘x’ for both global variable and local variable. We get a different result when we print same variable because the variable is declared in both scopes, i.e. the local scope inside the function loc() and global scope outside the function loc ( ).
The output:- local x: 10, is called local scope of variable.
The output: – global x: 5, is called global scope of variable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
Explain the following built-in functions.
Answer:
a) id()
b) chr()
c) round ()
d) type()
e) pow()
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions 1
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions 2

Question 4.
Write a Python code to find the L.C.M. of two numbers.
Answer:
Program:
# Python Program to find the L.C.M. of two input number
defcompute_lcm(x, y):
# choose the greater number
if x > y:
greater = x
else:
greater = y
while (True):
if((greater % x == 0) and (greater % y == 0)):
1cm = greater
break
greater += 1
return 1cm
num1=int(input(//Enter first number=”))
num2=int(input(“Enter second number=”))
print
(“The L.C.M. is”, compute_lcm(num1, num2))
Output:
Enter first number=8
Enter second number=4
The L.C.M. is 8

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 5.
Explain the recursive function with an example.
Answer:
Python recursive functions
When a function calls itself is known as recursion. Recursion works like loop but sometimes it makes more sense to use recursion than loop. You can convert any loop to recursion.
A recursive function calls itself. Imagine a process would iterate indefinitely if not stopped by some condition! Such a process is known as infinite iteration. The condition that is applied in any recursive function is known as base condition. A base condition is must in every recursive function otherwise it will continue to execute like an infinite loop.

Working Principle:

  1. Recursive function is called by some external code.
  2. If the base condition is met then the program gives meaningful output and exits.
  3. Otherwise, function does some required processing and then calls itself to continue recursion. Here is an example of recursive function used to calculate factorial.

Example:
def fact (n):
if n = = 0:
return 1
else:
return n * fact (n – 1)
print (fact (0))
print (fact (5))
Output:
1
120

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

12th Computer Science Guide Python Functions Additional Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer

Question 1.
The name of the function is followed by ………………………….
(a) ( )
(b) [ ]
(c) <>
(d) { }
Answer:
(a) ( )

Question 2.
Which of the following provides better modularity for your python application
a) tuples
b) function
c) dictionaries
d) control structures
Answer:
b) function.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
How many types of functions are there in python?
a) 3
b) 2
c) 4
d) 5
Answer:
c) 4

Question 4.
Functions that call itself are known as
a) User-defined
b) Built-in
c) Recursive
d) Lambda
Answer:
c) Recursive

Question 5.
If the return has no argument, …………………………….. will be displayed as the last statement of the output.
(a) No
(b) None
(c) Nothing
(d) No value
Answer:
(b) None

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 6.
In which of the following the number of arguments in the function call should match exactly with the function definition?
a) Keyword arguments
b) Required arguments
c) Default arguments
d) Variable-length arguments
Answer:
b) Required arguments

Question 7.
Which of the following is used to define variable-length arguments?
a) $
b) *
c) #
d) //
Answer:
b) *

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 8.
What is the symbol used to denote variable-length arguments?
(a) +
(b) *
(c) &
(d) ++
Answer:
(b) *

Question 9.
Which function can take any number of arguments and must return one value in the form of an expression?
a) user-defined
b) recursive
c) default
d) lambda
Answer:
d) lambda

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 10.
How many return statement is executed at runtime?
a) 2
b) multiple
c) 3
d) 1
Answer:
d) 1

Question 11.
How many types of scopes in Python?
a) 3
b) 4
c) many
d) 2
Answer:
d) 2

Question 12.
Lambda functions cannot be used in combination with ………………………….
(a) Filter
(b) Map
(c) Print
(d) Reduce
Answer:
(c) Print

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 13.
Function blocks begin with the keyword …………………
a) Fun
b) Definition
c) Function
d) Def
Answer:
d) Def

Question 14.
………………. function can only access global variables.
a) user-defined
b) recursive
c) Lambda
d) return
Answer:
c) Lambda

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 15.
Find the correct one:
(a) Global keyword outside the function has no effect
(b) Global keyword outside the function has an effect
Answer:
(a) Global keyword outside the function has no effect

II. Answer the following questions (2 and 3 Marks)

Question 1.
Define nested blocks?
Answer:
Nested Block:
A block within a block is called a nested block. When the first block statement is indented by a single tab space, the second block of statement is indented by double tab spaces.

Question 2.
Differentiate parameters and arguments.
Answer:

Parameters

Arguments

Parameters are the variables used in the function definition.Arguments are the values we pass to the function parameters.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 3.
Differentiate parameters and arguments?
Answer:
Parameters are the variables used in the function definition whereas arguments are the values we pass to the function parameters.

Question 4.
Write the syntax of variable-length arguments.
Answer:
def function_name(*args):
function_body
return_statement

Question 5.
What are the methods used to parse the arguments to the variable length arguments?
Answer:
In Variable Length arguments, we can parse the arguments using two methods.

  • Non-keyword variable arguments
  • Keyword variable arguments

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 6.
What is a local variable?
Answer:
A variable declared inside the function’s body or in the local scope is known as a local variable.

Question 7.
What are the two methods of passing arguments in variable-length arguments?
Answer:
In Variable Length arguments, we can pass the arguments using two methods.

  1. Non-keyword variable arguments
  2. Keyword variable arguments

Question 8.
Write a note on return statement?
Answer:
The return Statement

  1. The return statement causes your function to exit and returns a value to its caller. The point of functions in general is to take inputs and return something.
  2. The return statement is used when a function is ready to return a value to its caller. So, only one return statement is executed at run time even though the function contains multiple return statements.
  3. Any number of ‘return’ statements are allowed in a function definition but only one of them is executed at run time.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 9.
Write a note on min (), max () and sum () with an example
Answer:
Function: min ()
Description: Returns the minimum value in a list.
Syntax: min (list)
Example:
My List = [21,76,98,23]
print (‘Minimum of My List:’,
min(My List))
Output:
Minimum of My List: 21
Function.: max ()
Description:
Returns the maximum value in a list.
Syntax : min (list)
Example:
My List = [21,76,98,23]
print (‘maximum of My List :‘, max
(my list)
Output:
Maximum of My List: 98
Function : sum ()
Description:
Returns the sum of values in a list.
Syntax :sum (list)
Example:
My List = [21,76,98,23]
print (Sum of My List :‘, sum(My List))
Output:
Sum of My List :218

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 10.
Write a note on the floor, cell () and sqrt () with an example
Answer:
Function: floor ()
Description: Returns the largest integer
less than or equal to x.
Syntax: math.floor (x)
Example:
x=26.7
y=-26.7
print (math.floor (x))
print (math.floor (y))
Output:
26
-27
Function: ceil ()
Description: Returns the smallest integer greater than or equal to x.
Syntax: math.ceil (x)
Example:
x=26.7
y=-26.7
print (math.ceil (x))
print (math.ceil (y))
Output:
27
-26 . ‘
Function : sqrt ()
Description: Returns the square root of x (Note: x must be greater than zero) Syntax: sqrt (x)
Example:
a=49
b= 25
print (math.sqrt (a))
print (math.sqrt (b))
Output:
7.0
5.0

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

Question 11.
Write a note on the format () with an example.
Answer:
Function: format ()
Description:
Returns the output based on the given format.

  • Binary format: Outputs the number in base 2.
  • Octal format: Outputs the number in base 8.
  • Fixed-point notation: Displays the number as a fixed-point number. The default precision is 6.

Syntax : format (value [‚format_spec])
Example:
x=14
y=25
print (‘x value in binary :’,format(x/b’))
print (‘y value in octal ^formatfy/o’))
print(‘y value in Fixed-point no ‘,format(y/f’))
Output:
x value in binary: 1110
y value in octal: 31
y value in Fixed-point no : 25.000000

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 7 Python Functions

III. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain different types of arguments used in python with an example.
Answer:

  • Arguments are used to call a function.
  • There are primarily four types of functions namely:
    1. Required arguments
    2. Keyword arguments,
    3. Default arguments
    4. Variable-length arguments.

Required Arguments:

  • “Required Arguments” are the arguments passed to a function in correct positional order.
  • The number of arguments in the function call should match exactly with the function definition.
  • Atleast one parameter to prevent syntax errors to get the required output.

Example:
defprintstring(str):
print (“Example – Required arguments”)
print (str)
return
# Now you can call printstring() function
printstring (“Welcome”)

Output:
Example – Required arguments Welcome
When the above code is executed, it
produces the following error.
Traceback (most recent call last):
File “Req-arg.py”, line 10, in < module >
printstring()
TypeError: printstring() missing 1
required positional argument: ‘str’
Instead of printstring() in the above code if we use printstring (“Welcome”) then the output is
Output:
Example – Required arguments Welcome

Keyword Arguments:

  • Keyword arguments will invoke the function after the parameters are recognized by their parameter names.
  • The value of the keyword argument is matched with the parameter name and so, one can also put arguments in improper order (not in order).

Example:
def printdata (name):
print (“Example-1 Keyword arguments”)
print (“Name : “:name)
return
# Now you can call printdatat() function
print data(name = “Gshan”) When the above code is executed, it produces the following output:

Output:
Example-1 Keyword arguments
Name: Gshan
Default Arguments:

  • In Python the default argument is an argument that takes a default value if no value is provided in the function call.
  • The following example uses default arguments, that prints default salary when no argument is passed.

Example:
def printinfo( name, salary = 3500):
print (“Name:”, name)
print (“Salary: “, salary)
return
printinfo(“Mani”)
When the above code is executed, it produces the following output

Output:
Name: Mani
Salary: 3500
When the above code is changed as print info(“Ram,”:2000) it produces the following

Output:
Name: Ram
Salary: 2000

Variable-Length Arguments:

  • In some instances, it is needed to pass more arguments that have already been specified.
  • These arguments are not specified in the function’s definition and an asterisk (*) is used to define such arguments.
  • These types of arguments are called Variable-Length arguments.

Syntax:
def function_name(*args):
function_body
return_statement

Example:
def printnos (*nos):
for n in nos:
print(n)
return
# now invoking the printnos() function
print (‘Printing two values’)
printnos (1,2)
Print (‘Printing three values’)
printnos (10,20,30)

Output:
Printing two values
1
2
Printing three values
10
20
30

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

12th Computer Science Guide Strings and String Manipulations Text Book Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer (1 Marks)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 1.
Which of the following is the output of the following python code?
str1=”TamilNadu”
print(strl[::-1])
a) Tamilnadu
b) Tmlau
c) udanlimaT
d) udaNlimaT
Answer:
d) udaNlimaT

Question 2.
What will be the output of the following code?
str1 = “Chennai Schools”
str1[7] =
a) Chennai-Schools
b) Chenna-School
c) Type error
d) Chennai
Answer:
a) Chennai-Schools

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 3.
Which of the following operator is used for concatenation?
a) +
b) &
c) *
d) =
Answer:
a) +

Question 4.
Defining strings within triple quotes allows creating:
a) Single line Strings
b) Multiline Strings
c) Double line Strings
d) Multiple Strings
Answer:
b) Multiline Strings

Question 5.
Strings in python:
a) Changeable
b) Mutable
c) Immutable
d) flexible
Answer:
c) Immutable

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 6.
Which of the following is the slicing operator?
a) {}
b) []
c) <>
d) ()
Answer:
b) [ ]

Question 7.
What is stride?
a) index value of slide operation
b) first argument of slice operation
c) the second argument of slice operation
d) third argument of slice operation
Answer:
d) third argument of slice operation

Question 8.
Which of the following formatting character is used to print exponential notation in the upper case?
a) %e
b) %E
c) %g
d) %n
Answer:
a) %e

Question 9.
Which of the following is used as placeholders or replacement fields which get replaced along with the format() function?
a) {}
b) <>
c) ++
d) ^^
Answer:
a) {}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 10.
The subscript of a string may be:
a) Positive
b) Negative
c) Both (a) and (b)
d) Either (a) or (b)
Answer:
d) Either (a) or (b)

II. Answer the following questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is String?
Answer:
String is a data type in python, which is used to handle array of characters. String is a sequence of Unicode characters that may be a combination of letters, numbers, or special symbols enclosed within single, double or even triple quotes.
Example:
‘Welcome to learning Python’
“Welcome to learning Python”
“Welcome to learning Python”

Question 2.
Do you modify a string in Python?
Answer:

  • No, because strings in python are immutable.
  • That means once you define a string, modifications or deletion is not allowed.
  • If we want to modify the string, a new string value can be assigned to the existing string variable.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 3.
How will you delete a string in Python?
Answer:
Python will not allow deleting a particular character in a string. Whereas you can remove the entire string variable using the del command.
Example: Code lines to delete a string variable
>>> str1=”How about you”
>>> print (str1)
How about you
>>> del str1
>>> print (str1)
NameError: name ‘str1’ is not defined

Question 4.
What will be the output of the following python code?
str1= “School”
print(str1*3)
Output:
School School School

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 5.
What is slicing?
Answer:
String slicing:
Slice is a substring of a main string. A substring can be taken from the original string by using [ ] operator and index or subscript values. Thus, [ ] is also known as slicing operator. Using slice operator, we can slice one or more substrings from a main string.

General format of slice operation:
str[start:end]
Where start is the beginning index and end is the last index value of a character in the string. Python takes the end value less than one from the actual index specified. For example, if you want to slice first 4 characters from a string, you have to specify it as 0 to 5. Because python considers only the end value as n – 1.
Example: slice a single character from a string
>>> str1=”THIRUKKURAL”
>>> print (str1[0])
T

III. Answer the following questions (3 Marks)

Question 1.
Write a Python program to display the given pattern
C O M P U T E R
C O M P U T E
C O M P U T
C O M P U
C O M P
C O M
C O
C
Coding:
str 1=” COMPUTER”
index=len(str1)
for i in str1:
print(strl[0:index])
index-=1
Output:
>>>
RESTART: C:/Users/COMPUTER/
AppData/Local/Programs/Python/ Python37-32/compl.py ‘
COMPUTER
COMPUTE
COMPUT
COMPU
COMP
COM
CO
C

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 2.
Write a short note about the following with suitable example:
(a) capitalize()
(b) swapcase()
Answer:
(a) Function: capitalize()
Syntax: capitalize ()
Description: Used to capitalize the first character of the string

Example:
>>>city=”chennai”
>>>print(city. capitalize())
Chennai

Function: swapcase ()
Syntax: It will change case of every ‘ character to its opposite case vice-versa.
Description:

Example:
>>>strl=”tAmil.NaDu”
>>>print (str1. swapcase ())
TaMIlnAdU

Question 3.
What will be the output of the given python program?
str1 = “welcome”
str2 = “to school”
str3=str1[:2]+str2[len(str2)-2:] print(str3)
Output:
>>>
RESTART: C:/Users/COMPUTER/
AppData/Local/Programs/Python/ Python37-32/ compl.py
weol
>>>

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 4.
What is the use of format()? Give an example.
Answer:
The format( ) function used with strings is very versatile and powerful function used for formatting strings. The curly braces { } are used as placeholders or replacement fields which get replaced along with format( ) function.
Example:
num1 = int (input (“Number 1: “))
num2 = int (input (“Number 2: “))
print (“The sum of { } and { } is { }”.format (num1, num2,(num1 + num2)))
OutPut:
Number 1 : 34
Number 2 : 54
The sum of 34 and 54 is 88.

Question 5.
Write a note about count( ) function in python.
Answer:
Function: count()
Syntax: count (str, beg, end)

Description:

  • Returns the number of substrings occurs within the given range.
  • Substring may be a single character.
  • Range (beg and end) arguments are optional. If it is not given, python searched in whole string.
  • Search is case sensitive.

Example:
>>>strl=” Raja RajaChozhan >>> print(strl.count(/Raja’))
2
>>>print(strl.count(‘r’))
0
>>>print(strl.count(‘R’))
2
>>>prin(strl.count(‘a’))
5
>>>print (strl.count(‘a’,0.5))
2
>>>prin(strl.count(/a’,11))
1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

IV. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain string operators in python with suitable examples.
Answer:
String Operators:
Python provides the following operators for string operations. These operators are useful to manipulate strings.

(i) Concatenation (+):
The joining of two or more strings is called Concatenation. The plus (+) operator is used to concatenate strings in python.
Example:
>>> “welcome” + “Python”
‘welcomePython’

(ii) Append (+=):
Adding more strings at the end of an existing string is known as append. The operator += is used to append a new string with an existing string.
Example:
>>> str1 =”Welcome to ”
>>> str1+=”Leam Python”
>>> print (str1)
Welcome to Learn Python

(iii) Repeating (*):
The multiplication operator (*) is used to display a string in multiple times.
Example:
>>> str1 =”Welcome”
>>> print (str1*4)
Welcome Welcome Welcome Welcome

(iv) String slicing:
A slice is a substring of the main string. A substring can be taken from the original string by using [ ] operator and index or subscript values. Thus, [ ] is also known as the slicing operator. Using the slice operator, you have to slice one or more substrings from the main string.
The general format of slice operation:
str[start: end]
Where start is the beginning index and end is the last index value of a character in the string. Python takes the end value less than one from the actual index specified. For example, if you want to slice the first 4 characters from a string, you have to specify it as 0 to 5. Because python considers only the end value as n – 1.
Example:
(i) slice a single character from a string
>>> str1=”THIRUKKURAL ”
>>> print (str1 [0])
T.

(v) Stride when slicing string
When the slicing operation, you can specify a third argument as the stride, which refers to the number of characters to move forward after the first character is retrieved from the string. The default value of stride is 1.
Example:
>>> str1= “Welcome to learn Python”
>>> print (str1 [10:16])
learn
Note: Remember that, python takes the last value as n – 1
You can also use negative value as stride (third argument). If you specify a negative value, it prints in reverse order.
Example:
>>> str1 = “Welcome to learn Python”
>>> print(str1 [::-2])
nhy re teoIW

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer (1 Mark)

Question 1.
Strings in Python can be created using ………………………….. quotes
(a) Single
(b) Double
(c) Triple
(d) All the above
Answer:
(d) All the above

Question 2.
Strings are enclosed with
a) ”
b) ” ”
c) ”’ ”’
d) all of these
Answer:
d) all of these

Question 3.
The positive subscript of the string starts from ………………………….. and ends with …………………………
Answer:
0, n – 1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 4.
Another name of String index values are
a) class
b) subscript
c) function
d) arguments
Answer:
b) subscript

Question 5.
…………… is used to access and manipulate the strings
a) Index value
b) Subscript
c) Parameters
d) a or b
Answer:
d) a or b

Question 6.
Which function is used to change all occurrences of a particular character in a string?
(a) Replace ( )
(b) Change ( )
(c) Edit ( )
(d) Append ( )
Answer:
(a) Replace ( )

Question 7.
The negative subscript is always begun with
a) 0
b) -1
c) 1
d) -1.0
Answer:
b) -1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 8.
Which of the following operators are useful to do string manipulation?
a) +, –
b) *,/
c) + *
d) ; ”
Answer:
c) + *

Question 9.
Adding more strings at the end of existing strings is ………………………….
(a) Append
(b) Concatenation
(c) Repeating
(d) Slicing
Answer:
(a) Append

Question 10.
Python provides a function to change all occurrences of a particular character in a string.
a) replace()
b) change ()
c) change all ()
d) repalce all ()
Answer:
a) replace()

Question 11.
The operator is used to append a new string with an existing string.
a) +
b) + =
c) * =
d) + +
Answer:
b) + =

Question 12.
The operator is used to display a string multiple times.
a) *
b) * *
c) * =
d) + +
Answer:
a) *

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 13.
Escape sequences starts with a
a) /
b) \
c) //
d) \”
Answer:
b) \

Question 14.
In python, the end value is considered as ……………………….
(a) 0
(b) n
(c) n – 1
(d) 1
Answer:
(c) n – 1

Question 15.
The ……………. function is a powerful function used for formatting strings.
a) format ()
b) string ()
c) Slice ()
d) format string ()
Answer:
a) format ()

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 16.
Formatting operator which is used to represent signed decimal integer.
a) %d or %i
b) %s or %c
c) %g or %x
d) % s or %e
Answer:
a) %d or %i

II. Answer the following questions (2 and 3 Marks)

Question 1.
Write the general format of slice operation.
Answer:
General format of slice operation: str[start:end]
Start is the beginning index and End is the last index value of a character in the string.
Python takes the end value less than one from the actual index specified.

Question 2.
What is meant by stride?
Answer:

  • A slice is a substring of the main string.
  • Stride is a third argument in the slicing operation which refers to the number of characters to move forward after the first character is retrieved from the string.
  • The default value of stride is 1.

Example:
>>> strl = “Welcome to learn Python”
>>>print(str1[::-2])
Output:
nhy re teolW

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 3.
Write a note on Append Operator?
Answer:
Append (+=)
Adding more strings at the end of an existing string is known as append.
The operator += is used to append a new string with an existing string.
Example:
>>> str1=’Welcome to ”
>>> str1+=”Leam Python”
>>> print (str1)
Welcome to Learn Python

Question 4.
What is the use of find () function? Explain with an example.
Answer:
Function: find ()
Syntax:
find(sub[,start[, end]])
Description:

  • The function is used to search the first occurrence of the substring in the given string.
  • It returns the index at which the substring starts.
  • It returns -1 if the substring does not occur in the string.

Example:
>>> strl=’mammals’
>>> strl.find(‘ma’)
0
On omitting the start  parameters, the function  starts the search from the  beginning.
>>> str1.find(/ma/2)
3
>>> str1.find(‘ma’,2,4)
-1
Displays -1 because the substring could not be found between the index 2 and 4-1

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 5.
Write a note on lower () and is lower () functions.
Answer:
Function lower ()
Syntax:
lower ()

Description:
Returns the exact copy of the string with all the letters in lowercase
Example:

>>> strl=’SAVE EARTH’
>>>print(strl.lower())
save earth

Function :islower()
Syntax:
islower()

Description:
Returns True if the string is in lowercase
Example:
>>>str1=’welcome’
>>> print (strl.islower())
True

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 6.
Differentiate upper () and isupper ().
Answer:

upper ()isupper ()
Function :upper()
Syntax: ‘upper()
Description:
Returns the exact copy of the string with all letters in uppercase
Example:
>>>str1=’welcome’
>>>print(str.upper())
WELCOME
Function: isupper()
Syntax:
isupper()
Description:
Returns True if the string is in uppercase.
Example:
>>>strl=’welcome’
>>>pr int (strl. isupper())
False

Question 7.
What will be the output of the given Python program?
Answer:
str=”COMPUTER SCIENCE”
(a) print(str*2)
(b) print{str[0: 7])
Output:
Str=” COMPUTER SCIENCE”
i) print(str*2) → COMPUTER SCIENCE
COMPUTER SCIENCE
ii) print(str[0 : 7])→ COMPUTE

Question 8.
Write notes on (a) isalnum (),
(b) isalpha () and (c) isdigit ()
Answer:
Function: isalnum ()
Syntax: isalnum ()

Description:

  • Returns True if the string contains only letters and digits. It returns False.
  • If the string contains any special character like *, etc.

Example1:
>>>str1=’Save Earth’
>>>str1. isalnum()
False
The function returns False as space is an alphanumeric character.

Example 2:
>>>strl=,savelEarth’.
>>>isalnum()
True

Function: isalpha()
Syntax: isalpha ()
Description:
Returns True if the string contains only letters Otherwise return False.

Example:
>>> str1=’SaveiEarth’
>>>str1.isalpha()
False
>>> str1-‘SaveEarth’
>>>str1 .isalpha ()
True
>>>
Function: isdigit ()
Syntax: isdigit ()

Description:
Returns True if the string contains only numbers. Otherwise it returns False

Example 1:
>>>str1=’SavelEarth’
>>>str1.isdigit()
False

Example 2:
>>> str1=’12345′
>>>str1.isdigit()
True
>>>

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 9.
Write notes on Formatting Characters
Answer:

Format CharactersUsage
%cCharacter
%d (or) %iSigned decimal integer
%sString
%uUnsigned decimal integer
%0Octal integer
%x or %XHexadecimal integer (lower case x refers a-f; upper case X refers A-F)
%e or %EExponential notation
%fFloating point numbers
%g or %GShort numbers in floating-point or exponential notation.

Question 10.
Give the general format of replace function.
replace(“char1”, “char2″)
The replace function replaces all occurrences of charl with char2.

Example:
>>> str1=”How are you”
>>> print (strl)
How are you
>>>print (str1.replace(“o”, “e”))
Hew are yeu

Question 11.
Write a note on Escape Sequence in Python
Answer:

Escape SequenceDescription
\ newlineBackslash and newline ignored
\\Backslash
\’Single quote
\”Double quote
\aASCII Bell
\bASCII Backspace
\fASCII Form feed
\nASCII Linefeed
\rASCII Carriage Return
\tASCII Horizontal Tab
\vASCII Vertical Tab
\oooA character with an octal value 000
\xHHA character with hexadecimal value HH

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 12.
What will be the output of the following Python code?
Strl = “Madurai”
print(Strl*3)
Output:
Madurai Madurai Madurai

Question 13.
What will be output of the following Python snippet?
strl=” THOLK APPIY AM” print(strl[4:])
print(strl[4::2])
print(strl[::3])
print(strl[::-3])
Output:
Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations 1

Question 14.
What will be the output of the following python program?
str1 = “welcome”
str2 = “to school”
str3 = strl[:3]+str2[len(str2)-1:] print(str3)
Output: Well

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

III. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Write a python program to check whether the given string is palindrome or not.
Answer:
str1 = input (“Enter a string:”)
str2 =”
index=-1
for i in strl:
str2 += str1 [index]
index -=1
print (“The given string = {} \n The Reversed string = {}”.format(strl, str2)) if (strl==str2):
print (“Hence, the given string is Palindrome”)
else:
print (“Hence, the given is not a palindrome”)

Question 2.
Write a python program to display the number of vowels and consonants in the given string.
Answer:
str1=input (“Enter a string:”)
str2=” a AeEiloOuU”
v,c=0,0
for i in str1:
if i in str2: .
v+=1
else:
c+=1
print (“The given string contains {} vowels and {} consonants.format(v.c))

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 3.
Explain how the positive and negative subscript values are assigned? Give example.
Answer:
The positive subscript 0 is assigned to the first character and n-1 to the last character, where n is the number of characters in the string. The negative index assigned from the last character to the first character in reverse order begins with -1.

StringSCHOOL
Positive subscript012345
Built-in functions-6-5-4-3-2-1

Question 4.
Explain “Membership Operators suitable example.
Answer:

  • The ‘in’ and ‘not in’ operators can be used with strings to determine whether a string is present in another string.
  • Therefore, these operators are called Membership Operators.

Example:
strl=input (“Enter a string:”)
str2=” Chennai”
if str2 in str1:
print (“Found”)
else:
print (“Not Found”)

Output:1
Enter a string: Chennai GHSS, Saidapet Found
Output:2
Enter a string: Govt GHSS, Ashok Nagar Not Found

Question 5.
Write the output for the following Python commands: str1=”Welcome to Python”
(i) print(strl) (ii) print(strl[ll: 17])
(iii) print(strl[ll: 17 : 2])
(iv) print(strl[:: 4])
(v) print(strl[:: -4])
Output:
>>> strl=” Welcome to Python’
>>> print(strl)
Welcome to Python
>>> print(strl[ll: 17])
Python
>>> print(strl[ll: 17 : 2])
Pto
>>> print(strl[:: 4])
Wotyn
>>> print(strl[:: -4])
nytoW

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 6.
Write a program to accept a string and print it in reverse order.
Answer:
Coding:
strl = input (“Enter a string:”)
Index=-1
while index > = -(lentstrll)):
print (“Subscript”,index,”] :”
+ strl [index])
index +=-1
Output:
Enter a string: welcome Subscript [ -1 ]: e
Subscript [ -2 ]: m
Subscript [ -3 ]: 0
Subscript [ -4 ]: c
Subscript [-5]: 1
Subscript [ -6 ] : e
Subscript [ -7 ] :w

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 8 Strings and String Manipulations

Question 7.
Write a simple python program with list of five marks and print the sum of all the marks using while loop.
Answer:
Python Program:
mark-[]
for x in range(0,5): num=int(input(“Enter Mark:”))
mark+=(num,)
print(mark)
c=len(mark)
i=0
sum=0
while i<c:
sum+=mark[i]
i+=1
print(” Sum=” ,sum)
Output:
Enter Mark:60
Enter Mark:70
Enter Mark:80
Enter Mark:90
Enter Mark:100
[60, 70,80, 90,100]
Sum= 400

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Tamilnadu State Board New Syllabus Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Pdf Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary Text Book Back Questions and Answers, Notes.

Tamilnadu Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Solutions Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

12th Computer Science Guide Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary Text Book Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer (1 Marks)

Question 1.
Pick odd one in connection with collection data type
a) List
b) Tuple
c) Dictionary
d) Loop
Answer:
d) Loop

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 2.
Let list l=[2,4,6,8,10], then print(Listl[-2]) will result in
a) 10
b) 8
c) 4
d) 6
Answer:
b) 8

Question 3.
Which of the following function is used to count the number of elements in a list?
a) count()
b) find()
c) len()
d) index()
Answer:
c) len()

Question 4.
If List= [10,20,30,40,50] then List[2]=35 will result ~
a) [35,10,20,30,40,50]
b) [10,20,30,40,50,35]
c) [10,20,35,40,50)
d) [10,35,30,40,50]
Answer:
c) [10,20,35,40,50]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 5.
If List= [17,23,41,10] then List.append (32) will result
a) [32,17,23,41,10]
b) [17,23,41,10,32]
c) [10,17,23,32,41]
d) [41,32,23,17,10]
Answer:
b) [17,23,41,10,32]

Question 6.
Which of the following Python function can be used to add more than one element within an existing list?
a) append ()
b) append_more()
c) extend ()
d) more()
Answer:
c) extend()

Question 7.
What will be the result of the following Python code?
S=[x**2 for x in range(5)]
print(S)
a) [0,1,2,4,5]
b) [0,1,4,9,16]
c) [0,1,4,9,16,25]
d) [1,4,9,16,25]
Answer:
b) [0,1,4,9,16]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 8.
What is the use of type() function in python?
a) To create a Tuple
b) To know the type of an element in the tuple
c) To know the data type of python object
d) To create a list.
Answer:
c) To know the data type of python object

Question 9.
Which of the following statement is not correct?
a) A list is mutable
b) A tuple is immutable.
c) The append () function is used to add an element.
d) The extend () function is used in tuple to add elements in a list.
Answer:
d) The extend() function is used in tuple to add elements in a list.

Question 10.
Let setA={3,6,9], setB={l,3,9}. What will be the result of the following snippet? print(setA | setB)
a) {3,6,9,1,3,9}
b) {3,9} c) {1}
c) {1}
d) {1,3,6,9}
Answer:
d) [1,3,6,9}

Question 11.
Which of the following set operation includes all the elements that are in two sets but not the one that are common to two sets?
a) Symmetric difference
b) Difference
c) Intersection
d) Union
Answer:
a) Symmetric difference

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 12.
The keys in Python, the dictionary is specified by
a) =
b) ;
c) +
d) :
Answer:
d) :

II. Answer the following questions (2 Marks)

Question 1.
What is List in Python?
Answer:
A list in Python is known as a “sequence data type” like strings. It is an ordered collection of values enclosed within square brackets [ ]. Each value of a list is called an element.

Question 2.
How will you access the list elements in reverse order?
Answer:

  • Python enables reverse or negative indexing for the list elements.
  • Thus, python lists index in the opposite order.
  • The python sets -1 as the index value for the last element in the list and -2 for the preceding element and so on. This is called Reverse Indexing.

Example: Age = [15,20,29,45,60]

Age1520294560
Positive index01234
Negative index-5-4-3-2-1

Question 3.
What will be the value of x in the following python code?
Answer:
List1=[2, 4, 6, [1, 3, 5]]
x=len(List1)
Ans: 4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 4.
Differentiate del with remove() the function of List.
Answer:

del statementremove () function
1. del is a statement used to delete the known elements of a listremove() the function is used to delete elements of a list if its index is unknown.
2. The del command can also be used to delete the entire list.The remove () function can be used to delete one or more elements if the index value is not known.

Question 5.
Write the syntax of creating a Tuple with n number of elements.
Answer:
# Tuple with n number elements
Tuple _ Name = (E1, E2, E2 ……………… En)
# Elements of a tuple without parenthesis
Tuple_Name = E1, E2, E3 …………………. En

Question 6.
What is set in Python?
Answer:

  • Set is another type of collection data type.
  • A Set is a mutable and unordered collection of elements without duplicates.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

III. Answer the following questions (3 Marks)

Question 1.
What are the advantages of Tuples over a list?
Answer:

  • The elements of a list are changeable (mutable) whereas the elements of a tuple are unchangeable (immutable), this is the key difference between tuples and list.
  • The elements of a list are enclosed within square brackets. But, the elements of a tuple are enclosed by parentheses.
  • Iterating tuples is faster than a list.

Question 2.
Write a shot note about sort().
Answer:
Function : Sort ()
Syntax:
List.sort( reverse=True | False, key=my Func)

  • Both arguments are optional.
  • If reverse is set as True, list sorting is in descending order.
  • Ascending is default.

Description:
Sort () function sorts the element in list

Example:
MyList=[‘Thilothamma’, ‘Tharani’, ‘Anitha’, ‘SaiSree’, ‘Lavanya’]
MyList.sort()
print(MyList)
MyList.sort(reverse=True)
print(MyList)
Output:
[‘Anitha’, ‘Lavanya’, ‘SaiSree’, ‘Tharani’, ‘Thilothamma’]
[‘Thilothamma’, ‘Tharani’, ‘SaiSree’, ‘Lavanya’, ‘Anitha’]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 3.
What will be the output of the following code?
list = [2**x for x in range(5)] print(list)
Output:
[1,2,4,8,16]

Question 4.
Explain the difference between del and clear() in the dictionary with an example.
Answer:

delclear()
1. del keyword is used to delete a particular element of a dictionaryThe clear() function is used to delete all the elements in a dictionary
2. del keyword can be used to remove the dictionaryThe clear() function is used to delete all the elements in a dictionary not a dictionary structure.
3. Example: del Dict[‘MarkT] del DietExample: Dict.clear()

Question 5.
List out the set operations supported by python.
Answer:
The python supports the set operations such as
Union, Intersection, Difference, and Symmetric difference.

Union:

  • The union includes all elements from two or more sets.
  • In python, the operator | (pipeline) is used to the union of two) sets.
  • The function union() is also used to join two sets in python.

Intersection:

  • Intersection includes the common elements in two sets.
  • The operator & is used to intersect two sets in python.
  • The function intersection() is also used to intersect two sets in python.

Difference:

  • The difference includes all elements that are in the first set (say set A) but not in the second set (say set B).
  • The minus (-) operator is used to difference set operation in python.
  • The function difference() is also used to difference operation.

Symmetric difference:

  • The symmetric difference includes all the elements that are in two sets (say sets A and B) but not the one that are common to two sets.
  • The caret (A) operator is used to symmetric difference set operation in python.
  • The function symmetric_difference() is also used to do the same operation.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 6.
What are the differences between List and Dictionary?
Answer:

ListDictionary
List is an ordered set of elementsDictionary is a data structure that is used for matching one element (Key) with another (Value).
The index values can be used to access a particular element.In dictionary, key represents an index and key may be a number of a string.
Lists are used to look up a valueDictionary is used to take one value and look up another value.

IV. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
What the different ways to insert an element in a list. Explain with suitable example.
Answer:
append( ) function in Python is used to add more elements to a list. But, it includes elements at the end of a list. If you want to include an element at your desired position, you can use the insert () function is used to insert an element at any position of a list.
Syntax:
List, insert (position index, element)
Example:
>>> MyList=[34,98,47, ‘Kannan’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’, ‘Sreenivasan’ ]
>>> print(MyList)
[34, 98, 47, ‘Kannan’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’, ‘Sreenivasan’]
>>> MyList.insert(3, ‘Ramakrishnan’)
>>> print(MyList)
[34, 98, 47, ‘Ramakrishnan’, ‘Kannan’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’, ‘Sreenivasan’]
In the above example, insertf) function inserts a new element ‘Ramakrishnan’ at the index value 3, ie. at the 4th position. While inserting a new element in between the existing elements, at a particular location, the existing elements shifts one position to the right.

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 2.
What is the purpose of range()? Explain with an example.
Answer:
(i) The range( ) is a function used to generate a series of values in Python. Using the range( ) function, you can create list with series of values. The range( ) function has three arguments.
Syntax of range( ) function:
range (start value, end value, step value)
where,

  • start value – beginning value of series. Zero is the default beginning value.
  • end value – the upper limit of series. Python takes the ending value as upper limit – 1.
  • step value – It is an optional argument, which is used to generate different intervals of values.

Example: Generating whole numbers upto 10
for x in range (1, 11):
print(x)
Output
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

(ii) Creating a list with series of values
Using the range( ) function, you can create a list with series of values. To convert the result of range( ) function into list, we need one more function called list( ). The list( ) function makes the result of range( ) as a list.
Syntax:
List_Varibale = list ( range ( ) )
Note
The list( ) function is all so used to create list in python.
Example
>>> Even_List = list(range(2,11,2))
>>> print(Even_List)
[2, 4, 6, 8, 10]
In the above code, list( ) function takes the result of range( ) as Even List elements. Thus, Even _List list has the elements of first five even numbers.

(iii) We can create any series of values using the range( ) function. The following example explains how to create a list with squares of the first 10 natural numbers.
Example: Generating squares of first 10 natural numbers
squares = [ ]
for x in range(1,11):
s = x ** 2
squares.append(s)
print (squares)
Output
[1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81, 100]

Question 3.
What is a nested tuple? Explain with an example.’
Answer:

  • In Python, a tuple can be defined inside another tuple; called a Nested tuple.
  • In a nested tuple, each tuple is considered as an element.
  • The for loop will be useful to access all the elements in a nested tuple.

Example:
Toppers = ((“Vinodini”, “XII-P”, 98.7),
Ç’Soundarya”, “XII-H”, 97.5),
(“Tharani”, “XII-P”, 95.3),
(“Saisri”, “XII-G”, 93.8))
for j in Toppers:
print(i)
Output:
(Vinodini’, ‘XII-F’, 98.7)
(Soundarya’, ‘XII-H’, 97.5)
(Tharani’, ‘XII-F’, 95.3)
(‘Saisri’, ‘XII-G’, 93.8)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 4.
Explain the different supported by python example.
Answer:
The python supports the set operations such as
Union, Intersection, difference and Symmetric difference.

Union:

  • Union includes all elements from two or more sets.
  • In python, the operator | (pipe line) is used to union of two sets.
  • The function union( ) is also used to join two sets in python.

Example:
Program to Join (Union) two sets using union operator and union function
set_A={2,4,6,8}
set_B={‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’, ‘D’}
U_set=set_A 1 set_B
print(U _set)
set_ U=set_ A.union(set_ B)
Output:
{2,4,6,8,’A’,’DVC’,’B’}
{‘D’, 2,4, 6,8,’B’,’C’,’A’}

Intersection:

  • Intersection includes the common elements in two sets.
  • The operator & is used to intersect two sets in python.
  • The function intersection() is also used to intersect two sets in python.

Example:
Program to insect two sets using intersection operator and intersection function
set_A={‘A’, 2,4, ‘D’}
set_B={‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C, ‘D’}
print(set_A&set_B)
print( set_A.intersection( set_B)
output:
{‘A’, ‘D’}
{‘A’/D’}

Difference:

  • Difference includes all elements that are in first set (say set A) but not in the second set (say set B).
  • The minus (-) operator is used to difference set operation in python.
  • The function difference() is also used to difference operation.

Example:
Program to difference of two sets using minus operator and difference function
set_A={‘A’, 2,4, ‘D’}
set_B={‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’, ‘D’}
print(set_A – set B)
print(set_A.difference( set_B))
Output:
{2/4}
{2/4}

Symmetric difference:

  • Symmetric difference includes all the elements that are in two sets (say sets A and B) but not the one that are common to two sets.
  • The caret (^) operator is used to symmetric difference set operation in python.
  • The function symmetric_difference( ) is also used to do the same operation.

Example:
Program to symmetric difference of two
sets using caret operator and symmetric
difference function
set_A={‘A’, 2,4, ‘D’}
set_B={‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’, ‘D’}
print(set_A ^ set_B)
print( set_A.symmetric_difference(set_B))
Output:
{2,4,’B’,’C’}
{2,4, ‘B’, ‘C’}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

12th Computer Science Guide Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary Additional Important Questions and Answers

I. Choose the best answer (1 Mark)

Question 1.
A list in python is denoted by ………………………..
(a) [ ]
(b) { }
(c) <>
(d) #
Answer:
(a) [ ]

Question 2.
Which of the following is an ordered collection of values?
a) Tuples
b) List
c) Set
d) Dictionary
Answer:
b) List

Question 3.
Each value of a list is called as
(a) Set
(b) Dictionary
(c) Element
(d) Strings
Answer:
(c) Element

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 4.
In the list, the negative index number begins with
a) 0
b) 1
c) -1
d) 0.1
Answer:
c) -1

Question 5.
To access the list elements in reverse order, ……………………. value has to be given
(a) 0
(b) positive
(c) imaginary
(d) negative
Answer:
(d) negative

Question 6.
Which of the following can be used to access an element in a list?
a) Index value
b) Function
c) Integer
d) Identifier
Answer:
a) Index value

Question 7.
In sim = [4,20,71,89], the negative index value of 20 is
a) 2
b) -2
c) -1
d) -3
Answer:
d) -3

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 8.
Which function is used to set the upper limit in a loop to read all elements of a list?
a) upper ()
b) limit
c) len ()
d) loop ()
Answer:
c) len ()

Question 9.
Which function shows the deleted element as soon as the element is deleted
a) Remove
b) pop
c) Delete
d) erase
Answer:
b) pop

Question 10.
What is the output for the following?
sim = [T’, ‘E’, ‘A’, ‘M’]
for i in sim:
print (sim [2])
a) T
b) A
c) C
d) M
Answer:
b) A

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 11.
…………………….. operator is used to changing the list of elements
(a) =
(b) +
(c) +=
(d) *=
Answer:
(a) =

Question 12.
Which of the following function is used to add more than one element in an existing list?
a) append ()
b) extend ()
c) more ()
d) addmore ()
Answer:
b) extend ()

Question 13.
What is the output for the following,
mylist = [34,45,48]
print(mylist. append (90))
a) 34,45,48,90
b) 90,34,45,48
c) 34,45,90,84
d) 34,45,90,48
Answer:
a) 34,45,48,90

Question 14.
Which of the following function used to include an element in a list at the desired position?
a) append ()
b) extend ()
c) insert ()
d) format ()
Answer:
c) insert ()

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 15.
Write the output,
list = [34, 45, 48]
list.append(90)
(a) [34, 45, 48, 90]
(b) [90, 34, 45, 48]
(c) [34, 90, 45, 48]
(d) [34, 45, 90, 48]
Answer:
(a) [34, 45, 48, 90]

Question 16.
Which function can also be used to delete one or more elements if the index value is not known.
a) push()
b) remove ()
c) delete ()
d) delmore ()
Answer:
b) remove ()

Question 17.
Which of the following command deletes only the elements in the list?
a) erase ()
b) pop ()
c) clear ()
d) remove ()
Answer:
c) clear ()

Question 18.
Creating a Tuple with one element is called a tuple.
a) mono
b) single
c) Singleton
d) Singular
Answer:
c) Singleton

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

II. Answer the following questions (2 and 3 Marks)

Question 1.
Write a note on the nested list?
Answer:
My list = [ “Welcome”, 3.14, 10, [2, 4, 6] ]
In the above example, My list contains another list as an element. A nested list is a list containing another list as an element.

Question 2.
Give short notes on Tuple’s assignment.
Answer:

  • Tuple assignment is a powerful feature in Python.
  • It allows a tuple variable on the left of the assignment operator to be assigned to the values on the right side of the assignment operator.
  • Each value is assigned to its respective variable.

Example;
>>> (a,b;c) = (34, 90, 76)
>>> print(a.b,c)
34 90 76

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 3.
Explain how can you create a set in python with an example.
Answer:

  • A set is created by placing all the elements separated by comma within a pair of curly brackets.
  • The set( ) function can also used to create sets in Python.

Syntax:
Set_ Variable = {E1, E2, E3 En}

Example:
>>> S1 = {1,2,3,’A’,3.14}
>>> print(S1)
{1, 2, 3, 3.14, ‘A’}
>>> S2={1,2,2,’A’,3.14}
>>> print(S2)
{1,2,’A’, 3.14}

Question 4.
What is meant by Reverse Indexing?
Answer:
Python enables reverse or negative indexing for the list elements. Thus, python lists indexes in the opposite order. The python sets -1 as the index value for the last element in list and -2 for the preceding element and so on. This is called Reverse Indexing.

Question 5.
Explain Dictionary Comprehension.
Answer:
In Python, comprehension is another way of creating a dictionary.

Syntax: ,
Diet = {expression for variable in sequence
[if condition]}
The if condition is optional and if specified, only those values in the sequence are evaluated using the expression which satisfy the condition.

Example:
Diet = {x : 2 * x for x in range(1,10)}
Output:
{1: 2,2: 4, 3: 6,4: 8,5:10,6:12,7:14,8:16,9:18}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 6.
What are the four collections of data types in a python programming language?
Answer:
Python programming language has four collections of data types such as List, Tuples, Set, and Dictionary.

Question 7.
Differentiate clear( ) and del in list?
Answer:
The function clear( ) is used to delete all the elements in list, it deletes only the elements and retains the list. Remember that, the del statement deletes entire list.

Question 8.
Differentiate append () and extend () function..
Answer:

append ()extend ()
append() function is used to add a single elementextend() the function is used to add more than one element to an existing list.

Question 9.
What will be the output of the following snippet?
Answer:
alpha=list(range(65,70))
for x in alpha:
print(chr(x), end=’\t’)
Output:
A B C D E

Question 10.
What will be the output of the following code?
Answer:
list=[3** x for x in range (5)]
print(list)
Output: [1, 3, 9, 27,81]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 11.
How to delete elements from the list.
Answer:

  • There are two ways to delete an element from a list viz. del statement and remove() function.
  • del statement is used to delete known elements whereas removing] ) the function is used to delete elements of a list if its index is unknown.
  • The del statement can also be used to delete the entire list.

Syntax:
To delete a particular element:
del List [index of an element]
To delete multiple elements:
del List [index from : index to]
To delete entire list:
del List Syntax: remove ()
# to delete a particular element
List. remove (element)

Question 12.
Write notes on pop () and clear () function.
Answer:
Pop() function:

  • pop () function can also be used to delete an element using the given index value.
  • pop () function deletes and returns the last element of a list if the index is not given.

Syntax : List.pop(index of an element)
clear () function:

  • clear () function is used to delete all the elements in list.
  • It deletes only the elements and retains the list.

Syntax: List.clear()

Question 13.
Define Tuple in python with syntax?
Answer:

  • Tuples consists of a number of values separated by comma and enclosed within parentheses.
  • Tuple is similar to list, values in a list can be changed but not in a tuple.

Syntax:
#Empty tuple:
Tuple_Name = ()
#Tuple with n number elements:
Tuple_Name = () (E1, E2, E3, En)
#Elements of a tuple without parenthesis:
Tuple_Name = E1, E2, E3, …….. En

Question 14.
Write notes on tuple () function? Give example.
Answer:

  • The tuple ( ) function is used to create Tuples from a list.
  • When you create a tuple from a list, the elements should be enclosed within square brackets.

Example:
MyTup3 = tuple( [23,45,90])
>>> print(MyTup3)
(23,45,90)

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 15.
How to create a set using a list or tuple? Give an example.
Answer:

  • A list or Tuple can be converted as set by using set() function.
  • First a List or Tuple can be created then, substitute its variable within set() function as argument.

Example:
MyList= [2,4,6,8,10]
MySet=set(MyList)
print(MySet)
Output:
[2,4, 6,8,10}

Question 16.
Give notes on Dictionary in Python.
Answer:

  • Dictionary is a mixed collection of elements.
  • Unlike other collection data types such as a list or tuple, the dictionary type stores a key along with its element.
  • The keys in a Python dictionary is separated by a colon ( : ) while the commas work as a separator for the elements.
  • The key-value pairs are enclosed with curly braces {}.

Question 17.
Give notes on len() function of a list with
an example.
Answer:

  • The len() function in Python is used to find the length of a list. (i.e., the number of elements in a list).
  • Usually, the len() function is used to set the upper limit in a loop to read all the elements of a list.
  • If a list contains another list as an element, len() returns that inner list as a single element.

Example:
Accessing single element
>>> MySubject = [‘Tamil’, ‘English’,
‘Comp’, ‘Science’, ‘Maths’]
>>>len(MySubject)
4

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 18.
Define List comprehensions.
Answer:
List comprehension is the simplest way of creating a sequence of elements that satisfy a certain condition.
Syntax:
List = [ expression for variable in range ]

Example:
Generating squares of first 10 natural numbers using the concept of List comprehension.
>>> squares = [x ** 2 for x in range(l, 11) ]
>>> print (squares)
Output:
[1,4,9,16,25,36,49,64,81,100]

Question 19.
What is the difference in between List and Tuple.
Answer:

ListTuple
1In a list, elements are defined within square brackets.Tuples consists of a number of values separated by comma and enclosed within parentheses even defined without parenthesis
2Values in a list can be changedValues in a tuple cannot be changed

Question 20.
Write execution table for the following Python code.
Answer:
Marks=[10/ 20, 30,40, 50]
i = 0
sum = 0
while i < 4
sum+=Marks[i]
i+=1

Execution Table:

S.Noii<4MarksSumi + 1
100<4 (True)10101
211<4 (True)20302
322< 4 (True)30603
433<4 (True)40 .1004
544<4 (False)

Question 21.
What will be the output of the following snippet?
Answer:
Mydict={chr(x):x for x in range(97,102)} Print(Mydict)
Output:
{‘a’: 97, ‘b’: 98, ‘c’: 99, ‘d’: 100, ‘e’: 101}

Question 22.
What will be the output of the following snippet?
Answer:
set_A = {‘A’. 2,4, ‘D’}
Set_B = {‘A’, ‘B’, ‘C’, ‘D’}
print(set_A & set_B)
Output:
{‘A’, ‘D’}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

III. Answer the following questions (5 Marks)

Question 1.
Explain how to access all elements of a list using while ioop with suitable example
Answer:

  • Loops are used to access all elements from a list. 1PTA – 61
  • The initial value of the ioop must be zero.
  • Zero is the beginning index value of a list.

Example:
Marks = [10, 23,41,75] .
i=O
whilei<4:
print (Marks[i])
i=i+1

Output:
10
23
41
75

  • In the above example, Marks list contains four integer elements i.e., 10, 23, 41, 75. Each element has an. index value from 0. The index value of the elements are 0,1, 2, 3 respectively.
  • Here, the while loop is used to read all the elements. The initial value of the loop is zero, and the test condition is < 4, as long as the test condition is true, the loop executes and prints the corresponding output.
  • During the first iteration, the value of i is zero, where the condition is true.
  • Now, the following statement print (Marks [i] gets executed and prints the value of Marks [0] element ie. 10.
  • The next statement i = i + 1 increments the value of i from 0 to 1.
  • Now, the flow of control shifts to the while statement for (vi) checking the test condition.
  • The process repeats to print the remaining elements of Marks list until the test condition of while loop becomes false.

The following table shows that the execution of loop and the value to be print.

Iterationiwhile
i<4
print
(Marks[i])
i=i +1
100< 4 TrueMarks [0] =100+1=1
211 < 4 TrueMarks [1]=231+1=2
322 < 4 TrueMarks [2] =412+1=3
433 < 4 TrueMarks [3]=753+1=4
544 < 4 False

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 2.
Write a python program using list to read marks of six subjects and to print the marks scored in each subject and show the total marks.
Python program to read marks of six subjects and to print the marks scored in each subject and show the total marks
Answer:
marks=[ ]
subjects=[‘Tamir, ‘English’, ‘Physics’, ‘Chemistry’, ‘Comp. Science’, ‘Maths’]
for i in range(6):
m=int(input(“Enter Mark = “))
marks.append(m)
for j in range(len(marks)):
print(“{ }. { } Mark= { } “.format(jl+,subjects[j],marks[j]))
print(“Total Marks = “, sum(marks))
Output:

  • Enter Mark = 45
  • Enter Mark = 98
  • Enter Mark = 76
  • Enter Mark = 28
  • Enter Mark = 46
  • Enter Mark = 15
    1. Tamil Mark = 45
    2. English Mark = 98
    3. Physics Mark = 76
    4. Chemistry Mark = 28
    5. Comp. Science Mark = 46
    6. Maths Mark = 15
    7. Total Marks = 308

Question 3.
Explain remove, pop () and clear () used in list with an example.
Asnwer:
remove():
The remove() function can also be used to delete one or more elements if the index value is not known.
Syntax: List.remove(element) # to delete a particular element
Example: >>>MyList = [12,89,34/Kannan’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’]
>>> print(MyList)
[12,89,34, ‘Karman’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’)
>>>MyList.remove(89)
>>>print(MyList)
[12, 34, ‘Karman’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’]

pop ():

  • pop() function can also be used to delete an element using the given index value.
  • Pop() function deletes and returns the last element of a list if the index is not given.
  • pop() function is used to delete a particular element using its index value, as soon as the element is deleted.
  • The pop() function shows the element which is deleted, pop ( ) function is used to delete only one element from a list.

Syntax:
List, pop (index of an element)

Example:
>>> MyList.pop(1)
34
>>> print (My List)
[12, ‘Kannan’, ‘Gowrisankar’, ‘Lenin’)

clear ():

  • The clear() function is used to delete all the elements in list, it deletes only the elements and retains the list.
  • clear () function removes only the elements and retains the list.
  • When you try to print the list which is already cleared, an empty square bracket is displayed without any elements, which means the list is empty.

Syntax:
List.clear()
Example:
>>>MyList.clear()
>>> print(MyList)
[]

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 4.
Explain the following functions used in list function with an example. max(), min(),sum()
Answer:

Function

DescriptionSyntax

Example

max()Returns the maximum value in a list.max (list)MyList= [21,76,98,23] print(max(MyList))
Output:
98
min()Returns the minimum value in a list.min(list)My List= [21,76,98,23] print (min(My List))
Output:
21
sum()Returns the sum of values in a list.sum(list)My List= [21,76,98,23] print(sum(MyList))
Output:
218

Question 5.
Explain the following functions used in list function with an example. 1. copy () 2. count () 3. index () 4. reverse () 5.sort ()
Answer:

FunctionDescriptionSyntaxExample
copy ()Returns a copy of the listList.copy()MyList=[12,12, 36] x = MyList.copy() print(x)
Output:
[12,12, 36]
count ()Returns the number of similar elements present in the list.List.

count(value)

MyList=[36,12,12] x = MyList.count(12) print(x)
Output:
2
index ()Returns the index value of the first recurring elementList.

index (element)

MyList=[36,12,12] x = MyList.index(12) print(x)
Output:
0
reverse ()Reverses the order of the element in the list.List.reverse()MyList=[36,23,12] MyList.reverse() print(MyList)
Output:
[12,23,36]
sort ()Sorts the element in listList.sort(reverse=True | False, key=myFunc)
Both arguments are optional If the reverse is set as True, list sorting is in descending order.
Ascending is the default.
Key=myFunc; “myFunc” – the name of the user defined function that specifies the sorting criteria.
Note: sort() will affect the original list.
My List= [‘Thilothamma, Tharani’, ‘Anitha, ‘SaiSree, ‘Lavanya’] MyList.sort() print(MyList)
MyList.sort(reverse=True)
print(MyList)
Output:
[‘Anitha7, ‘Lavanya7, ‘SaiSree’, ‘Tharani7, ‘Thilothamma7]
[‘Thilothamma7, ‘Tharani7, ‘SaiSree7, 7Lavanya7, ‘Anitha’]

Question 6.
Answer:
6. What will be the output of the following Python program?
A{x*3 for x in range (1,6))
B{y**2 for y in range (1,10,2))
print(A)
print(B) .
print(A | 13)
print(A-B)
print(A&B)
print (A ^ B)
Output:
A={x*3 for x in range(1,6)}
B={y**2 for y in range(1,10,2)}
print(A) → {3, 6, 9, 12, 15}
print(B) → {1, 9, 25, 49, 81}
print (A I B) → {1, 3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 25, 49, 81}
print(A-B) → {3, 6, 12, 15}
print(A&B) → {9}
print(A”B) → {1, 3, 6, 12, 15, 25, 49, 81}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 7.
What will be the output of the following Python program?
N = [ ]
for x in range(l,ll):
N.append(x)
Num=tuple(N)
print(Num)
for index, i in enumerate(N): if(i%2==l): .
del N[index]
print(N)
Output:
[2,4, 6, 8,10]

Question 8.
What will be the output of the following Python program?
A ={x*3 for x in range (1,6)}
B={y**2 for y in range (1,10,2)}
Print(A)
Print(B)
Print(A | B)
Print(A-B)
Print(A&B)
Print(AAB)
Output:
>>> A={x*3 for x in range(l,6)}
>>> B={y**2 for y in range(1,10,2)}
>>> print(A)
{3, 6, 9,12,15}
>>>print(B)
{1, 9,81,49,25}
>>> print(A | B)
{1,3, 6, 9,12,15, 81,49, 25}
>>> print(A-B)
{3,12, 6,15}
>>> print(A&B)
{9}
>>> print(A^B)
{1,3, 6,12,15, 81, 25,49}

Samacheer Kalvi 12th Computer Science Guide Chapter 9 Lists, Tuples, Sets and Dictionary

Question 9.
Write a program using a function that returns the area and circumference of a circle whose radius is passed as an argument two values using tuple assignment. Program using a function that returns the area and circumference of a circle whose radius is passed as an argument. Assign two values using tuple assignment:
Answer:
pi = 3.14
def Circle(r):
return (pi*r*r, 2*pi*r)
radius = float(input(“Enter the Radius! “))
(area, circum) = Circle(radius)
print (“Area of the circle = “, area)
print (“Circumference of the circle = “, circum)
Output:
Enter the Radius: 5
Area of the circle = 78.5
Circumference of the circle = 31.400000000000002